diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-0.txt | 6385 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-0.zip | bin | 114120 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-h.zip | bin | 662393 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-h/63099-h.htm | 6211 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 253767 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-h/images/ifpc.jpg | bin | 247488 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63099-h/images/itpg.jpg | bin | 48220 -> 0 bytes |
10 files changed, 17 insertions, 12596 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6744974 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #63099 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/63099) diff --git a/old/63099-0.txt b/old/63099-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c9f730e..0000000 --- a/old/63099-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6385 +0,0 @@ -Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa, by Gerald Breckenridge - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa - -Author: Gerald Breckenridge - -Release Date: September 2, 2020 [EBook #63099] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA *** - - - - -Produced by Roger Frank - - - - - - - - - THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA - - - - -[Illustration: “You certainly won his heart that time, Bob. Look at his -face if you want to see real amazement.”] - - - - - THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA - - By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE - - Author of - “The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio - Boys with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys - on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys - Search for the Inca’s Treasure,” “The Radio - Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition” - “The Radio Boys Seek the Lost Atlantis.” - - A. L. BURT COMPANY - Publishers New York - - - - - THE - RADIO BOYS SERIES - A SERIES OF STORIES FOR BOYS OF ALL AGES - By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE - - The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border - The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty - The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards - The Radio Boys Search for the Inca’s Treasure - The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition - The Radio Boys Seek the Lost Atlantis - The Radio Boys In Darkest Africa - - Copyright, 1923 - By A. L. BURT COMPANY - THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA - Made in “U. S. A.” - - - - - THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA. - - - - - CHAPTER I. - - WIMBA’S TRIAL - - -“Look here, Jack, we ought to do something to help Wimba. I don’t -believe he’s getting a square deal.” - -“Nor I, Frank. But what can we do? Chief Ruku-Ru is supreme here. -And if he decides against Wimba—” - -Jack Hampton’s tone was as near hopeless as one could ever expect to -hear from the lips of that optimistic young adventurer. - -Nor is that to be wondered at. The predicament of their head man, -Wimba, a Kikuyu of superior parts whose services they had been -fortunate enough to obtain at Nairobi, administrative capital of -British East Africa or Kenya Colony, was serious. - -Here on the far fringe of the Kikuyu country, several hundred miles -from Nairobi, the nearest outpost of white civilization in Central -Africa, Wimba was being tried on a charge of murder. Chief Ruku-Ru, -head of the local tribesmen, presiding as judge, gave every -indication of being about to sentence Wimba to death. - -And the two boys knew Wimba was innocent. They believed the latter’s -story. Wimba said he had come upon two local tribesmen stealing from -the effects of his employers and that, when discovered, they had -attacked him. Fighting in self-defense he had been unfortunate -enough to kill one, whereupon the other had run to Chief Ruku-Ru -with the tale that Wimba had murdered his comrade. - -During the course of the trial, which was being held beneath a great -thorn tree, Jack Hampton and Frank Merrick had been breathless -spectators. Their companion. Bob Temple, lay weak from fever in his -tent, and could not be present. - -In an old armchair which had been brought by a trader years before -to this remote village, sat Chief Ruku-Ru, as if in a throne. His -hair was drawn to a knob on the very top of his round head. His -black face was preternaturally grave as became an administrator of -justice. Around his neck were a half dozen strands of copper wire. -His arms were covered from wrist to elbow with bracelets of similar -material. Thrown across his right shoulder and drawn together -beneath his left armpit was the single cotton garment which -constituted his only clothing. And in his right hand he held a -number of small sticks. These were important. If the prosecution -scored a point in the testimony, he planted a stick in the ground on -the right. If Wimba’s defense scored a point, he planted a stick on -his left. At the end of the trial, he would count the number of -sticks in each row and that side having the greater number would -win. - -This much had been explained to the boys by Wimba’s assistant, an -intelligent young Kikuyu named Matse. But the latter’s command of -English was not much to lean upon, and he could not inform the boys -of every point in the case. From him, however, they had learned -enough to realize that Wimba was drawing near the end of his -defense, and that the prosecution had the better of it. The pile of -sticks on the right was larger. - -“If only Dad was here,” groaned Jack, in a whisper. - -But Mr. Hampton, together with Oscar Niellsen, their cameraman, was -off on an expedition to photograph wild animals at a water hole many -miles away. - -Frank squirmed at his companion’s side. “Jack, I’ve got an idea. -It’s a long chance, but it may work.” - -“What is it?” - -For a minute or two Frank whispered in Jack’s ear, and the latter’s -face lighted up. - -“What do you think of it?” asked Frank, in conclusion, drawing back. -“Will it work?” - -“We’ll chance it,” whispered Jack, in reply, nodding. “But you’ll -have to be quick. Now scud away with Matse and leave me to do my -part.” Without further waste of words or time, Frank drawing the -young Kikuyu interpreter after him drew back amongst the -grass-thatched huts of the Kikuyu village fringing the council -square. - -His departure was unnoticed by the big crowd of tribesfolk gathered -in a circle, and hanging upon the progress of the trial. - -The minutes passed and with the passage of each one Jack grew more -anxious. But presently Frank again slipped into position beside him. - -“Thank goodness,” he whispered, breathlessly, “that we rigged up -that loudspeaker in the council tree last night.” - -“Yes,” replied Jack, “and that we haven’t had a chance to try it out -yet. Nobody knows it’s there, But was Bob all right?” - -“A little weak yet,” replied Frank. “But he took charge of -operations, all right. Was tickled to death.” - -“Well, we meant to give them a concert out of the council tree,” -said Jack. “But this will be better. Wonder we didn’t think of it -before.” - -“Oh, well,” replied Frank, “so long as the idea came to us in time, -what does it matter?” - -“But Matse?” asked Jack, anxiously. “Does he understand the part -he’ll have to play? Will he handle it all right?” - -Frank smiled confidently. “When I give him the signal,” he said, -“Matse will do his part, never fear. He’d undertake anything in -order to save Wimba. But we’re not out of the woods yet, Jack. We -don’t know what’s going on. Oh, if we only had another boy who could -speak English and could translate this for us.” - -Jack gripped his companion’s arm. “Look, Frank, the trial is over. -Now Chief Ruku-Ru is about to pronounce sentence. See. Wimba is -staring hard at us. Poor fellow, he believes his end has come and -what a look of dumb appeal. Up, Frank, it’s time to act I’m sure.” - -From their place on the outskirts and a little to one side of the -semi-circle of savages, Frank and Jack rose with white determined -faces and advanced the few steps necessary to bring them face to -face with Chief Ruku-Ru seated opposite across the open space -surrounding him. - -The tall warriors forming the chief’s guard, coal-black, six foot -tall, magnificent specimens of manhood, stood aghast. What did the -white strangers contemplate? - -Chief Ruku-Ru half rose from his chair in anger at this -interruption. But before he could give a command to have the boys -seized, if such discourtesy to his guests was contemplated, Jack -holding himself proudly erect addressed the throne. - -“Oh, great chief,” he cried in English, “we be strangers in your -land, it is true. Yet have we watched with interest the progress of -this trial, and your impartial conduct. But we believe you have been -deceived by liars amongst those who seek Wimba’s life. Therefore we -appeal to our gods to speak from the sky and tell you the truth. -Wimba,” he commanded, “tell the chief what I have said. Forget -nothing. There will be a voice from the sky and in the chief’s own -language. Do not fear. But speak quickly.” - -From his position between two tall Kikuyu warriors, Wimba who stood -to the left of the chief, had been listening in blankest -astonishment. His strong face with the thin lips and intelligent -lines of many of the Kikuyu tribesmen had betrayed as much despair -as his self-restraint under ordeal would permit him to betray, when -Jack had begun to speak. But now not only the despair but the -succeeding astonishment disappeared. - -“Speak Wimba,” commanded Jack. “Remember what you placed in the -council tree for us last night.” - -He was safe, he knew, in thus reminding Wimba, as none in the -audience had any knowledge of English. And he had explained enough -of the mysteries of radio the previous night, when the entire -village slept after heavy potations of native beer following a royal -reception to the new guests, to give Wimba confidence now that Jack -would be able as he promised to bring a voice seemingly out of the -sky. - -At any rate, Wimba was in a desperate situation. He was ready to -grasp at any straw. Gazing about he saw the multitude of natives -crowding close, awaiting the verdict. He saw Chief Ruku-Ru -open-mouthed at the white boy’s interruption. He knew if he were -going to act, he must act at once. Otherwise the chief would order -the interrupters seized, perhaps; and most certainly would order him -slain. - -And he could not contemplate being staked out on an ant hill with -equanimity. - -Bowing low, Wimba addressed Chief Ruku-Ru in a loud voice. The boys -could not understand his words, for he spoke in the Kikuyu tongue. -But they could perceive that he was making their startling -announcement, for over the chief’s face spread a look of startled -bewilderment while through the swarm of natives sweeping around -behind them in a semi-circle passed a murmur like a wind rippling -the surface of a lake. - -They watched Wimba closely, and saw the perspiration burst on his -face. He was speaking in deadly earnestness, for it was a matter of -life or death to him. - -When Wimba ceased, Chief Ruku-Ru appeared to pull himself together -and he addressed a few sharp words to Wimba in a contemptuous tone. - -“He’s scared, but doesn’t want to show it,” was Jack’s whispered -comment. - -Frank nodded, but did not reply. His face was on that of Wimba. He -knew the crisis had come. And the prisoner’s words confirmed his -belief. - -“Bring the voice from the sky, baas,” said Wimba. “The chief says he -does not believe, but he is afraid.” - -Frank was pale as death. Stepping a few paces in front of Jack, he -paused in the middle of the open space before Chief Ruku-Ru’s -armchair throne. Then lifting his eyes skyward, as if appealing to -some Deity in the brazen vault overhead, he put his fingers between -his lips and emitted a piercing whistle. Once, twice, thrice, it -shrilled. - -Silence. - -Over all that assemblage of savage black men, over the group of -bearers cowering to one side, awaiting the verdict upon their -comrade, over the old gray-haired elders in a knot near the chief, -over the tall warriors of the guard with their spears, over the ring -of warriors with their shields of painted bullock and elephant hide -on the ground before them, over the pushing mass of women and -children behind, spread a deathlike silence. - -Every eye was lifted in awe. Every face gazed skyward. The words of -the white young men as interpreted by Wimba had spread unbelievable -amazement. They waited, fascinated, half believing, half terrified, -for the voice from the sky which the white men had promised. - -Then it came. - -From the top of the great council tree apparently boomed out a voice -in the Kikuyu tongue. It was a voice unknown to them all. It was a -voice the volume of which seemed supernatural. Yet every word was -clear. And this great voice cried: - -“Oh, Chief Ruku-Ru, great amongst the Kikuyus, I am the spirit -invoked by the white men. Their fate is in my keeping. I watch over -them and their servants. And I tell you that Wimba is guiltless. Let -but a hair of his head be touched and thy village shall be levelled, -thy people destroyed by plague, thy cattle die, thy springs dry up. -I have spoken. Set Wimba free or these things shall come to pass. It -is an order.” - - - - - CHAPTER II - - THE GODS SPEAK - - -Through the ranks of the Kikuyu tribesmen behind and encircling -them, Jack and Frank could hear a murmur of fear that grew in volume -until the air was filled with cries of fright. The warriors forming -the inner ring of the circle shook with terror. - -So, too, did those tallest of the Kikuyus forming the chief’s own -bodyguard. As for Chief Ruku-Ru, over his face spread an ashen hue. - -But Frank’s programme was not yet complete. In the few minutes with -Bob and Matse in their tent beyond the grass-thatched village huts, -he had concocted a second step which he assumed would clinch their -hold over the chief and assure the complete terrorization of the -Kikuyus. Now he proceeded to put this into execution. - -Standing alone in the midst of the great circle Of savage blacks, -facing the ashen chief, noting the spears of the bodyguard trembling -like forest trees in a strong wind as the hands which held them -shook with terror, he was filled with satisfaction. So far all had -gone well. Now to strike the final blow. - -“Quick, Wimba,” he cried to the prisoner, who alone of that alien -multitude had any inkling as to the source of that mysterious voice -from the sky, yet who was not sufficiently civilized to be free -entirely from the terror which gripped the other blacks. “Quick, -Wimba. Translate for me.” And facing the chief, Frank cried: - -“Oh, Chief Ruku-Ru, thou hast heard the response of our gods. To -show you there is none concealed within the council tree, who might -have said these things, for it is thence came the voice, I ask that -you order your warriors to discharge their arrows into the midst of -the foliage.” - -Well Frank knew that in the great hollow on the back side the main -trunk, so opportunely found the previous night, the loudspeaker and -its connections would be safe from stray arrows. Furthermore, the -loop aerial employed was securely lashed amidst a thick bushy mass -of leaves, and likewise would be safe from harm. - -But Chief Ruku-Ru was past giving any orders. He attempted to speak, -upon Wimba translating Frank’s words, but was unable to command his -stricken tongue. Nor did the warriors of his bodyguard upon hearing -Frank’s injunction show any inclination to shoot into the top of the -sacred tree. That they were terror-stricken was plain to be seen. -And equally plain was their reluctance to antagonize any -supernatural agency which Frank had invoked. - -This Frank had counted upon. Drawing his revolver, he levelled it at -the treetops and himself announced that he would make the test. This -Wimba translated. Again a murmur of awe swept through the encircling -mass of natives. - -Frank fired. Three shots he pumped into the treetop. Scarcely had -the echo died away, and before Chief Ruku-Ru or anybody else, -either, for that matter, could speak, than the voice from the air -rang again in the Kikuyu tongue. - -“I am a Spirit,” it cried. “Neither white man’s thunder nor Kikuyu -arrows can avail against me. Obey, O Chief Ruku-Ru, or thy country -shall be laid under my spell. Set Wimba free.” - -Neither Frank nor Jack could understand what was said. But well they -knew that Matse was merely uttering into the broadcasting phone in -their tent, while Bob manipulated the motor, those statements which -upon his signals Frank had arranged he should declaim. And that such -was the case was apparent from the profound and devastating effect -upon the chief and his followers. - -It was unnecessary for Wimba to translate the messages from the air -for the boys’ benefit. - -Chief Ruku-Ru managed upon the dying away of the mysterious voice to -gain some control over himself. Not for nothing was he chief. His -self-command was remarkable. The more so in view of the fact that he -was as profoundly impressed and terror-stricken by these -manifestations which Frank had evoked as was the meanest of his -followers. - -He did not rise from his armchair throne, for the very good reason -that he feared his treacherous knees would give way beneath him. But -he did manage to speak. - -Pointing to the two guards who clasped Wimba on either side, he -ordered them to release their prisoner. To Frank and Jack, tense and -anxious regarding the outcome of their experiment, his words were as -so much Greek. But they were left in no doubt as to their meaning. - -The guards at once untied the cords binding Wimba’s wrists together -behind his back and unwound the heavier rope about his right ankle -tying him to a stake in the ground. Likewise they released their -grip on his arms. Then they bowed low to him. - -A moment Wimba stood uncertain. He was dazed. He could hardly -believe his good fortune. He gazed first at the chief, then at the -encircling natives, half of whom were poised for flight, fearing a -further demonstration by the white man’s god, and finally brought -his eyes to bear upon Frank. - -Then with an inarticulate cry of gratitude, he rushed across the -intervening space, and threw himself on the ground. Tears streaming -from his eyes, he clasped Frank’s feet and in broken sentences -thanked him for his deliverance. - -“Get up, Wimba,” commanded Frank. “Tell Chief Ruku-Ru that our Great -Spirit is about to bless him for this deed.” - -Once more Wimba faced the chief and in a voice trembling with -feeling he repeated Frank’s words. - -Then Frank inflated the final step in his hastily-thought-out plan. -Setting his fingers to his lips he whistled. But this time only -twice. It was the agreed signal. - -From the air boomed forth again the mysterious voice: - -“O, Chief Ruku-Ru, thy name shall be great as an administrator of -justice. Thy tribe shall be fruitful, thy cattle fat, thy springs -filled with sweet water. I have spoken.” - -Silence. - -“Let’s make our getaway now, Frank,” whispered Jack. “We’ve gotten -out of this a whole lot better than we had any right to expect. -Don’t tempt fate too much.” - -But filled with the confidence of success, Frank only smiled. He -whispered to Wimba, and the latter addressing Chief Ruku-Ru -announced that in honor of the occasion his white masters would that -night bring music from the air, and that they invited the whole -tribe to assemble after dusk before the council tree. - -With this, leaving the chief and all the assemblage stunned, the -boys and Wimba departed. As they moved away, the Kikuyus opened a -passage for them in grotesque haste. Now that the strain of the -situation was over, both Frank and Jack were seized with an insane -desire to laugh. But they managed to control their emotions, and to -retain upon their faces a look of the most solemn gravity. Only when -at length they had passed out of earshot of the multitude and had -put the last of the grass-thatched huts behind them, did they give -way to their feelings. Then they flung themselves prone into the -long buffalo grass of the meadow separating the village from their -encampment and rolling over and over they simply howled with -laughter while Wimba watched them in the greatest astonishment. - -“I’ll never forget that scene to my dying day,” laughed Jack, -finally. - -“Nor I,” said Frank, weak from hysterical laughter. “Come on. Let’s -find Bob, and tell him how it worked out.” - -Before he could strike away, however, Jack sobering turned to Wimba. -Laying a hand on Frank’s shoulder, he said: - -“Wimba, here is the fellow who saved your life. It was his idea. -He’ll explain it all to you. It is to him you must give your thanks -first, and then to your comrade Matse who helped.” - -“Oh, come, Jack,” said Frank uncomfortably. But Wimba threw himself -once more at Frank’s feet. - -“My life belong you, baas,” he said in a choking voice. - - - - - CHAPTER III - - CAMERA SHOOTING - - -In after days, Frank was to remember with thankfulness the gratitude -of Wimba for his “baas” or master. But now he was embarrassed, and -making light of the matter as possible without hurting the black’s -feelings he hastened along by Jack’s side across the meadow toward -the clump of tents which marked their encampment. - -Leaving Jack and Frank to regale the convalescent Bob with the tale -of what had occurred under the council tree, while Wimba and Matse -put their heads together and discussed the same event surrounded by -the awe-stricken native bearers from whom Wimba, at Frank’s warning, -was careful to withhold the real explanation, let us consider -briefly how the three white boys came to be here in Central Africa. - -For those of our readers who have not followed their adventures in -other parts of the world as set forth in previous volumes of The -Radio Boys Series a brief word or two of introduction is necessary. -Jack Hampton was the only son of an internationally famous engineer -and explorer, whose wife had died when Jack was only a youngster. -Frank Merrick, too, was orphaned and made his home with Bob Temple, -whose father was his guardian. The Hampton and Temple country -estates on the far end of Long Island, New York, adjoined each -other. And the three boys, companions at preparatory school and now -at Yale, were the closest of friends. - -Supplied by wealthy parents with the means to gratify their -scientific bent, all three boys from the beginning of the popularity -of Radio had pushed their investigations in that field. And upon the -numerous adventures into which they had been drawn in one way or -another in South America, Alaska, their own land, and the Sahara -Desert in Africa, they had found Radio time and again prove of the -greatest service. - -Now, as has been related in the previous chapters, it had again come -to the fore to help them at a crisis in their affairs. - -But how did they come to be again in Africa, where the previous year -they had discovered in an unexplored mountain region in the southern -Sahara a race of white men living in a high state of development and -treasuring ancient papyrus records indicating continued existence of -the race from the earliest period of the world’s history? - -That is easily explained. - -So widespread was the publicity showered upon the Radio Boys, as -they had become known, following their repeated exploits in -out-of-the-way corners of the world that one of the great motion -picture concerns of America had come to them some months previously -with a fine offer. Would they accompany a cameraman into Central -Africa to explore little known or entirely unknown regions for the -purpose of filming wild animals in their natural haunts and natives -in the primitive state? That was the proposition, and, needless to -state, the motion picture concern propounding it agreed to make -acceptance worth the boys’ while. - -Mr. Hampton was included in the offer. And upon his advice, coupled -with that of Mr. Temple, the boys had yielded to their natural -inclinations and had accepted. - -“You boys have still some years of college ahead of you,” Mr. Temple -had said. “It may be unwise to interrupt your college career, for -such an expedition necessarily will be an interruption, as, -undoubtedly, you will be a year or two in the wilds. Nevertheless, -Central Africa cannot remain unexplored or unopened to civilization -much longer. Here is a chance such as may never come your way again. - -“Sometime, doubtless, Jack will want to become an engineer and -follow in his father’s footsteps, and Frank and Bob will want to -take charge of the export business, Frank’s father before he died -and I, built up. But there is no hurry about those matters. In the -meantime, here is a chance for the three of you to go on a big game -hunting expedition with the strangest of weapons—a motion picture -camera. And you will be well paid, to boot. - -“Of course, the fame you fellows have piled up brought you this -opportunity. Well, you deserve it. Three more rattle-brained rascals -with the ability always to fall on their feet I never saw.” He -smiled at them affectionately. “So,” he concluded, “I consent to Bob -and Frank going. And as Jack’s father already has consented for him -and is, besides, to head the expedition, I cannot see but what that -settles the matter.” - -Here, then, they were. From Mombasa on the east coast they had made -their way on the railroad to Nairobi. This small but important -settlement, which was the administrative center of Kenya Colony, -marked their last touch with civilization. - -Procuring bearers and guides, they had thence set out afoot into the -Kikuyu country. Day had followed day without striking incident. The -Kikuyus are a peaceful people, above the average of African -intelligence, inhabiting a magnificent country abounding in streams, -uplands and forest. It is one of the most healthful and fertile of -regions. - -Although, despite their proximity to the advance guards of white -civilization, the boys had found the Kikuyus still living in -primitive state, nevertheless they found them peaceful. Adventures -had been few. Not only had they seldom been in any danger from the -natives, but wild animals also had been scarce. - -It was not until they came to Chief Ruku-Ru’s territory where Mr. -Hampton had departed with Niellsen, the cameraman, for the dried-up -bed of a river where baboons were said to be in the habit of coming -to dig for water, that the first real adventure befell them. That -was the arrest and trial of Wimba, and his consequent release as -related. - -It was only by accident that the boys were on hand. Ordinarily they -would have been with Mr. Hampton and Niellsen. But Bob’s succumbing -to fever had kept them behind to provide him with company and -attendance. Bob’s fever was not sufficiently strong enough to cause -Mr. Hampton any real anxiety, however, so, leaving the boys careful -instructions regarding the medicines to be given their comrade, he -had departed with Niellsen and a few bearers carrying camera, film -box, etc. - -With this digression, let us return to camp. The quick-falling -African night was closing in and the boys were finishing -preparations for the concert which they had promised to bring out of -the air to the assembled villagers about the council tree. - -Frank and Jack had just completed a complete overhauling of the -talking machine which they planned to use and were dusting off the -records of martial band music which they considered would provide -the most acceptable concert for savage ears. Bob who was feeling -considerably improved was lolling on a camp cot, watching them. - -“Hey, fellows,” he said suddenly, “has it occurred to you that some -warrior more curious and less fearful than the rest might climb up -into the council tree? If one does, and if he finds the aerial or -the loudspeaker which you concealed there, good night. Even if he -ran away from it, he might damage it first so that your concert -would be a fizzle.” - -Jack stopped work, a record in one hand, dusting cloth in the other. - -“That’s right, Bob. Hadn’t thought of that.” - -But Frank looked unconcerned. - -“From what Wimba and Matse tell me,” he said, “Most Kikuyus wouldn’t -dare to climb into that sacred tree. I had a hard time getting even -those two to ascend it with me last night and help locate our traps. -And they’ve lived in Nairobi and come in contact with the whites and -have lost some of their native superstitions. And now that we caused -the voice of our mysterious spirit to emanate from the tree today, I -feel pretty sure there isn’t a Kikuyu whom you could pay to climb -it.” - -Jack looked relieved, but Bob apparently was reluctant to relinquish -his idea and needed further convincing. - -“Just the same,” he said, “I believe we ought to send somebody over -there to scout around for us and see that everything is all right -before we pin our hopes on giving a concert. Why not send Matse?” - -“All right, if you think it’s necessary,” replied Frank. “Let’s call -him in.” - -Putting aside the records he had been cleaning, he went to the door -of the tent and, lifting the flap, poked his head out to utter the -necessary call which would bring Matse from the bearer’s camp -nearby. - -But the call was not issued. Instead, Bob and Jack heard Frank utter -a muffled exclamation and then step swiftly out of the tent, letting -the flap fall behind him. - - - - - CHAPTER IV - - WIMBA SAVED AGAIN - - -The two boys left behind in the tent stared perplexedly at each -other in the light of the lantern hanging from the pole and casting -a steady if not brilliant illumination over the canvas walls, bed -rolls, packs and camp chairs. From his bed roll or flea bag, as the -boys adopting the term of African explorers had come to call it, the -outstretched Bob, propped on one elbow, looked toward the tent flap -which had fallen behind his comrade and said: - -“Gosh, Frank went out of there as if somebody had grabbed him by the -hair. Wonder what he’s up to.” - -“I’ll go see,” said Jack, getting up from his seat on a folding camp -chair, and walking toward the exit. - -But just as he was putting out his hand to draw the flap aside there -came the sound of three revolver shots in rapid succession from -nearby, followed by a hubbub of native cries. Jack leaped through -the exit, drawing his automatic from its ever-ready position at his -side, while Bob jumped to his feet with all thought of weakness -forgotten. - -Before he could follow Jack’s example, however, the tent flap was -again thrust aside and Jack returned followed by Frank. - -The latter’s face was white. In one hand he still gripped his -automatic. - -Bob stared at his comrades in astonishment too great for a moment -for speech. And in the silence the yells of the natives could be -heard withdrawing into the distance. - -Frank flung himself into a camp chair. His revolver dropped from his -relaxed fingers, and he put up his hands to his face. Bob saw he was -trembling. Jack stooped and put an arm across his comrade’s -shoulders. - -“What in the world’s the matter?” cried Bob, finding his tongue at -last. “What happened?” - -“I haven’t got it straightened out,” said Jack, shaking his head. -“It was all over when I got outside. Give Frank a minute’s time to -collect himself. He had a bad experience, I guess.” He patted the -smaller youth’s shoulder. “Take your time, old boy,” he said -soothingly. “It’s all over now.” - -Bob sank back onto his flea bag. This was too much for him, his -expression of profound bewilderment seemed to say. - -Frank looked up and essayed a smile. But it was ghastly in result. - -“Guess you fellows think I’m crazy,” he said, in a shaking voice. -“But it’s no joke to have to shoot at a man. I never get over the -shakes when it’s necessary.” - -“What?” cried Jack. - -“A man?” exploded Bob. “You shot at a man?” Frank nodded. “It was -that fellow who had it in for Wimba, I guess,” he said. “The one who -charged him with murdering his pal. That Kikuyu thief, you know.” - -With an effort, he pulled himself together, shook off Jack’s grip on -his shoulder, and got up. “I poked my head out of the tent to call -Matse,” he said, in a firmer voice. “The bearers have a big camp -fire going. Between here and the camp fire I could see Wimba. He was -approaching our tent. There was no mistaking his form, outlined -against the glow of the fire. Then I saw a man spring up from the -ground as Wimba passed and stalk after him. - -“I was scared for Wimba, because the other obviously meant mischief. -And it was plain Wimba was unaware of his presence. I didn’t want to -yell a warning because his pursuer might leap on Wimba. - -“So I started forward. But the fellow was creeping up on Wimba. I -could see them both like silhouettes against the fire glow. There -was no time to delay. I could see the rascal’s arm drawn back as if -to bury a knife in poor old Wimba’s shoulders.” - -“Then you shot?” asked Jack. - -Frank nodded. “But I didn’t kill him,” he said. “I aimed to hit his -upraised hand, and I guess I did.” - -“But there were three shots,” objected Bob. “I counted them.” - -“I shot over his head,” said Frank. - -“What happened then?” asked Jack. - -“He got away. And the bearers are chasing him.” - -Bob’s face became grave. “That’s liable to get us into more trouble -with Chief Ruku-Ru.” - -“I sent Wimba to bring the boys back,” explained Frank. With a -laugh, as his self-possession returned he added: “That was the -quickest way to put an end to his expressions of gratitude.” - -“Well,” said Jack, “you certainly have put that fellow in your debt. -You’ve saved his life twice in one day.” - -With his usual modesty, Frank’s thought dwelt not on himself and his -own actions, but on the other fellow. “Poor Wimba,” he said. “He -certainly had a hard time of it.” - -The excited voices of the returning bearers could be heard without. -Bob sank back on his flea bag as Frank went out to hear Wimba’s -report. With an exclamation, Jack looked at his watch. - -“So much excitement made me almost forget Dad,” he remarked, going -to the corner where the radio sending apparatus was set up. Taking -his seat and adjusting several loose wire connections, he began -manipulating controls. - -Then he pulled the transmitter toward him and began announcing on a -200-metre wave length a resume of the day’s activities, telling in -detail of Wimba’s arrest and trial and of how he had been saved from -execution by Frank’s ruse for playing upon Chief Ruku-Ru’s -superstition through means of the loudspeaker installed in the -council tree. - -“Luckily we keyed it to 300-metres, Dad,” he explained. “So when we -talk to you like this over your 200-metre length, the loudspeaker is -inoperative.” - -He than related the recent episode wherein Frank again had saved -Wimba’s life, and concluded with the explanation that they were -about to broadcast a concert of band music out of the council tree -for the further mystification of the Kikuyus. - -“Don’t worry about us, Dad,” he said, before hanging up. “We’re -making out all right, I expect. I don’t look for any more trouble, -after what happened today.” - -Bob grinned as Jack, his task concluded, turned around to face him. - -“Well, Mr. Reporter,” he said. “You’re becoming quite expert at -making these daily reports.” Jack laughed. “Just the same,” he -commented, “it’s not a bad idea, that of these individual portable -sets. No matter where Dad is, it’s a pretty safe bet that he heard -me.” - -Each member of the expeditionary party was provided with a small but -powerful portable radio set of wide range. Thus whenever, as in the -present instance, anybody was absent on side expeditions by tuning -in at a fixed hour each night and morning, he received a resume of -the day’s activities and of any startling events occurring during -the night, which those remaining at the headquarters encampment -broadcasted. - -These sets were the boys’ pride. All three had had a hand in their -manufacture. Each set was mounted in a cabinet the size of a -portable typewriter case. It contained a regenerative tuner, a -detector and one stage of audio amplification, and was a powerful -receiver with two tubes. The secret of its smallness was that it -operated on ordinary little flashlight batteries. The head set -clamped into the inside of the lid when not in use. Closed, the -cabinet could be carried by means of a handle. The whole business -weighed less than ten pounds. Throw an insulated wire over a tree, -and one would be ready to listen-in. - -Almost as compact, in its way, was the sending apparatus which now -occupied a small collapsible table in one corner of the tent. Table -and all, including the motor, fitted into the oblong box yawning -emptily on the ground beneath at the present moment—a box two and a -half feet by a foot in breadth and nine inches in height. - -In its construction, the boys had labored to achieve an apparatus -for both sending and receiving. When one spoke, the vocal impact -against a sensitive diaphragm closed reception, but the minute the -voice of the speaker ceased, the instrument again was ready to -receive. - -It was over this apparatus that the boys planned to broadcast a -concert for the benefit and mystification of the Kikuyus, and now -that his evening bulletins had been radioed to his father Jack got -busy with final preparations. Moving their small talking machine -into position and attaching the audion, he laid the records he and -Frank had dusted within reach for quick adjustment. All was now -ready, and the only thing he waited for was Matse’s report from a -reconnaissance into the village that their loudspeaker and apparatus -concealed in the council tree had neither been discovered nor -tampered with. - -The council tree arrangement which had been installed the previous -night at a late hour, when all in the village were asleep, consisted -of one of the portable receiving sets with loop aerial and -loudspeaker attachment. - -Really, the loop aerial had not been necessary. An insulated wire -thrown over the topmost branches of the tree would have been -sufficient. Installation of the small loop aerial had been -considered by Bob as a “piece of dog.” But Frank and Jack had -insisted upon it, in the desire to make their proposed concert a -superlative success. And they considered the clearness of the voice -from the air during Wimba’s trial ample justification of the extra -trouble to which they had gone. - -Frank returned as Jack finished his preparations, with the -announcement that Matse reported the entire village assembled -expectantly beneath the council tree about a great fire. - -“So far as he could see or learn nobody has been into the council -tree,” Frank added. “And I guess that’s correct. These Kikuyus -wouldn’t go into that tree now, after what happened today, under any -circumstances. So your fears are groundless, Bob. Well, let’s go, -Jack.” - -Jack arose and Bob with a humorous groan made his way to his -comrade’s place at the radio apparatus. - -Because it was bad for his health to be abroad in the night air, he -had been elected to act as operative. - -“You fellows have all the best of it,” he said. - -Frank and Jack grinned sympathetically, then set out for the village -center. They wanted to be on hand to see how Chief Ruku-Ru and his -people took the concert. - -Beside them trailed Wimba, who henceforth was to constitute himself -Frank’s faithful shadow, while ahead went the chattering bearers -with the exception of four left behind as guards over the -encampment. - -Frank looked back once over his shoulder. “I suppose Bob will be all -right,” he said. “Only I don’t quite like the idea of leaving him -alone.” - -“Oh, come on,” said Jack. “To be sure he’ll be all right.” - - - - - CHAPTER V - - THE KIKUYUS DANCE - - -So mystified were Chief Ruku-Ru and the Kikuyus by the concert that -it was apparent the presence of the portable radio set with -loudspeaker in the uppermost branches of the spreading council tree -was totally unsuspected. And all lingering doubts as to whether any -of the Kikuyus had ventured into the tree and discovered the -apparatus were swept from the minds of Frank and Jack. - -For both it was a weird experience. Under the silver radiance of the -African moon, now at the full, the square was bright. Any lingering -shadows not dispelled by that flood of moonlight, disappeared, -vanquished before the dancing gleams of a great fire. For the night -here on the uplands was cool and the savages had built a roaring -fire which crackled and leaped in the center of the square. To one -side sat Chief Ruku-Ru in his armchair throne, surrounded by his -bodyguard of tall warriors with spears erect, while in a semi-circle -about the fire and facing the council tree squatted row upon row of -natives. And beyond them on every hand shown the conical roofs of -the big huts. - -At first alarmed at the music, the natives soon got over their fears -and in no time at all, as Jack called to Frank’s attention, they -were swaying to the strains. Jack decided to take advantage of this -tendency on the part of the rhythm-loving blacks. On leaving their -encampment, he and Frank had noted on a slip of paper the names of -the records Bob intended to play and their order. Between each two -records Bob was to permit the lapse of a couple of minutes, in order -that his comrades might be able to announce to Chief Ruku-Ru and the -Kikuyus what the next number would be. In this way, they could add -to their reputation as wizards, for wizards the Kikuyus believed -them to be. - -“The next number is going to be one of those Hawaiian things,” he -whispered to Frank, as the strains of a familiar Sousa march drew -near their conclusion. “Let’s announce to Chief Ruku-Ru that we are -about to summon out of the air a piece of music for the especial -benefit of the wonderful Kikuyu dancers of whom we have heard so -much.” - -“Good idea,” Frank nodded. “That Hawaiian umty-tum will be just -about their speed.” - -Jack whispered to Wimba and, upon conclusion of the march, the -latter arose in the scheduled interval before the next number was to -be broadcasted, and made Jack’s announcement. That it met with -friendly reception was apparent to the two boys by the stir of -interest which went through the crowd. - -“Who do you think will dance?” whispered Frank. - -“I don’t know,” said Jack. “Perhaps everybody.” - -The music began and at the first strains of the wailing syncopated -air with its suggestion of beaten tom-toms, of jungles and of tropic -nights, the Kikuyus uttered low cries of approval. From their place -near Chief Ruku-Ru the boys looking out over that assemblage saw -that now, indeed, they had won the hearts of the savages. - -Suddenly, from amidst the ranks of the natives squatting on their -heels, the lithe slim figure of a young Kikuyu warrior sprang into -the wide space about the fire. - -Firelight falling upon him illumined the gleaming muscles of his -body, naked except for breech clout. He stood a moment, still, rigid -as a statue, then began to turn slowly about as if on a pivot. - -“A black Apollo,” whispered Jack. - -The music swelled, the note of savagery became more insistent. It -was as if the invisible orchestra were playing for this particular -audience, as if into the players had crept the very spirit of this -night in a remote corner of central Africa. Jack and Frank both felt -a strange stirring within them as if a response to the music, to the -occasion. But what they experienced in their cultivated minds was -but a trifle, the merest breath, compared to the effect of the music -upon the savage, uncivilized minds, of the blacks about them. - -Wimba and Matse began to sway with the rest. A glassy look came into -their eyes. - -But they were strangers in this community. They did not dare to get -to their feet. - -Not so the young men of the Kikuyus. As the black Apollo ceased -pivoting and began to circle the fire with arms rigid against his -sides, body swaying, knees lifting high like those of a horse on -parade, other young warriors leaped from the audience into the -cleared space about the fire. Falling into line behind the leader, -they circled in a dance at first rather stately but soon becoming -madder and madder in movement until, upon the concluding strains of -the record, they were flashing by the boys in a whirling, swirling -mass of legs and gleaming ebon bodies. - -“Wow,” said Frank, expelling a long breath as, following the -subsidence of the music, the dancers ceased and melted back into the -audience. “That was some sight. What a shame Niellsen wasn’t here to -take a movie of that?” - -“Certainly is a shame,” agreed Jack. “Can’t you just see the -audience in some movie palace back home, sitting there in the dark, -when suddenly this moonlit village square with its fire and its -circle of blacks flashes on the screen? Then the dancers begin! -Can’t you just see it? Oh, boy.” - -The Hawaiian records had been the last number of the programme. At -Jack’s prompting, Wimba bowing low to Chief Ruku-Ru made this -announcement. In reply, the chief spoke at such length that the -boys, unable to understand a word of what was said, became -impatient. Then Wimba turned to them, his eyes big. - -“Chief Ruku-Ru, him say tomolla him Kikuyus give warrior dance for -um baas,” interpreted Wimba. “Him say white wizards give um good -time tonight, him give white wizards good time tomolla. Warrior -dance when sun come up.” - -Jack let out a low whistle. “Tell Chief Ruku-Ru we are very much -pleased,” said Jack, “and we’ll be there.” - -Wimba started to speak, but Frank with an exclamation checked him. - -“Ask him, too, Wimba, whether we can take pictures of the dance,” he -commanded. “He may be scared of it, because we haven’t taken any -movies here as yet, and he hasn’t become familiar with it.” - -“He saw a music box once,” interpolated Jack. “And now he thinks -every box with a handle to be turned ought to produce music.” - -Frank grinned. Then, realizing that they had not yet thanked Chief -Ruku-Ru for his invitation to witness the warrior dance and military -tactics, he turned to the interpreter and ordered him to speak up. A -man of superior parts, Wimba could be trusted to couch acceptance in -the floweriest of diplomatic language. - -The main body of Kikuyus were melting away into the moonlit -darkness, doubtless discussing at a great rate the marvellous music -played by the spirits of the air at the bidding of the young white -wizards. The sound of laughter and high voices came muffled out of -the darkness. As for Chief Ruku-Ru, he sat watching the boys, still -surrounded by his bodyguard of tall black warriors, awaiting a -reply. - -Wimba spoke at length, the chief listening attentively. And when -upon the interpreter’s conclusion, he replied, the boys saw by the -relieved expression on Wimba’s features, even before he interpreted -for their benefit, that the chief had given the required permission -for the boys to photograph the warrior dance. - -Such, indeed, proved to be the case. And, when diplomatic exchanges -at last having been brought to a conclusion, the boys made their way -back to their encampment followed by Wimba, Matse and the bearers, -they were both jubilant and excited. - -Contrary to Frank’s earlier formless fears regarding possible danger -to Bob through his being left alone, nothing untoward had occurred -during their absence. In fact, the big fellow was feeling better -than for days, the medicine left for him by Mr. Hampton having -routed the fever. By the morrow, he believed he would be back to -normal. And this was a satisfaction, as it would enable him to -witness the military tactics and warrior dance. - -“Set that alarm clock for an hour before sun-up,” said Frank to Jack -who, as the lightest sleeper, always took charge of waking -everybody. - -“All right,” said Jack. “But Wimba will see to getting us up, never -fear. That fellow has the faculty of waking at any hour he decides -upon. It’s a habit which all natives possess, he tells me.” - -“It’s a good thing Niellsen gave us some lessons in the operation of -a motion picture camera,” said Frank. “I wouldn’t have dared to try -to take that picture stuff in front of the council tree by -moonlight, because I don’t know enough about the game and would just -have ruined a couple of hundred precious feet of film. But at this -daylight stuff tomorrow, I expect we’ll be all right.” - -With this the others agreed. The photographic equipment brought in -by the expedition consisted of four film cameras, three Graflex hand -cameras for obtaining “stills,” many film packs for the latter, and -eighty thousand feet of film for the former. - -At Nairobi was a motor truck outfitted as dark room and developing -plant. Originally, it had been Mr. Hampton’s intention to take this -motor truck with them on their wanderings, but so rough had proved -to be some of the country negotiated on the first trip out from the -settlement, that it had been decided to leave the plant thereafter -at Nairobi so long as the party remained in the Kikuyu country. - -Before the boys retired to sleep, there came a low call from outside -and then Wimba parted the tent flap and looked in. - -“Him funny bizness here, baas,” said he, as Jack advanced to meet -him. “Wimba and Matse take um down.” - -With that, he lifted the tent flap and thrust within the -loudspeaker, loop aerial and portable radio set which several nights -before, under the direction of Frank and Jack, he had installed in -the council tree. - -“By George, I forgot all about that,” said Jack, taking the articles -one by one as Wimba passed them into the tent. - -“You’re a good scout, Wimba,” said Frank approvingly. “I forgot, -too.” - -Wimba shrugged and ducked. “No good let um b’long council tree too -long,” he said. “Mebbe Chief send um man up pretty soon to have -look—see.” - -“He’s right, fellows,” growled Bob from his cot. “These people are -curious as monkeys, and after the novelty wore off they’d be sure to -investigate.” - -“Well,” said Jack, as Wimba dropped the flap behind him and -departed, “thanks to Wimba, when Chief Ruku-Ru goes to investigate -now he’ll not find anything. And certainly the old radio saved -Wimba’s life and pulled us out of a bad hole.” - -“Besides really being responsible for getting us a chance to see the -Chief’s army at drill tomorrow,” said Frank sleepily. “Well, fade -out, will you? I’m dog tired.” - -Presently all three were sunk in slumber—a sleep tinged with -pleasant thoughts of the novel sight in store for the morrow, but -untouched by premonition of the perils to follow. - - - - - CHAPTER VI - - A SURPRISE ATTACK - - -The night passed without disturbance, and dawn found the boys with -the ubiquitous Wimba clinging like a shadow at Frank’s heels, -stationed on a rise of ground west of the village. - -The ground here rolled away in an open treeless plain filled with -grass of vivid hue to where a half mile distant a line of trees -marked the beginning of a forest. It was rolling country, rich green -pasture uplands with clumps of forest here and there, and all rising -in the background to a line of low hills that stretched away as far -as the eye could see. - -A never-ending source of surprise to the boys was the striking -similarity of this country to the choicest New York State or New -England landscapes. Evidences of civilized occupation such as -farmhouses nestling amidst the greenery, the twin steel ribbons of -railway, or stone fences or hedges, of course, were lacking. And the -colors were more vivid, under the brilliant sunshine and seen -through air untainted by the smoke of cities, than at home. The -greens were greener, and the purples and greys of distance were -deeper. Nevertheless, with cultivated fields and herds of cattle in -the distant meadows, the similarity to scenes of home was so -striking that on this particular morning Jack, at least, experienced -a pang of homesickness. - -This feeling was soon dispelled, however, for an exclamation from -Frank, echoed by Bob who ventured forth for the first time in days, -recalled Jack to the present. Following the indication of Frank’s -pointing finger, he saw the distant forest suddenly spout warriors. - -“By George, what a sight,” he cried as, the long slanting rays of -the newly-risen sun full upon them, the warriors advanced, five -hundred strong, spread out in open order, with the beautifully -decorated hide shields carried by the front rank gleaming in the -sunlight. - -Frank already was turning the crank of the motion picture camera, -while Chief Ruku-Ru, separated for once from his arm chair, stood to -one side watching him with absorbed interest. The advance of his -drilling warriors meant nothing to the dusky monarch, for it was -something with which he was familiar. This strange machine, into -which the young white wizard peered, while slowly turning a crank, -was, on the other hand, a mystery. - -So engaged in watching Frank was the chief that he did not at once -note the panting messenger who came tearing up to the royal party -from the direction of the village in the rear. - -Then, as his eye fell on the boy, for such he was, the chief spoke a -few words to him sharply. The youth replied between gasps, more at -length. - -Watching the advancing warriors, who now had come to a halt in the -middle of the plain, where they knelt and took cover behind their -shields, only their round black heads and long lances showing above, -the boys paid no attention to this by-play. - -Not so Wimba, however, for as the messenger poured out his tale, he -clutched Jack by an arm and, having obtained his attention, repeated -hastily what was being said. - -“Him bad tribe raid village,” he said. “Carry off cattle and women. -Boy escape and make tell Chief Ruku-Ru.” - -“What! Great Scott!” - -“What’s that? What’s that?” cried Bob, excitedly. “Say, Jack, if -raiders cleaned out the village, maybe they went after our camp, -too.” - -Frank, unhearing, continued to crank his camera. - -But Jack was dismayed. Bob’s words had aroused his own fears. Much -of their paraphernalia was at the camp. Other cameras, thousands of -feet of film, both taken and unused, clothing, gifts for various -chiefs yet to be encountered, rifles and ammunition. These latter -had been left behind, and the boys wore only their automatics. Above -all, their radio apparatus had been left in camp. Clumsy handling -might destroy it irreparably. - -“Find out all you can, Wimba,” he commanded sharply. “Did the -raiders go near our camp?” - -“Maybe, they missed it,” he added hopefully to Bob. “You see we lie -to one side and out of sight of the village.” - -Wimba was rapidly interrogating the chief who, with a word or two, -dismissed him, then turned to face the plain and using his arms as a -semaphore went through a set of gestures which quite obviously were -some kind of signal. - -That they were so understood by the warriors was apparent, for the -latter leaped forward in a tearing run that ate up the distance. - -In the meantime, Frank, all unaware as yet of what was going -forward, cranked away for dear life, delighted with the marvellous -picture he was obtaining, while the others questioned Wimba as to -the chief’s reply. - -“Him say no know,” replied Wimba. “Raid come from other side. Mebbe -your camp, baas, not found.” - -“Anyhow, we left a half dozen bearers with guns on guard,” said Bob. -“They’d be able to stand off these savages armed only with bows and -arrows.” - -“Yes, if they didn’t get scared and run,” said Jack. “Look at those -fellows come. They’ll be here in a minute. What’s the chief going to -do?” Frank for the first time withdrew his head from the camera -hood. - -“Say, you chaps,” he cried delightedly. “You ought to see this. -It’ll make one great picture.” He was about to place his eyes again -to the machine and resume grinding, but Bob gripped him by an arm, -and in a few words apprised him of what was up. - -To within twenty-feet of the chief, who had advanced several paces -in front of the boys, charged his warriors at a furious rate. Then -they suddenly halted, the whole mass, as if turned to stone. -Execution of the maneuver in such dramatic fashion left the watching -boys breathless. For a moment they forgot their own worries in -admiration of the Kikuyus, and Frank mourned loudly because Bob had -restrained him from resuming camera operations in time to get that -last picture. - -The black warriors gazed expectantly at their chief, and the latter -addressed them in a loud voice. When he had ceased, angry cries went -up, and then, like a wave splitting on a rock, the warriors without -more ado, parted into two divisions and, flowing on either side of -the chief and the dumbfounded boys, charged over the hill toward the -village. - -“Come on, fellows, here’s a chance to see some action. Maybe, to -take a hand in it,” cried Bob, starting in pursuit. - -Chief Ruku-Ru had placed himself at the head of his men and departed -on the run before the boys could so much as ask his intentions. The -blacks were still flowing along, on either side of the boys. - -“But my camera,” wailed Frank, who was a great movie fan. “I can’t -tote all this stuff myself. And I don’t want to leave it behind. -Think of the chance to get a real battle picture.” - -“I’ll take the dratted thing,” said Bob. And sweeping the legs of -the tripod together, he gathered up tripod and camera, and started -away, automatic already out and gripped in his free hand. - -Jack picked up one reel case and Frank another, and, with Wimba and -Matse clinging to their heels, away they went in pursuit of the -running warriors. - - - - - CHAPTER VII - - BOB MEETS THE BONE CRUSHER - - -Closer to civilization than most native tribes, by reason of the -British development of Kenya Colony, yet the Kikuyus still cling to -primitive customs. In nothing is this more apparent than in their -methods of warfare and in the instruments employed. - -Instead of paying many head of cattle to rascally traders for the -trade guns smuggled to many tribes, they continue to use bows and -arrows and spears, both for making war and for hunting. - -So now as the boys galloped along at the tail end of the charging -warriors of Chief Ruku-Ru, automatics in hand, they realized that if -it came to close quarters with the enemy they would be of material -assistance to their hosts by reason of the superiority of their -weapons. For the enemy were Kikuyus, too, although of another clan, -this big race being scattered in thirteen loosely-organized clans -over a wide territory. And the raiders would be no differently armed -than their hosts. - -Down the hill, through a cover of woods, and into the village dashed -Chief Ruku-Ru and his warriors, the boys at the rear but holding -their own. - -Loud cries from the foremost sounded warning that the enemy was -still on the ground. At once the blacks ahead of them leaped to take -cover behind the nearest huts, and began creeping forward from hut -to hut, crouching and running close to the ground in covering open -spaces. - -The boys were not slow to follow this example, the wisdom of which -became apparent when arrows began whizzing overhead, burying -themselves in the thatched roofs of the huts or smacking with a dull -thudding sound against the mud walls. - -Sticking closely together, the three boys with Wimba, Matse and a -number of bearers at their heels, took shelter behind one of the -largest huts of the village as the rain of arrows increased. - -So loud and close at hand now were the shouts that it was clear the -enemy had been surprised by Chief Ruku-Ru before they could run away -with their prisoners and loot. From the sounds, the hottest part of -the fighting was not far away. In fact, Bob, who had leaned the -tripod and film camera against the mud wall of the hut behind which -they were momentarily sheltered, and had advanced to the nearest -corner past which swept a perfect storm of arrows, returned with the -report that in his opinion the main fight was being waged on the -other side of the hut. - -“And no wonder,” said Jack “Don’t you fellows recognize this hut? -Well, I can’t blame you, for you’re seeing it for the first time -from the rear. But this is Chief Ruku-Ru’s palace, I’m sure. Look. -You can see the tip of a tree on the other side from here. There’s -only one tree large enough to be seen like that, and that’s the -council tree. Yes sir, fellows, this is the Chief’s palace.” - -“Probably surprised the raiders looting it,” asserted Frank. - -“May be so,” said Bob. “The chief has forty wives, you know. And -these raiders undoubtedly came to carry the women away as captives. -Women do the work amongst the Kikuyus, and they’re pretty valuable -critters.” - -“Listen to that,” interrupted Jack, as louder shouts gave warning of -more intense fighting. “And, by George,” he added, in high -excitement, clutching Bob by an arm, “look there. Those are some of -Chief Ruku-Ru’s men, aren’t they?” - -He pointed to several figures, crossing the open space by the side -of the “palace,” speeding back toward the rear. - -“Running away,” said Bob. “They’re getting the worst of it.” - -He stepped back, gazing upward. - -“I can do it,” he cried. “Give me a hand, Jack. Cup your hands for a -leg up.” - -“Do what?” - -“Scale that wall,” cried Bob. “Mud wall’s about eight feet high. We -can swarm over it, drop into the chief’s courtyard, and then from -behind the wall on the other side we can attack the enemy in the -rear. Come on.” - -“Right,” said Jack, putting his back against the wall and cupping -his hands. - -Without more words. Bob set a foot therein and springing gripped the -top of the wall and pulled himself up. Then, facing about, he lay -down, with his arms hanging. And Jack, leaping upward, seized his -wrists and was pulled to position beside him. - -“All right, Frank,” cried Bob. - -“Take this camera first,” Frank answered. “If you fellows are going -to take potshots at the enemy from the chief’s domicile, I want some -pictures of it.” - -“Hurry, then,” cried Bob, impatiently. And Frank obediently hoisted -aloft the camera on its long tripod, which was seized and whisked to -position over the wall. Frank was boosted up by Wimba and hauled to -position beside his comrades. - -“Me come, too, baas,” pleaded the faithful fellow. - -So Wimba, although without firearms to render him a useful ally, -likewise was hoisted to the wall. - -Then all four leaped down into the courtyard, where ordinarily Chief -Ruku-Ru stabled his milch cows. But now the courtyard, deep in dung, -was deserted. The raiders already had driven off the animals. - -In one corner of the spacious yard lay two guards outstretched in -the sun. The boys shivered. - -“Killed,” said Bob, gritting his teeth. “Well, these rascals need a -lesson. Come on.” - -Yells from the other side of the opposite mud wall apprised them -their surmise was correct. The fight was raging there, and with -uncommon fierceness. But Chief Ruku-Ru’s forces were getting the -worst of it. The raiders were too many for them. - -Bob leaped to the low roof of a cow shed built against the wall, -which overtopped it by two or three feet. Crouching behind this -bulwark, he peered out. He found he faced the great village square. -The two forces were fighting at close quarters. The air was filled -with arrows. Here and there lay fallen warriors, never to move -again, while others were dragging themselves away with ghastly -wounds upon them. - -It was easy to distinguish between the two forces. Easy for one -thing, if for no other. Not because of the fact that one side had -herded cattle and wailing women indiscriminately into one corner of -the square at its back. That betokened the enemy host, right enough. -But a clearer indication was afforded by the two leaders. - -Chief Ruku-Ru, strongly built, a ferocious fighter, had thrown aside -shield, spear, bow, and armed only with a wicked knife was engaged -in hand to hand combat with a gigantic negro similarly accoutred who -wore in addition a tuft of golden eagle feathers in his hair. - -These were the respective chieftains, and their fighting men stood -back to permit them free play. In fact, in the vicinity of the two -warriors, all other fighting had died away. - -The boys were unaware that Chief Ruku-Ru’s opponent was known as the -Bone Crusher, and that his fame as a terrible fighter was widespread -amongst all the Kikuyu clans. But that this individual combat had -dwarfed all others for the moment was apparent. Not only those -warriors in their vicinity had ceased fighting, as if by common -consent, but over the whole square in a trice spread a truce that -reached to the farthest combatants. The shouts of the fighters, the -wails of the captive women, died away. Only the panting of the two -gladiators could be heard. - -Jack and Frank had clambered into position beside Bob, with Wimba -close at Frank’s heels. Frank, moreover, as soon as he saw what was -going on had set up the camera and already was busy grinding away as -if with no thought except to obtain a motion picture of that -contest. - -“Like something out of the old tales of Homer,” whispered Jack. - -Bob nodded, half absently. He was too busy watching that strange -contest to waste time drawing comparisons with the past. Biggest of -the boys, a youth of gigantic frame although still only in his -teens. Bob was one of the cleverest amateur boxers and wrestlers in -America. Moreover, although not exactly pugnacious of spirit, yet he -did frankly and openly, as he was wont to express it, “love a good -fight.” - -And a good fight he was beholding now. - -Crouching, wicked knives clasped in their right hands, left arms -advanced with the long cotton garments betokening their chiefhood -ripped from their shoulders and wrapped about the forearm as guard, -the two warriors circled each other, looking for an opening. What -Chief Ruku-Ru lacked in height and weight by comparison with his -huger opponent, he made up in superior speed and litheness. The -pliant muscles of his back and thighs could be seen writhing beneath -the ebon skin of his naked body as he leaped this way and that. - -That his blows did not all miss soon became apparent as first one -and then another long rip gushing crimson appeared on the black skin -of the Bone Crusher. The latter, on the other hand, try as he would, -could not get past Chief Ruku-Ru’s guard. His knife struck and -struck again, but always as if by a miracle Chief Ruku-Ru’s padded -forearm fended off the blow at the last second of time. - -Suddenly, the Bone Crusher, rendered desperate by his foe’s -superiority with the knife, goaded into insensate fury by the -repeated slashing to which he was subjected, tossed his knife high -into the air and with a vast bellow leaped upon Chief Ruku-Ru. But -he was canny, this Bone Crusher, and even as he sprang he flung the -flowing cotton garment hanging from his left arm over the other’s -head. - -Thus confused and blinded, Chief Ruku-Ru lashed out wildly with his -knife, but without being able to see to direct his blows. - -Wrapping his long arms about the other’s waist, the Bone Crusher -whirled him aloft and sent him spinning like a giant top into the -midst of Chief Ruku-Ru palsied followers. - -But he was not left long to enjoy his victory. Before his forces -could renew the combat, before the stricken followers of Chief -Ruku-Ru could turn and flee, a new assailant appeared. - -He was none other than Bob. Leaping down from the mud wall before -Jack and Frank could move to restrain him, big Bob launched himself -like a thunderbolt at the Bone Crusher. - -A shout of warning from his henchmen at his back caused the gigantic -black to face about. But before he could put up any defense. Bob -shot forward as if for a low football tackle. Many a time on the -field he had swooped in just such irresistible fashion at the legs -of an opposing player. But this time his intention was not merely to -bring his man down. - -His hands closed about the ankles of the Bone Crusher, and then he -straightened up with startling swiftness. And for all his bulk, the -Bone Crusher went hurtling through the air, over Bob’s shoulders, to -fall, not amongst his own followers, but into the ranks of the -enemy. - -Had he fallen on his head, his neck might have snapped. For never -had Bob put into that particular hold the viciousness he had -employed now. - -But in falling the Bone Crusher brushed against a warrior. His -course was deflected. And instead of alighting on his head and -shoulders, he fell on his side. - -With a catlike agility not to be expected in a man so huge, he -bounded up from the earth with an ear-splitting roar of rage, and -ran foaming at the mouth toward Bob. Just what he intended will -never be known. - -Bob saw him coming and set himself. As the Bone Crusher lunged -forward. Bob sidestepped and launched a triphammer blow with his -right fist. It caught the Bone Crusher behind the point of the jaw -with a thud that sounded like a dull explosion, and the huge Negro -chieftain collapsed as if a mountain had fallen upon him. His great -body jerked once or twice then lay still. - - - - - CHAPTER VIII - - THE TIDE TURNS - - -The tide was turned. The next moment, as Bob, flushed with victory, -prepared to leap in amongst the wavering mass of the Bone Crusher’s -followers, Jack and Frank appeared at his side. Too well they knew -the big fellow’s rashness when his blood was up to hold back any -longer. Not that they had been holding back, however. So quickly had -Bob acted that the passage of time since he had leaped down from the -top of the wall and made his sudden attack on the Bone Crusher could -be measured in seconds. - -Jack and Frank had followed at once, Wimba at Frank’s heels like a -faithful dog. Now they ranged themselves beside their comrade. - -“Steady, old thing,” warned Jack, as Bob with a wild gleam in his -eyes appeared on the verge of tackling the enemy host single-handed. -“Let’s stick together. You’ve thrown an awful scare into them.” - -In fact, the Bone Crusher’s men showed little stomach for fighting, -that is, for facing Bob. The mute evidence of the latter’s prowess -was at his back, where the prone figure of the Bone Crusher lay -without a quiver, since that blow on the point of the jaw. - -But the lull in hostilities did not last. Chief Ruku-Ru’s men were -heartened by the turn of events in their favor. They crowded forward -with sharp yells. The flight of arrows into the mass of the enemy -began anew. - -“I haven’t the heart to shoot to kill,” muttered Frank. “But if they -realize we have firearms, they may flee more quickly. I’m going to -shoot over their heads.” - -He suited action to word, and began pumping away with his automatic. -It was the last thing needed to hasten the growing panic. In a -trice, conditions were reversed. The Bone Crusher’s men broke into -headlong flight, dashing away pell mell amongst the huts on the -opposite side of the village square. And the villagers streamed past -the boys in pursuit. - -They found themselves practically alone in the square. Pursuit drew -away into the distance. The victorious vengeful cries of the -villagers mingling with the screams of the vanquished came back to -them. Dazedly, they gazed about at the numerous evidences of the -battle just ended, in the cowering women abandoned by their captors -and not yet fully realizing their fortunate rescue, in the bodies of -a score of men, including that of Chief Ruku-Ru and the Bone -Crusher, and in arrows scattered here and there. - -“By golly, Bob,” said Frank, whose face was pale, as he thought of -the peril into which his big chum had launched himself, “I’ve seen -you do a lot of foolish things, but that was the worst. To tackle -that giant.” - -“Huh,” was all the other deigned to reply. - -Jack was bending above the form of Chief Ruku-Ru, and a moment later -he straightened up and beckoned the others to join him. - -“Unconscious but beginning to mutter,” he said. “He’ll recover soon. -I think his right shoulder is dislocated, but I don’t believe he has -any serious injury. Let’s carry him to his hut, and I’ll try to set -his shoulder.” - -With Wimba’s aid, the four boys bore the body of the chief to the -door of his hut, from which one of the chief’s wives who hastened to -join them brought out a pallet. On this they laid the unconscious -form, while Jack worked at setting the dislocated shoulder. In this -he was successful as, like all the boys, he was well drilled in -administering first aid and performing rude surgery such as mishaps -in the wilds necessitated. - -Wimba and Matse rounded up the scattered bearers, and several were -despatched to the boys’ camp to obtain the medical kit. They -returned quickly, bringing the welcome intelligence that the camp -had not been disturbed by the raiders who, approaching the village -from an opposite direction, doubtless were unaware of its presence. - -Thereupon, all three boys busied themselves administering to the -wounded, a score of whom were collected. Women were pressed into -service, as all the able-bodied men had joined in the pursuit of the -routed enemy. Not until many hours of toil under the hot sun had -been spent, however, was their self-imposed task of mercy completed. -Then all the wounded had been attended to and made as comfortable as -possible in the biggest hut of the chief’s enclosure, which had been -commandeered as hospital. - -It was nightfall, and most of the warriors had returned, under the -leadership of Chief Ruku-Ru’s nephew, when the chief who had -recovered consciousness and, in fact, was little the worse as a -result of his encounter with the Bone Crusher, was informed that the -boys had attended to all the injured. - -He met them in the village square, where already a great fire was -blazing and preparations for a big feast in celebration of the -tribe’s victory were going forward. Wimba as usual acted as -interpreter. And into his eyes came a gleam which warned the boys -something unusual was afoot, before he ever interpreted the chief’s -lengthy speech. - -Lengthy though the chief’s speech had been, however, it was brief -enough on Wimba’s lips. He was not so proficient in his command of -English as to be able to render all the chief’s verbal flowers, and -contented himself accordingly with reporting the gist of what the -dusky monarch had said. Chief Ruku-Ru, one arm in a sling, in the -meantime stood smiling at one side. - -“Him much honor, baas,” said Wimba, addressing Frank whom, since the -latter’s rescue of himself from death by means of the radio, he -regarded as the leader of the boys. “Him chief say him take all -three white young men into tribe and make Strong-Arm,”—indicating -Bob, with a wave of the hand—“great chief.” - -That this was an honor, the boys knew enough of local history to -realize. Many African tribes degenerate when coming into contact -with white men, and for them to make such an offer would be insolent -and presumptuous. But the Kikuyus, far above the average of African -intelligence, were a proud people. And the boys realized that, -holding themselves in high esteem, the Kikuyus felt they were -bestowing an honor. - -In such a spirit, they accepted it. - -“Tell Chief Ruku-Ru,” said Frank to Wimba, after consulting with his -comrades, “that we shall make only one stipulation. We are very -flattered. So much so that we want Mr. Hampton here to see when the -ceremonies take place. Tell the chief that we shall summon Mr. -Hampton through the air tonight to return, and that probably he can -be back in two days. The ceremonies can be held then.” - -Wimba translated this as best he could, and then interpreting the -chief’s reply stated matters would be arranged as requested. - -Before permitting the boys to depart, however. Chief Ruku-Ru pressed -a bracelet of heavy silver, oddly worked by native silversmiths, and -containing a turquoise matrix, upon Bob. - -They examined it in turn as they made their way back to the camp, -and many were their expressions of appreciation. The fact that it -bore a family resemblance to the silver and turquoise bracelets of -the Navajo Indians of the American Southwest was commented upon by -Jack. - -“Curious,” he said, “how the same sort of workmanship, as well as -the combination of silver and turquoise, can bob up among two -primitive peoples who never heard of each other.” - -“Yes, it is,” said Frank. “But what I’m thinking of is this big bum -with a bracelet. Lady stuff.” Bob made a grab for him, and the pair -began rolling over and over in the long buffalo grass. - -“Ouch. Leggo,” begged Frank, almost choked with laughter. - -“Take it back.” - -“Sure,” gasped Frank, and Bob arose. “Only thing that would be -funnier,” cried Frank, sprinting for their tent, “would be for you -to wear a lady’s wrist watch.” - -Watching his comrades, the soberer Jack smiled sympathetically. They -had all been through a trying experience, and it was natural that -their spirits should find relief in play. - -Then he, too, entered the tent, after giving Wimba orders regarding -the preparation of dinner, and began tuning up to call his father -and not only make report regarding the momentous adventures of the -day, but also ask him to return so as to be present at the -ceremonies of induction into the Kikuyus. - - - - - CHAPTER IX - - AFRICAN KNIGHTHOOD - - -At the end of two days Mr. Hampton and Niellsen, the photographer, a -tall rangy Scandinavian some ten years older than the boys, -returned. And when this intelligence was communicated to Chief -Ruku-Ru he made preparations for the carrying out of the ceremonies -in honor of the boys that very night. - -Prior to going to the village, the two parties exchanged -experiences. And while Mr. Hampton and Niellsen had had no such -exciting times as the boys, yet they, too, had not been without -adventure. - -In particular, the boys laughed heartily over Niellsen’s description -of an incident attending the photographing of some baboons. It being -the dry season, their guides had taken Mr. Hampton and Niellsen to a -certain dry river bed in which water could be obtained by digging, a -fact with which the baboons were well aware. Here, prophesied the -guides, they would undoubtedly be able to obtain excellent pictures -of baboons. And in this prophecy they had been correct. - -“But,” laughed Mr. Hampton, “you should have seen what happened to -Niellsen. Tell it, Oscar.” - -Niellsen joined the older man in the laugh. He had an honest open -face with a tip-tilted nose and sandy recalcitrant hair which gave -him a humorous appearance calculated to induce smiles in his -auditors before ever he spoke. And in keeping with his appearance he -had a habit of dry speech which the boys found highly amusing. - -“The joke was on me, all right,” he said. - -“Or the baboon was,” said Mr. Hampton, laughing harder than ever, as -if at some diverting recollection. - -At this Jack could no longer conceal his impatience. “Come on, tell -it,” he said. “Don’t keep this all to yourselves.” - -“Well, it was this way,” said Niellsen. “You know if I’d have shown -myself to the baboons with my camera, I’d never have gotten them to -stand still long enough to have their pictures taken. Instead of -watching the birdie, they’d have come up and tried to operate the -machine. So I decided to hide myself. And for my place of -concealment, I chose the branches of a small uprooted tree. - -“There I was, had been waiting about half an’ hour, when the baboons -arrived. They began digging in the sand like regular ditch diggers. -How they did make the dirt fly. There were baboons everywhere, -scores of them. The whole tribe must have eaten pretzels and then -hustled off to this spot in the river with a whale of a thirst to be -squenched. - -“I was fooling around, trying to get a good focus, for the light was -tricky. And at last I had just what I wanted, and set my hand to the -crank, all ready to begin grinding. - -“At that moment, something lighted on my head with such force that I -fell clean out of my perch. But fortunately the ground wasn’t far -away, a matter of three or four feet. - -“I didn’t know what had struck me. But when I got to my feet and -looked around, there sat a baboon in my old perch. And he was -cranking away, just grinding for dear life, and chattering with -delight. - -“The beggar had jumped on my head, and then had taken my job away -from me.” - -The boys roared. - -“What did you do?” asked Frank. - -“Do? I bows to him and says, ‘Please, Mr. Baboon, won’t you go -away?’ And after giving me a line of baboon talk that I couldn’t -understand because I didn’t have my dictionary with me, he swung -away to join his friends.” - -“But the camera?” asked Jack. “Had the baboon damaged it?” - -“Not a bit of it,” averred Niellsen. “I found the focus still good, -and continued to grind out some more film. And I believe the beggar -took some good stuff while he was at the crank. If it comes out all -right in developing, I’m going to have stuff worth a fortune. -‘Baboons photographed by one of their number.’ Can’t you just see -that caption on the screen?” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I was fortunate enough to obtain a -picture of the baboon turning the crank, for I was standing nearby -with my camera when it occurred. So you see we could show an actual -‘still’ of the baboon playing photographer.” - -Dinner was hastily consumed, and then the whole party escorted by a -guard of honor from the chief’s own bodyguard, comprising the -tallest and best formed of the young warriors, proceeded to the -village. - -Under the council tree in his battered arm chair sat Chief Ruku-Ru, -and near him the boys took their station. A great fire blazing in -the middle of the square threw off a dancing light which illumined -the mud walls of the nearest huts, showed rank on rank of dusky -bodies gathered in the square and, falling upon the spears of the -chief’s bodyguard at his back, struck from their brightly polished -heads a myriad gleams as if fireflies flitted in the dusk. - -A hush hung over the scene, a solemnity that impressed itself on the -boys. And as they took their places at the chief’s right, surrounded -by their warrior escort, they spoke only in whispers. - -“What’s that package under your arm, Bob?” asked Jack, for the first -time noting a bulky package borne by his comrade. “Is it—” - -But he did not get to finish his question, for Mr. Hampton laying a -warning hand on his arm enjoined silence as Chief Ruku-Ru, rising -from his chair and advancing several steps in their direction, began -to address them. - -He spoke at length, the sound of his voice alone being heard in the -great square. And when he had finished, Wimba translated hurriedly. - -Chief Ruku-Ru, said he, was deeply grateful to the young white men -for the part they had played in routing the Bone Crusher’s warriors. -For this, all three were to be admitted to warriorhood in the clan. - -“It’s just as if you fellows were young squires in some old medieval -kingdom,” whispered Mr. Hampton. “And the king was about to lay the -accolade on your shoulders and acclaim you knights.” Moreover, -continued Wimba, while Chief Ruku-Ru stood silent, with folded arms, -awaiting the interpreter’s conclusion, Bob was to be especially -honored. He had overcome the Bone Crusher, and had proved himself -the mightiest of all Kikuyu warriors. He was to be given the title -of Mikalwa which meant Strong-Arm and the honorary rank of war chief -of the clan. - -As the import of Wimba’s words dawned upon him, big Bob could be -seen by a close observer to pale slightly. And Frank was a close -observer. - -“Hold your ground, old boy,” he whispered. “They’re not going to eat -you. Don’t let War Chief Mikalwa show fright now.” - -Three tall warriors now advanced at the chief’s signal from the -bodyguard at his back. Each carried a conical cap of rhinoceros -hide, with a gleaming white rhinoceros tusk, upcurving like a -sickle, attached to each side. These caps were placed on the heads -of the boys. - -So impressive was this ceremony, there in the African night, in the -heart of an African village, with the gleaming firelight flashing on -spearheads and on the multitude of assembled blacks in the -background, that for once the boys did not feel like giving way to -the spirit of fun-making. Not a whisper passed between them. Their -faces were solemn. - -As for Niellsen, stationed at his camera equipped with a lens for -night photography, he was grinding merrily away, assured that the -film he was obtaining would be without a parallel. - -After the caps with their rhino tusks had been placed on the boys’ -heads, the three warriors retired, giving way to three more. These -latter placed long spears in the boys’ hands, in turn giving way to -still another trio who equipped them with beautifully decorated hide -shields. - -Once more Chief Ruku-Ru spoke, but this time to his people, and his -words were followed by a burst of approving cries that seemed to -shake the very leaves of the council tree drooping in the windless -night overhead. Wimba translating said the chief had announced to -his people that the boys now were Kikuyu warriors, and that Bob -should henceforth be Mikalwa or Strong-Arm. - -“You will have to thank him, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton. “And I -guess, Bob, since he singled you out, it is up to you to act as -spokesman.” - -Bob groaned; nevertheless he advanced a step or two in front of his -friends and, addressing the chief, thanked him for the honor -conferred upon himself and his comrades. This Wimba translated. Then -Bob tore the paper wrappings from the parcel which he had been -carrying under his arm, and Jack with a start recognized it as one -of their portable radio sets. - -“Tell Chief Ruku-Ru,” said Bob, to Wimba, “that in return for his -kindness to us, we wish to make him a present. By means of this, he -can hear strange music and speech tonight and so long as we are in -his vicinity.” - -When Wimba had translated, Bob advanced and asked Chief Ruku-Ru to -seat himself in his armchair throne. Then he adjusted the headpiece -to the chief’s ears, threw a wire over the council tree, and tuned -in to catch the music which Matse, who had been left behind at the -camp for the purpose, was playing on the talking machine. - -“You certainly won his heart that time, Bob,” said Jack, admiringly, -as Bob returned to the side of his comrades. “Look at his face, if -you want to see real amazement.” - -The chief continually taking off and restoring the receivers, and -all the time curiously eyeing the cabinet. It was as if he were -trying to determine the origin of the strange sounds which he heard -when the receivers were attached to his ears but which were reduced -to the thinnest of whispers when he removed the headpiece. - -“I wondered what that package under your arm contained,” added Jack. - -“Well, you see, I thought we owed the old boy something in return -for what he was doing for us,” said Bob. “So I decided to give him a -real present. I fixed up with Matse to play the records. He’s become -a great radio fan, and when you fellows left me alone with him the -other night—when you used the radio to free Wimba, you know—why, I -showed him how to operate the set. He’s as imitative as a monkey and -as bright as a new penny. I listened in for a minute, before putting -the headpiece on the chief’s ears, and Matse had things going all -right.” - -“Well, you might have let a fellow in on it,” said Jack. - -“Oh, you and Frank were too busy talking to your father,” said Bob. - -In the meantime, although Chief Ruku-Ru had retired from the center -of the stage, so to speak, matters had not come to a standstill. -Quite the contrary, in fact, for with the completion of the -ceremonies having to do with the boys, the Kikuyus had gone about -the business of celebration in earnest. - -Numerous smaller fires sprang into being about the square, and some -the feasting was in full swing. Always ready for merry-making, the -Kikuyus had seized upon this occasion for a celebration despite the -fact that only two or three nights before another had been held. - -However, as Mr. Hampton and the boys had no desire to participate in -the drinking of the heavy native beer or to witness the orgy which -was bound to follow as the natives came under the influence of -liquor, they excused themselves to the chief on the ground that they -found it necessary to retire in order to be prepared for breaking -camp at an early hour on the morrow, and departed. - -Wrapped up in his new toy, Chief Ruku-Ru made no objection, and so -they managed to get away. Behind them already the dancing about the -fires was growing wilder and more unrestrained. - -“These Africans are just children, after all,” said Mr. Hampton, -shaking his head. “They don’t know the meaning of the word -restraint. Well, now for a good night’s sleep, everybody. We start -at dawn.” - - - - - CHAPTER X - - ONE GOOD TURN - - -Camp was broken at the first faint streaks of dawn the next day. Mr. -Hampton was eager to penetrate farther up-country in order to get -into a big game region of which he had heard reports. And by the -time day had fully broken, the column was on its way. - -Looking back from the top of a little hill, the three boys could see -the village of Chief Ruku-Ru, which they had skirted, still sleeping -after its exciting night. Ahead, through the long buffalo grass, -wound the bearers under the direction of Wimba and Matse, each man -either carrying a bundle on his head or else supporting on his -shoulders one end of a pole from which was slung one of the more -bulky articles of equipment, while a companion upheld the other. - -Then they dropped down on the other side of the rise, and the -village was lost to view. - -“I wonder if we’ll ever pass that way again,” mused Jack. - -“If we do,” said Frank, “there’ll be an ebony, chieftain looking for -War Chief Mikalwa’s scalp.” - -“What do you mean, looking for my scalp?” demanded Bob. - -“Oh, nothing,” said Frank, airily. “Only when Chief Ruku-Ru goes to -put on his headpiece after we’ve left and thinks he’s going to hear -a concert, how do you think he’ll regard you?” - -Bob laughed. “Well he had a good time with it last night. And, -besides, possession of that set will always mean something to him. -It’s white man’s magic. And that alone will raise him in the esteem -of his people.” - -After putting the village behind them, the party settled down to -continuous travel, for the big game country for which Mr. Hampton -was heading lay ten days travel to the northwest. The marches were -made in the early morning and late afternoon. During the heat of the -day, there was a halt of four hours, as travel would have been too -arduous and, indeed, dangerous in the extreme under that blazing -sun. - -Hot though the days were, however, the nights were cool. And so the -boys hot only managed to hold out without falling ill, but even -enjoyed the trip. Their irrepressible spirits, moreover, came to the -fore. And on several occasions they played practical jokes on each -other which were the cause of much laughter on the part of Mr. -Hampton and Niellsen. - -One such occurred after they had been on the march more than a week -and were encamped one night near the bank of a river on the edge of -the big game country. - -The day had been hot and breathless, but the night had turned cool. -And after camp was pitched, the boys with Mr. Hampton and Niellsen -were gathered about a camp fire not far from their tent. Niellsen -who had taken motion pictures in many out-of-the-way corners of the -world had been telling of some of his experience. - -“And so,” he concluded, “when I turned back my bed before jumping in -that night, I found a puff-adder all curled up nicely there for a -snooze. You fellows have often asked me why I always look into my -bed before hopping in. Well, that’s the reason.” - -“Brrr,” shuddered Bob, “if there’s anything I detest it’s a snake. -And puff-adders are the deadliest in the world, aren’t they?” - -“They are that,” said Niellsen, emphatically. “While that is true, -though,” added Mr. Hampton, “yet the deaths from snake bites are -remarkably few in Africa. The natives have various antidotes. And -many a man who has been bitten by one or other of the various -poisonous snakes of Africa, even by the puff-adder, has failed to -die of his injury. However, I for one have no desire to be bitten. -Well, let’s turn in, fellows. We want to make an early start -tomorrow and try and find some place where we can ford this river.” - -Then, noting with surprise the absence of Jack and Frank, whom he -had failed to see slip away several minutes before, he asked what -had become of them. But so quiet had been their departure that -neither of the others had noted it. - -“Maybe they’ve already turned in,” said Niellsen, getting up and -stretching. - -All three set out for their tents, and a look into that shared by -the three boys showed Jack and Frank already snuggled down in their -“flea” bags. - -Good nights were said, and then Mr. Hampton and Niellsen parting -company with Bob went to their tent. So fatigued was the big fellow -after an arduous day of marching that he was half-asleep, while -disrobing, and he tumbled into his sleeping bag unaware of the fact -that his comrades watched his every movement alertly through slitted -eyelids. - -One long sigh he gave, the kind a fellow emits just before settling -down to a good night’s sleep. He squirmed once or twice, making -himself comfortable. Then his eyes closed and he fall into that -half-waking, half-sleeping stage from which insensibly one drifts -into profound slumber. - -Suddenly his every nerve quivered. He was just on the point of -drawing his body together and springing up, blankets and all, when -he recalled the advice given him for just such an emergency and by -an effort of will controlled his nerves so that he lay perfectly -still and motionless. But what an effort was required! For big Bob -felt something clammy and cold touch his leg, something alive, -something that moved and wriggled and was gliding alongside his body -toward his head. - -Undoubtedly, it was a snake. Into his mind leaped recollection of -what had been said only a short time previously about the camp fire -on the subject of snakes. - -Niellsen had said puff-adders were the deadliest of snakes, and -likewise that they preferred to coil themselves in a fellow’s -bedding. This must be a puff-adder, nothing less. - -If a fellow exhibited no sign of life when in the vicinity of a -snake, Mr. Hampton had earlier declared, the reptile might fail to -become alarmed and might glide away without striking. It was his -only chance. And big Bob, suffering agonies of mental torture, -nevertheless exercised an iron self-control and lay without moving a -muscle. - -But not for long could he or anyone control himself under such -conditions. Hot eyeballs glaring into the darkness began to see -pinwheels and rockets. He felt as if his chest would burst. In -another moment, he must let go, and leap up, no matter what the -consequences. - -All this time the clammy something had been creeping farther and -farther up Bob’s body. Now it came to his thigh, and then he could -feel it on his abdomen. Bob couldn’t stand the torture of passivity -any longer. He was just on the verge of crying out in horror, when -realization came to him with a jolt that the something, whatever it -was, was crawling, not gliding, crawling on four legs. Therefore, it -couldn’t be a snake. - -One bound shot Bob out of his blankets. He seized an electric torch -which he always kept near at hand, and whirling about focused its -brilliant gleam upon his “flea” bag. There, in the middle of the -blankets, blinking in the white glare, sat an insignificant little -green frog. - -Which felt the smaller—the surprised froglet or the chagrined Bob—it -is difficult to say. - -Suddenly a flash of realization came to him. He saw it all. Frank -and Jack had slipped away and preceded him to the tent. Camp was -near the river bank. It would have been easy enough to walk along -the edge of the stream with a flashlight, and by its glare surprise -a frog and capture it. Easy enough, indeed; and, undoubtedly, that -was what had been done. Then the two rascals had put the frog in his -blankets. - -Assured of this, Bob’s first idea was to tumble his comrades out of -bed at once and roughhouse them. He had been badly scared. In fact, -his nerves still quivered. He considered they had gone a bit too far -in the matter of practical joking. Then he decided against instant -action. - -That was just what they would be looking for. Undoubtedly, they were -awake and watching his every movement, enjoying his discomfiture. If -he started to tumble them about, they would join forces against him. -The result would be a rough-and-tumble combat, endangering the -safety of various articles of equipment scattered about the tent. - -“I’ll not give them any satisfaction,” thought Bob. “I’ll just turn -in, and not say anything. They’ll be worried as to what I mean to -do. And when my chance comes—” - -Switching off the flashlight, and tossing the frog aside, he crawled -back into his blankets. Once he believed he heard a subdued chuckle, -whether on the part of Frank or Jack he could not decide. But -nothing was said to him. - -As for the others, they felt foolish. Both experienced an -uncomfortable sense that their practical-joke had been too startling -in character. Besides, old Bob had robbed them of their enjoyment by -refusing to display resentment. - -Presently, all three were asleep. - -But Bob was first to wake. He had an infallible system. If he -decided on retiring that he wanted to wake at a certain hour, at -that hour he would wake. It is a power many people possess. Bob -called it “setting his mental alarm clock.” - -At four-thirty his eyes flew open and after a few seconds spent in -collecting his thoughts, he carefully surveyed the interior of the -tent without stirring or making a sound. Darkness had gone, and a -dim gray light penetrated the tent walls, making it possible to -distinguish objects. Bob could see his comrades, both sleeping -soundly. He smiled in satisfaction. - -Crawling out of his blankets, he dressed with infinite caution to -avoid making any sound which might disturb the sleepers. Then he -stole away to the bearers’ camp. The Negroes still slept, but Bob -shook Wimba into wakefulness and then held whispered consultation -with him. - -“Move fast, now,” he concluded, “so as to get ’em before they wake.” - -Wimba, whose primitive nature took the keenest relish in practical -jokes, nodded vigorously. Then he wakened half a dozen of the -bearers and spoke to them in their own tongue. All grinned and -several, glancing toward Bob sat at one side watching them, laughed -outright and nodded as if in encouragement. - -This was enough for Bob, who felt certain the surprise he was -planning for his comrades, in return for the trick played upon him -the previous night, would go through successfully, if only the -Negroes did not delay overlong in their necessary preparations. -Regarding the latter, however, a glance assured him there was not -going to be any undue delay, for the Negroes selected were rapidly -becoming most fearsome looking objects, as they daubed faces and -bodies with the ghastly white clay used as war paint by the Kikuyu -warrior when he is about to go on the warpath. - -“All ready, baas,” reported Wimba, approaching Bob with one of the -bepainted bearers trailing behind him and tying his wrists loosely -behind his back. For Wimba was to appear to be taken prisoner by a -party of Kikuyus from the Bone Crusher’s clan, and to that end he -was being tied up. - -Bob was delighted with the speed displayed. - -“Very good, Wimba,” he said. “I’ll slip back into my tent now and -crawl into bed. Now, you’re sure you understand what to say?” - -The jolly black laughed. “Oh, me un’erstand, baas. Him funny. Leave -to Wimba.” - -“Good,” said Bob. “Then I’ll be off. Do you follow in five minutes.” - -As he approached his tent, Bob wondered whether his comrades had -waked yet by any chance. It was too early for them. But if they had -waked, and had noted his absence, the probability was they would -become suspicious when Wimba and the “war party” appeared on the -scene. - -A hasty look about, however, reassured him. The boys had not moved -from the positions in which he had left them. They were sleeping -evenly. If either had been snoring, Bob would have suspected -feigning. But such was not the case. - -Smiling satisfiedly, he hastily disrobed and got back into his -“flea” bag. Hardly had he settled down again, than Wimba poked his -head into the tent and, catching Bob’s meaning glance and nod of the -head, shouldered his way inside, hands bound behind him. And close -at his heels came six of the most fearful looking warriors one could -find in all Africa. - - - - - CHAPTER XI - - TURN ABOUT - - -Three of the warriors bore hide shields and spears, which Bob knew -to be those given him and his comrades by Chief Ruku-Ru upon their -induction into the clan as warriors. The bearers carried no such war -paraphernalia. And these had been taken from the baggage. The others -handled wicked-appearing clubs studded with spikes, such as -sometimes were used in battling smaller animals. - -All six were the tallest and best formed amongst the bearers. And -hastily though they had bedaubed themselves, yet the job had been -thorough-going. As he looked at the grinning mask on the chest of -the tallest who was to enact the role of leader, Bob shuddered -involuntarily. - -So noiseless had been the entry of the party into the tent that Jack -and Frank still slept soundly and Wimba, who knew the location of -every object in the tent, experienced no difficulty in collecting -the automatics lying close to each sleeper. Bob nodded approval. -Here was something of which he had failed to take account. Good for -Wimba. He wasn’t taking any chances on having his men potted before -explanations could be made. - -Then Wimba with a toe stirred first Jack and then Frank, and as they -opened their eyes Bob composed his features into a glare of angry -surprise in keeping with the role he had set himself to act. - -Both newly-roused boys struggled upright, as did Bob. And beside -each a warrior with knobbed club threateningly upraised sprang to -take his place. Fear written in every feature, Wimba stood cringing -in the middle of the tent, gazing from one to the other of the boys -and trying to speak, but experiencing difficulty, apparently, in -emitting any sound at all. He was the picture of a man in mortal -terror. And Bob almost forgot himself and the part he must play, in -his delight at Wimba’s histrionic abilities. - -As for Jack and Frank, so real did it all seem to them that there -was no thought in their minds but what a terrible calamity had -befallen the party. The camp had been raided, and at the very moment -when they believed themselves in friendly territory and had not -considered it necessary to post guards. Wimba was a prisoner. And -some ghastly fate undoubtedly awaited themselves. Jack and Frank -both were pale. And seeing them glance about wildly, as if in search -of their revolvers, Bob was mightily pleased that Wimba’s -forethought had removed the weapons from reach. - -Before either Frank or Jack could speak, Bob took charge of the -situation. Glaring ferociously as the black warrior towering above -him with upraised club, who glared just as ferociously at him in -return, Bob shouted to Wimba: - -“What’s the meaning of this, Wimba?” - -“Him Bone Crusher’s warriors, baas,” returned the latter in tones of -purest terror. “Oh, baas, save Wimba.” - -“The Bone Crusher’s men?” shouted Bob. “Why, we left their vicinity -days ago.” - -“Very angry clan,” returned Wimba. “They follow. Say white young men -spoil their plans. So now they capture white young men.” - -Bob groaned, and casting a glance of despair toward Jack and Frank, -he added in a husky voice: “This looks tough, fellows. If we’d only -kept a guard.” - -“Can’t we fight ’em.” Frank was shaky-voiced but game. - -“I’d be the last fellow to hold back,” said Bob. “But what chance -would we have? Cumbered up in these blankets and without weapons? -We’d just get our heads split open.” - -“Wh—what of father and Niellsen?” asked Jack. He was terrified and -showed it. And who could blame him? Nevertheless, his thought was -not for himself but his father. - -“I’m prisoner, too, baas,” said Wimba, mournfully. - -Jack groaned and buried his face in his hands. “Look here, Wimba,” -said Bob, “ask that big chief what they intend to do with us, and -when they’re going to begin.” - -Wimba and the majestic-looking leader of the war party conversed -rapidly in the Kikuyu tongue. Then Wimba turned to Bob. There was -respect in the tone with which he addressed him. - -“Um Bone Crusher’s men say Mikalwa great fighter. Bone Crusher gone, -so they want Mikalwa for chief.” - -“What? Who’s Mikalwa? Me?” - -Wimba nodded. And the tall leader approached Bob and bowed low -before him. - -“Fine,” shouted Bob, leaping to his feet. “Then there’s nothing to -worry about. I’ll just order you fellows set free.” And he turned -toward Jack and Frank. - -But Wimba shook his head. - -“Mikalwa to be chief,” he said. “But others must die. Mikalwa can’t -save them.” - -Bob struck an heroic attitude, arms folded across his chest. The -fact that he was in pajamas, and that the pants were slipping down -while the jacket hung together by only one button, rather spoiled -the effect. But nobody laughed. The situation was too serious for -Jack and Frank, whose anxious gaze roved from Bob to Wimba to the -leader of the raiders and back to Bob again. - -“Tell them, Wimba,” cried Bob, “tell these rascals that Mikalwa -prefers to die with his own people. If he cannot set his friends -free, he will not become their chief. They must treat him as one of -their prisoners.” - -“Bob, Bob,” begged Frank, in a broken voice, “don’t throw away your -only chance.” - -At the tone employed by his closest friend, big Bob began to weaken. -Poor Frank’s feelings had been harrowed sufficiently, and Jack’s, -too, he thought, to atone in full for the playing of that snake -trick on him the night before. However, he was nearing the end of -the little drama which he had concocted with Wimba, and so he -decided to play it out. - -Wimba in the meantime, as soon as Bob had finished speaking had -addressed the pseudo-chief. - -The latter replied, and Wimba turning with beaming face cried -joyfully: - -“Him say all right, baas. If Mikalwa be big chief him can set all -friends free.” - -“Good,” shouted Bob. And turning toward his astounded comrades, -still seated in their blankets, he flung out both hands in a -magnificent gesture, as if showering largess upon them. “Fellows,” -he cried, “receive your freedom at the hands of Big Chief Mikalwa, -otherwise known as”—he paused for dramatic effect, then added—“the -snake charmer.” - -Spinning about he laughed and said: “All right, Wimba. Show’s over. -Give each of the actors an extra help of tobacco. I’m proud of you -and your troupe.” - -Wimba spoke rapidly to the others, and on each face broke out a -broad smile while the trio standing guard over the boys lowered -their clubs and relaxed their hostile attitude. The smiles gave way -to chuckles as the Negroes took in the dazed expression spreading -over the features of Frank and Jack. And then as Bob, unable longer -to control his mirth, broke into loud laughter, the Negroes followed -suit. - -With a vigorous thrust of his bare foot against the chest of each, -Bob sent Jack and Frank toppling backward into their blankets. With -a wave of the hand, he indicated Wimba and his impromptu minstrel -troupe should withdraw. And while Jack and Frank still were -struggling to right themselves and, at the same time, to readjust -their reeling thoughts to this outrageous development of the -situation, the chuckling Kikuyus filed out with Wimba bringing up -the rear and casting knowing grins over his shoulder at Bob. - -“Look here,” said Jack, sitting up and regarding Bob with a rueful -expression, “did you honestly put those Johnnies up to that?” - -“I can’t believe it yet,” said Frank, running his fingers through -his uncombed hair. - -Bob laughed. “Just a little show for your benefit,” he said. “I -thought you’d appreciate what real talent could do—after your own -puny effort last night.” - -“I’ll bet I’m still as white as those ghastly Negroes were painted,” -said Jack. “I don’t expect to find my natural youthful color -restored for a week at least.” - -Frank said nothing, but getting up went over to Bob and offered his -hand. - -“Yours was a jolly good job, old boy,” he said. “Ours was a kind of -mean trick. Sorry.” - -Once more amity was restored. And Mr. Hampton appearing at the -entrance to the tent at that moment, all three began rehearsing -together the story of recent occurrences. What between their -bubbling laughter and their frequent interruptions of each other, it -was difficult for the older man to gain a real appreciation of what -had occurred. Finally, he threw up his hands. - -“One at a time, one at a time,” he pleaded. “And, anyway, save it up -to tell me later. We must get under way at once, if we are going to -ford this river today.” - - - - - CHAPTER XII - - AN UNEXPECTED JAUNT - - -Finding a ford, however, was no easy matter, for the river was both -wide and deep. Several times the bearers ventured into the water at -likely-looking places, but the rapid deepening and the swiftness of -the current caused them to withdraw in haste. - -The country in which they found themselves was sparsely-inhabited -marsh land. The last village, occupying a high plateau, lay two -days’ journey to the rear. Since leaving it they had failed to -encounter any local tribesmen. Only by luck had they found knolls of -dry firm ground projecting above the jungle growth of the marsh on -which to pitch camp the two nights spent in this district. - -Mr. Hampton, fearing the effects of the miasmatic surroundings on -the health of all, was resolved that this day should see them cross -the river and into the hills rolling up in the background on the -other side. Therefore, he kept the bearers plodding through the -thick jungle growth of reeds and trees along the bank in search of a -ford. For, although of human habitation there seemed little -evidence, yet of animals there were many signs. And undoubtedly some -of the latter were accustomed to cross the river at some point or -other in the vicinity. - -None being discovered, however, toward noon, Mr. Hampton decided -they would build a raft. Rope a-plenty was in their equipment. When -the raft was ready, a bearer would swim the river with the end of a -rope to be attached to a tree on the other side. By fastening the -rope similarly on the near side of the river, they would obtain a -ferry, along which the raft could be pulled back and forth until -everybody and all the supplies and articles of equipment could be -sent across. - -The work of building the raft out of felled logs bound together with -tough vines and creepers went on apace, and by the middle of -afternoon everything was in readiness for the attempt. All three of -the boys were expert swimmers and volunteered to make the crossing -with the rope. But Mr. Hampton would not give his consent. - -“As to your ability to swim several times the distance, there can be -no question,” he said. “But one can never tell when crocodiles will -appear in these African rivers. Wimba tells me there are several men -amongst our bearers who have a reputation for fighting crocodiles. -I’ll see whether either or both want to swim across.” - -The two men mentioned by Wimba readily consented to make the -crossing, being eager to receive the extra pay for the hazard -promised by Mr. Hampton. And with knives clutched between their -teeth, they plunged into the river, the rope paying out behind them. -However, although through his glasses, Jack, who was maintaining a -lookout, could discern three of the long sinister beasts sunning -themselves on a sandy shelf along the opposite shore but -considerably below the point at which the swimmers planned to land, -yet none appeared in midstream to attack the two Kikuyus. And the -latter swimming strongly, presently were seen to clamber out of the -water. Then they disappeared into the luxuriant undergrowth, to -reappear a few minutes later shouting that the rope had been made -fast to a tree. - -“First, Dad,” cried Jack. “You wouldn’t let us swim the river, so -now you must let us be first to cross on the raft.” - -Mr. Hampton smiled indulgently. “You’re as big as I, Jack,” he said, -“but you’re only a kid still, aren’t you? All right. Let it be as -you say. You three and six of the bearers can make the first -crossing with the major portion of our stores. Then send the raft -back, and Niellsen and I will cross over with our photographic -equipment and whatever supplies you haven’t taken. Then Wimba can -follow with the rest of the bearers.” - -“But, Mr. Hampton,” Frank objected, “do you believe we ought to put -all our supplies, or even the major portion, in one load? What if -the raft upsets?” - -“You’re right, Frank,” said the older man, approvingly. “We would be -out of luck in a case like that. No, we’ll split our provisions, and -send over only half at a time.” - -“The same idea can be applied to our radio equipment, too,” said -Jack. “We’ll take several of the portable receiving sets with us, as -well as that emergency sending set. You can bring the one we’ve been -using, when you come, together with the remaining portable -receivers.” - -The good sense of both these suggestions being readily apparent, -they were adopted and, carrying half the provisions and half the -radio equipment, the three boys with six bearers sent out to -negotiate the crossing. - -Long poles had been cut and with these half the number on the raft -essayed to pole, while the balance pulled on the rope stretching now -from bank to bank and tied about trees at either end. - -But almost immediately it became apparent the force of the river -current had been underestimated. So strong was the downstream drag -that all soon found themselves working as if for their very lives to -make headway. Moreover, the rope drawn as taut as a violin string by -the force of their weight upon it began to screech with a dry sound. - -“We better turn back, Jack,” panted Frank, from his position at the -rear end of the raft where he was battling valiantly with a pole. -“In a minute we won’t be able to touch bottom any longer, and then -our unsupported weight is going to be too much for that rope.” - -Hardly had the words been uttered than there came a sudden sharp -report. The rope had parted at a weak spot. The two ends fell into -the water, out of reach. And at once, seized in the hungry clutch of -the swift current, the raft was whirled into midstream and started -down river. - -Fortunately, Matse was of the number aboard. And when Jack shouted -an order to the bearers not to use their poles lest they be snatched -from their grasp, as the river was running too strongly at this -point, Matse translated his command. At that, however, Jack’s -forethought came a moment too late to prevent one of the blacks from -losing his pole. It was sucked from his grasp as the raft whirled -along, when he attempted to strike bottom with it to arrest their -progress. Only through the fact that Bob throwing an arm about his -waist at the crucial moment tugged him inward did the black escape -following his pole. - -“Tell the men to sit down and pull in their poles,” Jack ordered -Matse. “Pretty soon the current will swing in toward one shore or -another as we round a bend, and then we may stand a chance to strike -bottom and pole ashore. Try to make them see that it is necessary to -save the raft and equipment, Matse, so that they won’t jump off and -swim ashore.” - -The intelligent young Kikuyu nodded his comprehension and then began -to lay down the law to his comrades in their own tongue. - -In the meantime, Mr. Hampton could be seen starting the bearers on -shore down stream. And Jack knew his father’s thought was his, -namely that some turn of the current might throw the raft toward the -river bank and thus afford those on land a chance to be of aid. - -“If we only had a rope,” he groaned. - -“What’s that your father is shouting, Jack? Can you understand him?” -asked Bob. - -Jack shook his head. - -“Too far away,” he said. “This river certainly is sweeping us along -at a great rate. There, I can’t see them any more.” - -And standing up, Jack waved his handkerchief as the raft swept -around a bend and his father and the party ashore were lost to view. - -Then Jack crouched down between Bob and Frank. - -“We’ll have to remember one thing, fellows,” he said, lowering his -voice to a whisper. “And that is that these blacks will stick to the -raft, perhaps, if we can manage to keep them from becoming excited -and apprehensive. But if they lose their heads, they’ll jump -overboard and swim for it. And in that case our chance of saving the -raft and all these supplies and equipment will be mighty slim. So it -is up to us to keep smiling, because they’ll be watching us. In -fact, they’re watching us now.” - -The blacks were, indeed, casting anxious glances toward the three -boys. And the latter, accepting Jack’s outline of the situation, -grinned in a way to disarm apprehension. Nevertheless, they could -see from the way in which the Kikuyus turned to gaze at the water -that they were speculating upon the possibilities of swimming -ashore. - -“Can the men swim, Matse?” asked Jack of the young interpreter who -crouched nearest them, staring with fascinated gaze at the swift -water bearing them along. - -“All, baas,” replied Matse. “They say they stay long as can, but -will swim if no can save raft. They ’fraid crocodile but more ’fraid -waterfall.” - -“Waterfall?” cried Frank, in alarm. - -Matse nodded. “Me no can tell, baas,” he said. “Fella-boys say river -um run too fast. Waterfall soon.” - -Bob jumped to his feet. “Look here. We can’t sit here idle, waiting -to be tossed toward one bank or the other, while all the time we may -be skidding along toward a falls. I can’t hear any roar indicating -one near at hand. Just the same, this river is running mighty fast, -and there may be a falls ahead. Let’s get some of these poles -together and try to rig up a stern sweep to guide us inshore.” - -“That’s the idea,” approved Frank. “It’s about our only chance to -save the raft, and if we don’t do it we may soon all be in the water -trying to swim to shore.” - -Matse called to the bearers who shoved their poles across the raft -toward the boys, and watched eagerly while Bob set to work to -develop his idea. - -What he wanted was a paddle on the end of several poles lashed -together. The poles were available, and the paddle blade was easily -obtained by ripping off several heavy boards from a packing case. -But hammer and stout nails were none. However, Bob got around that -by tearing up many feet of stout creeper binding the logs of the -raft at one end. Then he placed the boards between the ends of two -poles and lashed them in place with the vine. - -“Now for it,” he said, surveying his work dubiously. “It looks -strong enough, but whether it will hold together is a question. -However, here goes.” - -The felled logs comprising the raft were in several layers, -criss-crossing each other. In none of these layers had the logs been -placed tightly together. Bob poked around until he found a -succession of openings in the various layers of logs which were in -line with each other, and then managed to push the paddle through -and into the water. A little pressing apart of the logs and tearing -of vines here and there enlarged the opening sufficiently to permit -slanting the poles forward so far that the blade trailing at the -rear became a genuinely effective sweep. - -“Hurray,” yelled Bob, jubilantly, as the raft began to swing -sluggishly but steadily toward shore. “Get some of those fellows to -help hold this steady, Matse.” - -Two of the bearers sprang with alacrity to positions on the two -poles lashed together which constituted the handle of the sweep. - -Bob stationed them in position to hold the paddle steady at an angle -which swept the raft shoreward, for he was not using it as a sweep -for propulsion but as steering oar. - -Then he stood back to contemplate his work with a look of pride on -his face. - -“Well, I guess that’ll turn the trick if the paddle doesn’t break,” -he said to Jack. “The tug of the water is tremendous.” - -“Yes,” replied the latter, leaning close and speaking in a whisper, -“or if we aren’t swept into the rapids ahead. Take a look but don’t -draw the attention of the Kikuyus. They are so interested in -watching the result of your labors and in playing around with your -steering oar that they haven’t seen yet. There. Down stream.” - -Bob looked. - -Some distance ahead, where the river swept around a big island, -scattered rocks jutted above the water of both channels. And over -them foamed the river. - -Then the first sound of the rapids was borne to their ears. - - - - - CHAPTER XIII - - IN THE RIVER’S CLUTCH - - -The raft leaped forward like a thing alive. Kikuyus sweating at the -steering oar were unable to point the unwieldly craft inshore any -longer. Frightened cries broke from the blacks as they saw the -spouters ahead, saw too the black teeth of the basaltic rocks -waiting to tear them. - -“Back, back,” shouted Jack, stationed on the shoreward side of the -raft. He waved his arms frantically in warning to the blacks. “Don’t -let them jump in, Matse,” he screamed. “They’d drown.” - -But the thoroughly frightened blacks had lost all awe of their -superiors. They continued to crowd forward as if planning to leap -overboard. - -“Look out, Jack,” cried Frank, standing in the bow, his attention -diverted from the river ahead by Jack’s predicament. “You can’t stop -them. They’ll brush you into the river if you get in their way.” - -But big Bob saw the danger to his comrade, too. - -He gained Jack’s side and, legs braced, facing the hysterically -frightened blacks, he waved his automatic in their faces. - -“Any man deserting will be shot,” he cried. “Matse, tell these -fellows we want to save their lives. We’ll swing the raft against -the island below us. If everybody works on the steering oar it can -be done. And we’ll all be saved.” - -Matse also had succumbed to the fright of the moment, along with his -companions. But not to the same extent. One look ahead showed him -the possibilities and, flinging himself in front of his wavering -assistants, he shouted at them in their own tongue. The boys could -not understand his words, but there was no misreading his tone. He -was lashing them with whips of scorn. And that it was proving -effective was plain to be seen. - -“Fella-boys help, baas,” cried Matse, in the end, turning to Bob. -“You tell um what can do.” - -It was an anxious moment for the three boys. Fate had thrust them -without any preliminary warning into a mighty tight place, indeed. -Ahead lay possible, even probable, disaster. To escape to the shore -by swimming was out of the question. The current was running like a -mill race, and even the strongest of swimmers could not have stemmed -it, but must of necessity have been swept along helpless in its -clutch. And upon the young shoulders of the trio rested the -responsibility for extricating not themselves alone from this -threatening monster of a river, but also the half dozen blacks. -Moreover, if it were humanly possible, they desired also to save the -raft and its contents. - -But was it possible? Was it possible to save the lives of all -concerned? Could they hope to save the raft? Was not their only -chance to be flung upon some of the rocks which, bare, jagged, wet -from the constant spray spouting over them, offering only insecure -hold at best, seemed to leap toward them, so swiftly were they borne -along? And then the raft would go whirling and bumping into the -further rapids around the bend which as yet they could not see and -be swept to destruction over the falls they suspected lay not far -away by reason of the growing volume of sound which came to them, -the dull booming roar of water tumbling, cascading, over a -precipice. - -At such moments, one’s eyes seem to drink in all the surroundings as -if in one vast comprehensive glance, and one’s thoughts stimulated -by the unwonted danger race madly. It was so with the boys. They saw -the high wooded bluffs, rank jungle growth descending to the water’s -edge. They saw the broad river, fully half a mile wide, sweeping on -like a great sheet of glass to crash and splinter upon the rocks at -the bend and upon the wooded island in the middle. What lay beyond -that mighty curve, where the river turning sharply bore away to the -right whence came the roar of the waterfall which they suspected to -be there, they could not see. All this they saw, all this their -vision grasped, in that one sweeping glance when a moment seemed an -eternity. And their thoughts moved as swiftly as sight. In fact, -only one possible salvation for all lay ahead. And all three grasped -it simultaneously. - -“The island,” cried Jack. “We must try to reach the island.” - -This island was in shape long and narrow and as they drew nearer, -they could discern the contour of that portion at the upstream end -quite clearly. At the tip were rocks in a jumbled mass which would -spell destruction to the raft, perhaps to themselves, if they were -swept upon them. But, caught in a current setting into the channel -between the island and the left bank of the river, they could see as -they drew closer to the island that just below the rocks lay a cove -with a shelving sandy shore. - -They were still some distance above this point, and Bob believed -they could maneuver the raft into the cove before being swept beyond -it and into the rocks which began not far away. He said as much to -the others, who nodded agreement, then he leaped to position at the -steering oar. Three of the blacks helped him swing the clumsy but -effective sweep and hold it in position. Steadily but surely, the -raft swung in toward the cove. - -Frank and Jack in the meantime took command at the bow of the raft, -if the square end downstream can so be dignified. And Matse passed -the word to the two remaining blacks of what was intended. All five -were to stand ready to leap into the water as they approached the -cove and help to direct the raft into it. - -On swept the raft. And now it could be seen that, even though the -direction given it by the steering oar was carrying it steadily -toward the island, yet so strong was the drag of the current upon -its unwieldly bulk that the raft would arrive only by the narrowest -of margins, if at all. And, if they missed the cove, almost certain -destruction awaited beyond. - -“If I think we’re going to miss it, Bob,” shouted Jack from the bow, -“I’ll warn you in time so that you and the blacks can run forward -and swim for the cove.” - -Bob shouted an “All right,” to show he had heard. But he did not -look up. The improvised steering oar was bending under the strain -placed upon it, and he was fearful it would snap at any moment. -Still it held, however. And Bob was grimly determined that as long -as there remained a chance to bring their rude craft to shore, he’d -stick to it. - -A sensible diminution in the tug of the water a moment later -apprised Bob that they had managed to swing the raft out of the -center of the current. They were close to the island now. But they -were close to the cove, too. In fact, they were almost abreast of -it. And that meant that unless they could swing the raft in at once, -it would be carried beyond the only possible landing place. - -Bob decided to change his tactics. Instead of using his improvised -paddle as steering oar, he would use it as a sweep. The raft had -been spun around so that the forward end faced the shore. Bob -couldn’t speak to the Kikuyus in their own tongue, but he could -signal his intentions. And this he did by thrusting them away and -himself straining to work the oar back and forth. Then he beckoned -them to assist him, and they understood and leaped to obey. - -Over his shoulder he glanced anxiously toward the forward end, and -with a leap of the heart he saw that they were making progress. The -threshing of the sweep, acting as a paddle wheel, was sending them -toward the shore. But still their progress was not sufficient to put -them into the cove for, although the pull of the current had -diminished, it still was sweeping them along at a rate which -threatened to carry them beyond the safety zone. - -But Frank and Jack also were alive to the danger. And they had -changed their original plan of all leaping into the water and -attempting to pull the raft ashore by swimming. For as they drew -closer to the cove, Jack had gotten the idea that, perhaps, the -river grew shallower here and had thrust one of the long poles into -the water. It had been almost torn from his hand. Nevertheless, he -had touched bottom. - -So now the two boys and the three blacks not engaged on the sweep -with Bob lined the downstream side of the raft, two to a pole. And -at every thrust they touched bottom. - -For a long minute it was touch and go, and whether the combined -efforts of the men at the poles with those at the sweep would -succeed in bringing the raft into the backwater of the cove, hung in -the balance. But human determination defeated the river, robbed it -of its victims. After proceeding only by inches, the raft suddenly -shot ahead, as if the river deciding it was defeated spurned this -stubborn craft at the last. And the next moment, the raft was -bobbing in the backwater of the cove, where the current was not -perceptible, while just beyond the rocks guarding the two -extremities of its half-moon shore the river rolled on so swiftly as -to make a sharp line of cleavage between the main stream and the -cove. - -After their strenuous exertions, all were a trifle bewildered to -find themselves thus suddenly shot into safety with no call to -extend themselves further. The Kikuyus began chattering like magpies -and, leaping into the shallow water, dragged the raft up until the -forward end rested on the sand above the water line. As for the -boys, they could only look at each other, each reading in the eyes -of his friends unutterable relief at escape from that threat of a -watery death. - -Quite simply big Bob bent his head and closed his eyes. And the -others did likewise. And from three profoundly grateful hearts there -went up to the Divine Providence which guards poor mortals a prayer -of gratitude no less sincere because unspoken. - - - - - CHAPTER XIV - - RADIO BRIDGES THE GAP - - -It was not a large island, as islands go, being something less than -half a mile in extent by a quarter of that in breadth. But it was -densely wooded, and the underbrush was so thick as to make -exploration difficult. Nevertheless, after securing the raft to the -trunks of trees by means of stout creepers twisted and used as -ropes, the boys pushed exploration of the island in order to -determine whether there was some means of reaching the mainland from -it. - -That, however, would be difficult. At no place did either river bank -approach the island closely. The likeliest chance appeared to be to -cross to the left bank, that upon which was the main party, by means -of a score of half-submerged rocks, between and over which the water -boiled and foamed. These rocks lay between the forward end of the -island and the shore. - -“We might be able to leap from rock to rock in some cases, and in -others to bridge the chasms with poles,” said Jack, considering the -situation, as he and the two others, with Matse behind them, stood -on the shore near these rocks. - -“But then,” said Frank, “we’d have to abandon the raft.” - -Jack nodded gloomily. - -At one other point, another solution suggested itself. Near the -upstream end of the island, on the side opposite that upon which -they had landed, the mainland was less than one hundred yards away. -And through this lesser channel the water, as they ascertained by -tossing chips into the current, flowed less swiftly. A strong -swimmer, heading upstream, probably would be able to make his way to -the opposite shore before being swept down into the rapids below. He -could carry a rope and, once such a connection was made, other ropes -could be passed back and forth until a strong enough ferry was -established to make it possible to transport the raft without danger -of the ropes parting and letting it be carried down. - -But where was rope to be obtained? Examination of the boxes revealed -numbers were bound with short ends of rope. But all these tied -together would not be of sufficient length to bridge the channel -even once. And more than one rope, as experience had revealed, would -be necessary to ensure safety. - -“We might make a rope of creepers,” Bob suggested, at length, as, -after a survey of their resources, the three stood on the raft, -gazing wryly at each other. - -“Dad has several big coils of rope with him,” said Jack. “If we -could only get in touch with him and tell him to cross the river up -above and come down on the right bank.” - -Bob looked at his watch. “More than three hours since we started our -runaway journey,” he commented. “Great Scott, I hadn’t realized how -long we’d been on the way. Why, we must have been carried fifteen -miles downstream.” - -“All of that,” said Jack. “And Dad will have a hard time making his -way through the underbrush and jungle growth along that marshy river -bank on his side of the stream. He’ll keep hunting till he finds us. -But we can hardly look for him to put in an appearance today. Well, -thank goodness, we not only saved ourselves but the raft and its -supplies, too. That’s something. And we’ll find a way out of this -all right.” - -Frank who, although the smallest of the three suffered most from the -heat oppression, had remained silent, sitting on a box and fanning -his flushed face with his sun helmet. Now he leaped to his feet, and -his eyes lost the drowsy look induced by the heat and sparkled with -animation. - -“Jack, if we’ve been gone more than three hours, it’s dollars to -doughnuts that we can get in touch with your father.” - -“You mean—” - -“Radio. No less,” answered Frank, triumphantly. Then he proceeded to -elaborate. - -“Your father, as you say, cannot have pushed his way very far -through that jungle growth in three short hours. He knows that -whether the blacks swam for it or not, we would stick to the raft as -long as there remained a chance to save it. So he will figure either -that we have reached shore somewhere below him with the raft or else -that we are still being carried downstream. After he has forced his -way through the jungle a mile or two, what is he most likely to do? -Why, to set up the radio and start calling for us on the chance that -we are doing likewise. Doesn’t that seem probable.” - -“Probable or not,” said Bob, beginning at once to poke about amongst -the contents of the raft in search of the box containing the spare -transmitting set; “at least putting up the radio will give us -something to do.” - -“Right,” said Jack, laying his hand on a case, “and here it is. Now -to get it set up.” - -The blacks, with the exception of Matse who sat dozing on the bank, -were not in sight, having retired to a glade back amongst the trees -and gone to sleep. Their philosophy seemed to be to leave worry to -the young white men. - -“Anyhow, we wouldn’t need them,” decided Jack. “Because we won’t -have to take this stuff ashore to set it up. We can put it up right -here on the raft. Water is a fine conductor and will give us a good -ground. And we can have better luck out here in the open with our -aerial than in amongst the trees.” - -With this the others agreed, and all went to work unpacking the -apparatus. Little was said as they worked, and so expert were they -at this job of putting up a set in double-quick time in the wilds -that in a very short space the loop aerial was in place, all the -wires were connected, and then Jack sat down at the instrument and -began tuning in to the wave length his father would be employing. - -At first there was no response, try as he would. And Jack feared -that perhaps water had penetrated the packing boxes and saturated -some of the wiring. He put off the headpiece, and the three boys -went over every inch of wire. True enough, what Jack feared had -really occurred. But only one small wire was wet. Armature windings -and other portions of the apparatus which could not have been dried -out readily had they become saturated, had escaped. - -“I suppose now we’ll have to build a fire and dry this out,” said -Jack, detaching the three foot strand of insulated wire connecting -one post of the tuning coil with one of the end posts of the switch. -“It’s a nuisance, but I can’t find any replacement wire.” - -“No use building a fire,” said Frank. “This sun is hot enough, -goodness knows. That strand ought to dry out soon enough. Let’s put -it here,” he added, indicating a packing case standing in the sun -from the surface of which heat waves visibly radiated. - -That was done and then the boys sought the shaded end of the raft -where they crouched, talking intermittently, while awaiting the -result of the drying-out process. Several times one or other went -and turned over the wire and at length Jack triumphantly declared it -thoroughly dry. Then the connection was restored, and again he put -on the headpiece and tuned in. - -Bob and Frank looked on anxiously. Almost at once a broad grin broke -over Jack’s face. - -“It’s Dad,” he cried; “calling for us.” - -Then pulling the transmitter toward him, he began to reply. This -two-way set for both transmitting and receiving was of the boys’ own -design. Simpler, more compact, than any device turned out by the -great companies manufacturing radio supplies, it had served them -well in other lands and climes and in the most perilous of -circumstances had proven their staunchest support. The impact of the -voice against a sensitive diaphragm acted to automatically close the -receiver. It was this which constituted the chief feature of the -device, making the jump from transmission to reception and vice -versa a matter of no account at all. - -Bob and Frank, unable to hear what Mr. Hampton had to say, but -listening to Jack’s remarks, gathered the drift of the conversation. -As Frank had surmised, the main party had been so delayed in pushing -down river through the jungle growth along the bank that only a -couple of miles had been made. Then, finding no trace of the runaway -raft, Mr. Hampton had returned to their old camp site and obtained -the radio which had not been set up for some days. Rigging it up -with Niellsen’s aid, he had at once begun calling. When no reply was -received, he had continued to call at fifteen-minute intervals. And -it was one of these calls which had caught Jack’s ear. - -Jack was outlining their situation on the island to his father. And -after having heard how matters stood, the latter apparently, so far -as Bob and Frank could gather from Jack’s replies, was of their -opinion regarding a method of rescue. Consequently, he intended -again to essay the crossing of the river at the old camp site, after -which he would make his way down the right bank which was higher -ground and freer of jungle growth to the point opposite the island -where the boys believed a swimmer could cross the channel with a -rope. - -Finally, Jack closed communication and turned to his comrades. -Relief at this quick opening of communication with the main party -was uppermost in the minds of all. Once more they had reason to be -thankful that radio was at their command. - -“And a mighty good thing, too,” said Jack, “that we took Frank’s -advice, and split our equipment, so that both Dad and ourselves are -supplied.” - -The attempt at rescue, however, could not be made until the -following morning. The better part of the day already was sped. Mr. -Hampton would spend the balance in crossing the river and starting -downstream. He might, of course, reach a position opposite them -before nightfall, as four hours of daylight yet were left. But the -crossing could not be attempted except in daylight and so he would -have to wait until the following day. - -At length, after turning the matter over and considering it from all -angles, the boys decided to go ashore and prepare some food. They -had not eaten since their early morning breakfast. Matse, -accordingly, was aroused and sent to stir up the bearers. A case of -tinned foods was opened, and the boys tossed materials for a meal to -the bearers on shore. - - - - - CHAPTER XV - - RESCUED - - -Not until shortly after dusk that night was Mr. Hampton heard from. -Then a hail from the right bank of the river near the head of the -island was heard by the boys who had taken up their position about a -fire, for the night had become chilly. Calls sounded back and forth -across the water. Finally, assured of each other’s safety, both -parties retired for the night, prepared to attempt the work of -rescue as soon as dawn should bring sufficient light. - -Bob as the strongest swimmer of the three boys was eager to make the -crossing. But two obvious enough reasons were adduced to make him -abandon the idea. In the first place, the boys did not possess rope. -That Mr. Hampton had, and it would have to be carried to the island -by a member of his party. In the second place, even though the -current in the right hand channel was less swift than the other side -of the island, yet a swimmer setting out for shore from the tip of -the island would be hard put to it to escape being carried down -stream into the rapids. On the other hand, a swimmer taking to the -water from the river bank at a point considerably above the island, -could count upon making the crossing in safety. Moreover, he would -have the rope from shore and, if he became endangered, his comrades -could pull him to safety. - -So it was that one of the two Kikuyus who had crossed the river at -the old camp site the previous day again was selected. And as soon -as daylight came, he set out. - -The boys with Matse and their bearers watched from the island. They -had been up since before dawn. On the other shore they could see the -Kikuyus congregated in a chattering group, while Mr. Hampton -directed operations and Niellsen could be seen at his motion picture -camera, prepared to photograph any dramatic incidents as they -occurred. - -The Kikuyu, a rangy fellow more than six feet in height, swam -strongly until well into the current. Then he let himself drift in -order to estimate its strength. Satisfied that if he headed directly -for the island, he would be borne beyond it and into the rapids -below, he then could be seen to head straight across stream. - -Even then, however, the swift current carried him along at such a -rate as to make it unlikely he would reach the island. - -Bob shook his head, voicing the thought in all their minds. - -“He’ll have to swim up stream or he’ll never make it.” - -Evidently, the swimmer was of the same opinion. For the next moment -the watchers on both the river bank and the island could see him -alter his course and assume a direction calculated to carry him -across the river on a long upstream slant except for the effect upon -his progress of the current. - -The boys watched his head, black and round, cleaving the sunlit -water, and noted with commendation the steady rise and fall of his -arms in an overhead stroke that gave powerful impetus to his lithe -body. - -“I believe he’ll make it all right,” said Bob, after a moment. - -Closer and closer drew the swimmer. And now the boys saw a long thin -line of rope trailing through the water behind him. It was tied -about his waist and was being paid out by other Negroes who were -following down stream along the right bank. A narrow shelf of land, -free of underbrush, lay between the river and the bluffs behind, -affording them sufficient footing. - -The Kikuyus on the island shouted frequent encouragement to the -swimmer, who once or twice waved an arm in token of acknowledgment. -He betrayed no exhaustion, although the effort he was putting into -his task was great. Finally, he won through the strongest portion of -the current and found himself in more quiet water, after which it -was only a matter of moments until willing hands had him safe -ashore. - -Then began the work of pulling in the line about his waist, to the -other end of which Mr. Hampton had tied three ends of cable, -figuring that nothing less than three heavy ropes would provide a -ferry sufficiently stout to ensure safety in the transport of a raft -from the island. - -The question of whether the original raft could be towed around the -end of the island from its anchorage on the side opposite to that of -the ferry was quickly decided in the negative. Inspection of the -route convinced the boys that even if it could be poled and tugged -by ropes into position against the rush of the current, yet the -rocks strewing the river at the upstream tip of the island could not -be negotiated. - -It was decided, therefore, that a new raft would have to be built. -Mr. Hampton was apprised of this, and went into camp on the river -bank. There was nothing he could do to help. With them on the raft -the boys had axes for everybody, and there was plenty of timber -growing on the island to build any number of rafts. It was merely a -question of time until a raft could be built, and in the meantime -there was naught the main body of the expedition could do except -wait. - -Soon, then, axes were ringing, and there was a great ripping and -tearing of creepers and vines with which to bind the logs together. -Frank had suggested dismantling the original raft and carrying the -logs across the island to the other shore, but this plan had been -vetoed, as to drag the logs through five hundred feet of rank jungle -growth would involve more labor than to cut other logs on the -farther shore where the new raft was to be launched. - -It would be hard enough, when the time came, to transfer the boxes -and bales from the old raft to the new. - -At the end of several hours, the new raft was built. It had been -made considerably smaller than the original one, in fact, little -more than a third its size. Thus the danger of placing too great -strain on the ropes of the ferry was removed. And the boys found -that, even bearing a considerable cargo and two men, the raft rode -buoyantly, with the top well above water. - -“Pretty good job for amateurs, I’ll say,” remarked Bob, as he -contemplated the raft before stepping aboard. He and Matse had been -selected to make the first trip, and the equipment they were to -carry already had been stowed on the raft. - -The big fellow had reason to feel pride in their accomplishment. He -himself had worked like a Trojan, doing the work of two men, and -spurring on the bearers to greater exertions by his example. - -“All aboard, Matse,” he cried. And the young interpreter grinning -followed him. - -The three lengths of cable sent them by Mr. Hampton had been -fastened to a strong tree at the water’s edge. The other ends had -been made fast in similar fashion. So low had the cables been tied -that the ends were only a few feet above water, while the middle -portion sagged into the stream. From side to side of the raft, -front, rear and in the middle, had been tied stout lengths of rope, -passing over the cable. Tied to the forward end, moreover, was a -strong line lighter in weight than the cables, with which Mr. -Hampton’s party could pull the raft ahead. Other means of propulsion -were long stout poles. - -Wielding these, Bob and Matse poled out into the stream. They found -they touched bottom for a considerable distance. And all went well -until they neared the middle of the channel, when the water deepened -to the point where poling became an impossibility. Then laying the -poles aside, the two raftsmen seized the cable in their hands and -what with the tugs they gave it combined with the steady pull from -shore, they managed to negotiate the channel without too much -difficulty. Whereupon, once more finding themselves in shallower -water they again fell to poling and so at length reached the bank in -safety. - -While bearers were unloading the raft, Bob pointed out to Mr. -Hampton an additional safeguard. The rope with which those on shore -had pulled the raft ahead seemed to him too light in weight. No -heavier rope, however, was available to be attached in its place. -But another rope of the same weight was added. Then Jack was -signalled to pull the raft back to the island by means of another -light rope attached to the rear. - -Trip after trip until four had been made the rude ferry was pulled -back and forth across the channel without mishap. When all the goods -carried down stream on that wild ride had been recovered, the -afternoon was well advanced. And Mr. Hampton announced they would -camp where they were until the following day. - -“Good enough,” said Niellsen, “that will give me a chance to -photograph the rapids and the water falls.” - -“Oh, you found a fall?” said Frank. - -Niellsen laughed. “I got cut up pretty badly scrambling through the -rocks and briers to the top of that bluff,” he said, pointing to the -promontory a half mile distant, around which swept the river. “But I -was rewarded when I got there by sight of a water falls that must be -all of seven hundred feet. The river narrows to less than a hundred -yards in width, and a tremendous volume of water pours over the lip -of the falls. I had only a pocket camera with me. Now I want to go -back with a motion picture camera, and get some good film of it. You -lads probably want to go along and take a look at what you missed -seeing close at hand.” - -“Close at hand, is right,” commented Frank. “A little more and we -would have been part of it.” - - - - - CHAPTER XVI - - A CHANGE IN PLANS - - -The next day Mr. Hampton called the boys and Niellsen into -conference regarding their future course. They had put the country -of the Kikuyus quite definitely behind them in their passage of the -marshy region and now of this river, of which they did not know the -name, although Mr. Hampton believed it to be probably a branch of -the Terywell. - -“We are on the fringes of big game country by all accounts,” he -said, “both from what I picked up in Nairobi and from what Wimba -tells me. West of us lies Lake Victoria; east, Mount Kenya.” - -“That’s the high one, isn’t it, Dad?” asked Jack. - -Mr. Hampton nodded. “Said to be 17,010 feet,” he commented. “Next to -Mount Kilimanjaro, which is also in Kenya Colony, lying southeast of -Nairobi and more than 19,000 feet in height, it is the tallest peak -in Africa.” - -“I vote for striking toward Mount Kenya,” said Frank, emphatically. -“We’ll get into higher altitudes and escape from this awful heat.” - -“Huh,” grunted Bob. “It wasn’t so hot that night eight or ten days -ago when we couldn’t get enough blankets to keep warm.” - -He referred to one of the meteoric changes in temperature which -makes Africa land of extremes, when even the equatorial region a day -of blazing sunshine and suffocating oppressive heat is frequently -succeeded by terrific rains and a freezing night. - -Niellsen looked thoughtful. “It’s not such a bad idea to strike for -Mount Kenya,” he said, “if only there’s a chance of getting some -films of animal life. But what are game conditions like over there?” - -“Wimba says they’re pretty good,” said Mr. Hampton. “However, he -believes that in the Kavirondo country northeast of Lake Victoria, -they will be better. And if we strike in that direction, we can -replenish our supplies at Kisumu on the lake. It is on the railroad -from the coast, and lake steamers touch there, too.” - -“Lake steamers?” Bob cried in surprise. - -Mr. Hampton nodded. “The immediate region around Lake Victoria was -developing rapidly when the war halted its progress. Germans, -British, Belgians and Portuguese, all are in this country -hereabouts, you know. Their armed forces of blacks officered by -whites messed life up pretty badly. However, since the end of the -war I was given to understand in Nairobi development has been -picking up again at a great rate. So at Kisumu, which is the trade -center for a big region, although only a little town itself, we -undoubtedly will be able to replenish our supplies. And as we are -beginning to run rather low, I believe it will be wise to do so.” - -“Kisumu for me,” said Bob, “and the Kavirondo region. If big game is -to be found there, especially. I want to bag at least one lion on -this trip. And so far we haven’t encountered one.” - -“And I want an elephant,” said Jack. - -Niellsen laughed. “I want to shoot lions and elephants, too,” he -said. “But with the camera.” - -“Looks as if I were outvoted,” said Frank, mopping his sticky face, -for the heat of the day still persisted. - -Mr. Hampton regarded him sympathetically. “Don’t worry. Frank,” he -said. “We’ll get into mountainous country up there, and, in fact, -we’ll be out of these Kikuyu plains pretty quickly. That range of -hills ahead form the outposts of the mountains of which Kenya is the -tallest peak, unless I’m much mistaken. We’ll be into them by -tomorrow. And then, even though the weather will continue hot, yet -it won’t be the muggy heat of these lowlands.” - -The next morning, accordingly, camp was struck and the expedition -set out for Kisumu, which was reached after a week of uneventful -travel. From their first day after crossing the river, they entered -a populous region. Villages became numerous. - -Anxious to reach the Kavirondo country, after first stopping at -Kisumu for a renewal of supplies, Mr. Hampton did not loiter on the -way. And as Niellsen and the boys found little either of topography -or animal life to make interesting pictures, the party pushed on -steadily without any of the customary side expeditions for the -purpose of obtaining pictures of animal life. - -Kisumu proved to be a surprise, being far from the traditional -picture of African town, what with its business buildings of -European architecture and its comfortable bungalows where European -residents dwelt. One of the lake steamers was in the town and the -boys sought and obtained permission to board it for inspection. They -were surprised to find it a modern, though small, craft, with -comfortable cabins, well-appointed saloons, and electric lights. - -“Not much like the Africa we’ve been through,” said Mr. Hampton, -“and even less like the Africa into which we soon will plunge. But, -then, you fellows must remember that this is a point on the main -travel artery, as the railroad from the distant coast connects here -with the boats to carry travellers across the lake and to the -northern railroad line. Not far from here, I am told, we’ll find the -country wild enough, and the people far more primitive than the -Kikuyus of the plains.” - -In the several days spent at Kisumu, while Mr. Hampton was busy -restocking for their further journey, the boys knocked about the -little town and at the Club to which a friend of Mr. Hampton’s -living down country in Nairobi had given them cards for use in case -they came this way, they made the acquaintance of an Englishman who -told them a good deal about the great lake sparkling beyond the -town. He was in Kisumu to convalesce from an attack of jungle fever, -and quite willing to wile away the slow hours with conversation. - -Many stories he told them of the furious storms which, rising with -extraordinary rapidity, lash the surface of this second largest lake -in the world. For such is Victoria Nyanza, being roughly speaking -some 200 miles in length by as many in breadth. - -“I was out fishing with a friend one day in a native canoe,” he -said, “when the blue sky which had been without a cloud suddenly -changed to an ominous gray. In the twinkling of an eye, the wind -rose and a slashing rain began to fall. We made with all speed for a -neighboring creek to seek shelter. But just as we were about to land -we spotted a crocodile concealed among the reeds. I tell you, lads, -my heart went pit-a-pat as I thought of what might have occurred if, -in our haste, we had leaped ashore before spotting him.” - -“What happened?” asked the interested Bob. - -“Oh, these lake natives are so used to dealing with crocodiles that -they are undaunted. We went on a bit farther before landing, and -then one of our canoe men sneaked up behind the crocodile and -slashed off his tail with a knife. After the monster was thus -disabled, for his tail is his most effective weapon, you know, the -native finished him off.” - -“Single-handed and with only a knife?” breathed Frank, round-eyed. -“Whew.” - -Lake Victoria was unknown to the European world until the explorer -Speke discovered it in the middle of the last century. Even Stanley -on his memorable expedition into the heart of Equatorial Africa had -skirted it only a short time before without even suspecting its -existence. - -While at Kisumu the boys found such relief from the lowlands heat, -for Victoria lies 4,000 feet above sea level and the climate of -neighboring regions is delightful and salubrious, that they became -imbued with renewed energy. They were here, there and everywhere, -poking into everything of interest to be seen. Thus it was that they -heard of a fleet of native canoes which would set out the morning of -the second day and arose early, along with Niellsen, for the purpose -of obtaining a film of the event. - -As the day was clear, what promised to be really excellent film was -obtained. The canoes were of the simplest construction, being -nothing more nor less than hollowed out tree trunks, stoppered at -the ends with wooden plugs set in clay. - -“Whew,” said Frank, addressing Ransome, their English friend, who -had come down with them to behold the start of the fishing fleet, -“those things may be safe enough. But I, for one, wouldn’t care to -trust myself in any such craft, especially on this lake which you -say is so treacherous.” - -Ransome shrugged. “They are really good boats,” he said. “Even when -tossed by a rhinoceros, they seldom capsize.” - -At the end of the second day, Mr. Hampton announced that not only -had their supplies been restocked but also he had obtained the -services of new bearers acquainted with the Kavirondo country who -would accompany them henceforth. The Kikuyus were to be sent back to -Nairobi, where they had been recruited, by train, in accordance with -the contract agreement. He had been fortunate in replacing Wimba as -interpreter and “straw boss,” by a six-foot Kavirondo named Mabele. - -The next day, therefore, the expedition put Kisumu behind and struck -into the Kavirondo country, noticing almost at once a marked change -in the character of the country, grassy plateaus and plains being -replaced by lofty hills and dense forests, while the native life -appeared far more primitive than that of the Kikuyus. - -It was noted, too, that the natives were none too friendly. When -they entered strange villages, tall warriors would crowd around them -scowling. And their heavy hide shields and twelve-foot spears -created an uneasy impression in the mind of at least one member of -the expedition, namely Mr. Hampton. Then, too, it was no unusual -matter to look up suddenly while following a native trail through -dense forest and behold the eyes of a half-hidden watcher peering -from leafy covert, a matter which occurred not once but many times. - -“They told me at Kisumu that the Kavirondos were none too friendly, -and were resentful of the encroachments of the whites,” said Mr. -Hampton, in camp one night. “Yet I was assured we would be safe -enough. However, I can’t understand this continued unfriendliness. -We shall have to push ahead without organizing any side expeditions -that would split our forces, until we reach the territory of Chief -Ungaba which Mabele tells me is only two days’ march away. He is -friendly to the whites, and in his territory we can hunt big game -with both rifle and camera to our heart’s content.” - -Care was taken not to give offense to the natives, and Mabele was -cautioned to warn those of his bearers who were members of Lake -Victoria tribes and not Kavirondos to refrain from becoming -embroiled in disputes with the native populace. Guard also was -maintained at night to prevent trouble. For although Mr. Hampton was -of the opinion that the unfriendliness of the natives was not such -as would lead them to attack white men so close to the Lake Victoria -settlements, yet he suspected that if the natives considered them -off guard they would not hesitate to steal whatever they could lay -their hands on. - -However, they finally reached the village of Chief Ungaba without -unpleasant incident. And as they drew near late in the afternoon of -a clear day, the chief himself at the head of what looked like the -entire population came put to welcome them. - - - - - CHAPTER XVII - - OUT FOR A RHINO - - -Here the expedition settled down to the serious business of shooting -big game with a camera, while the days insensibly rolled into weeks. -For Chief Ungaba and his people were friendly and, as the park-like -country with its lofty hills, great stretches of thorn bush and -spreading forests comparatively free of underbrush, abounded in -game, Mr. Hampton decided to use the village of Ungaba as a base of -operations from which side expeditions could be sent out. - -Under the tutelage of Niellsen, the boys had developed into -excellent motion picture photographers. And whether they lay -concealed for days in brush shelters, awaiting the opportunity to -film animals coming to a water hole to drink, or whether they -crawled for hours along game trails, dragging both rifle and big -camera with them, they returned not only with their enthusiasm -undampened but also with many feet of film which they felt certain -would prove on development to be amply worth all the effort -expended. - -That these trips were not without incident goes without saying. Time -and again they had narrow escapes, as when Jack on one occasion -crawled around a rock with a view to film buffalo feeding in a -grassy depression at the base of the hillside, only to find a -particularly deadly snake, the mamba, coiled on the sunny side just -at the place where he would next have placed his hand. Drawing back -with lightning quickness, he drew his revolver and shot the snake. -The sound of the shot sent the buffalo tearing and lumbering away -and spoiled his chance of getting a picture of them, a chance which -he had spent a full hour in acquiring. But he saved his life. - -Many weary hours, too, were spent in stalking animals, so that the -obtaining of each separate bit of film was an adventure in itself. -The common jungle grass retarded progress and its pollen getting -into their eyes set up an irritation which half-blinded them. They -were never without at least one member of the party suffering from -swollen eyes. Anticipating this, however, they had come provided -with eye wash for the alleviation of distress. It was the dry -season, and they wore only the lightest of clothing, consisting of -sleeveless shirt and knee length pants, “like Boy Scouts,” Bob -remarked. Consequently, they suffered much from the scratches of -various other varieties of grass with barbs, of the tall plumed -reeds with stiff leaves which cut like a knife and, especially, from -the “cow itch.” This latter name they gave a plant having seed pods -covered with fine hairs which pierced even through clothing and set -up an excruciating itching. - -On the whole, however, the hardships were less than they had -expected to encounter, and a hot bath in a collapsible tub on the -return from a picture-taking expedition went far to make life -bearable. Moreover, they had the consolation of piling up thousands -of feet of film which they felt assured would be invaluable. - -“I can just see the kids sitting in the motion picture house when -some of these scenes flash on the screen,” said Bob, one night, -after returning from a particularly trying expedition upon which -eland, giraffes, buffalo, hyenas and adjutant birds had been filmed. -“Only we need some more thrilling stuff.” - -“I should think you’d have gotten enough thrills on that runaway -raft to last you the rest of your life,” said Niellsen, smoking his -pipe on the opposite side of the camp fire. “Just the same, what you -say about our films of animal life is true. I wonder,” he added, -turning toward Mr. Hampton seated on a camp chair at his shoulder, -“whether we couldn’t persuade Chief Ungaba to organize a rhinoceros -hunt. I have a hunch we’d get a thrill out of that.” - -“Good idea,” approved Jack. “Let’s try it.” After some further -discussion, it was agreed that the next morning all should wait on -Chief Ungaba and prefer their request. Accordingly, they turned in -and slept soundly and at an early hour arose and entered the village -which lay not far away across an open meadow. Whenever camp was -pitched at an African village, the party was careful to locate some -distance away, both because the odors of these villages frequently -become offensive and to avoid possible friction arising between the -native populace and the hearers from alien tribes. - -The village was up and astir, and as the boys passed along the main -street toward the central square where Chief Ungaba’s hut was -located they found their interest excited by sights which never -became stale. Cooking fires were going outside the mud-walled, -thatched-roofed huts, and over them the Kavirondo women with their -“tails” were busied preparing breakfast for their lords and masters -who still lolled on sleeping mats within or else yawned sleepily at -door openings, watching the whites. These so-called “tails” worn by -the women never failed to amuse, and many a hearty laugh had they -given the boys. Made of plaited grass and tied to a string about the -waist, they fall down behind, and denote the status of the wearer. -Little girls wear little ones, engaged girls slightly larger ones, -and married matrons the largest of all. As loin cloths comprise -practically the only clothing worn by men, women or children, the -tribesmen looked as if, said Bob, “they were all ready for a -plunge.” Some, however, considered themselves well dressed, indeed, -for their bodies were smeared with red and white clays, producing an -effect which they considered decorative in the extreme but which the -boys regarded as particularly ghastly. - -Chief Ungaba sitting at the door of his hut was not an especially -kinglike object as he knuckled his eyes sleepily. He failed to note -their approach at first because of the fact that he was leaning -sideways as if to hear without being seen while listening to sounds -of high shrill voices raised in altercation within the hut. - -“What’s going on, I wonder,” asked Bob of his companions. - -Mr. Hampton laughed heartily. “The chief’s wives are hard at it,” he -said. “They are having their regular morning squabble. Poor man, he -has six first wives, and they lead him a dog’s life. He is chief -everywhere except in his own house.” - -Scarcely had he finished speaking than a piercing shriek cut through -the clamor of angry voices, followed by another and another. Then a -sobbing young woman ran headlong from the hut, clutching her hair, -while behind her three older women crowded each other in the -doorway. They stared triumphantly until the younger woman -disappeared amidst the adjacent huts and then withdrew. - -“The old ones kicked the best looking one out,” said Niellsen, -grinning a little bit. “Well, age has to protect itself. Now that -they’ve banded together to get rid of her, however, they’ll probably -fall to fighting amongst themselves.” - -The noisy quarrelling subsided, however, as if by magic, and once -more peace reigned in Chief Ungaba’s household. The lord and master -who had cowered away from the door as if trying to squeeze into the -wall, when the fight was carried into the open, now, upon the -withdrawal of the women, stood up and stretched his arms wide in a -yawn. The boys couldn’t repress a laugh, but they smothered it with -their hands so as not to let the sound reach his ears. - -Then, as Mr. Hampton approached, the chief for the first time became -cognizant of their presence, and a smile of welcome broke over his -broad, full-lipped, humorous face. - -“A quarrelsome woman is worse than a hyena, and five are enough to -defend a town,” he said. “My white brother will understand.” - -He spoke in the Kavirondo tongue, but Mr. Hampton and the boys had -been studying the simple language with the aid of their interpreter -Mabele, and during their lengthy stay they had acquired a rough -working knowledge of it which made the chief’s words understandable. - -“Chief Ungaba speaks words of wisdom,” answered Mr. Hampton, -gravely, but with twinkling eye. - -And the chief, observing the twinkle, laughed outright. - -Thereupon, Mr. Hampton broached the subject of the proposed -rhinoceros hunt, to which the chief readily agreed. He was willing -enough to lend his warriors for the purpose of beating up the reeds -of a nearby marsh, as Mr. Hampton promised him in return the carcass -of the slain beast. The high-powered rifles of the Hampton party -would prove far more efficient weapons against the tough hide armor -of the monster than the bows or spears of the villagers. And the -obtaining of fresh meat was always a consideration. Indeed, there -would be a great feast in the village. - -Negotiations concluded, the whites returned to camp with the -assurance that on the edge of the reedy marsh some two miles west of -the village in the middle of the afternoon they would find Chief -Ungaba’s men awaiting them for the hunt. - - - - - CHAPTER XVIII - - ON THE RHINO’S PATH - - -That assurance was fulfilled, for when the Hampton party arrived on -the scene tall warriors armed with spears and with clappers for -producing a particularly atrocious racket already had spread in a -wide circle around the marsh. - -Mabele who had preceded them came running up with the intelligence -that a huge rhinoceros, the largest seen in that district for a long -time, had been observed entering the marsh the preceding night. -Although a plains animal, yet it resembles its river-loving brother, -the hippopotamus, in its regard for cool damp spots. And this marsh -was a noted haunt of the rhinos. - -Many acres in extent, the marsh stretched away ahead in an expanse -of tall reeds and low trees. And although the boys knew at least two -score beaters were converging toward the plain edging the marsh -where they had taken their station, yet they could not see them. Now -and then, however, the sound of a clapper could be heard. Nor was -there any sign of the rhino. - -Three motion picture cameras had been brought along, so as to -photograph every phase of the hunt. And Niellsen, Jack and Frank -were to operate them. Bob, the best shot of the three boys, and Mr. -Hampton constituted the armed hunters of the party. They were not to -kill the monster until good pictures had been obtained first of the -rhino emerging from the swamp and of the beaters converging upon his -lair. - -As the most expert of the operators, Niellsen had elected to go into -the marsh with his camera and follow up the beaters. And Mr. Hampton -accompanied him as his protector. This left the three boys alone in -the plain. - -It was a morning of blazing sunshine and, early though the hour, the -day already had become uncomfortably warm. Frank suffered -especially, as he lugged his big camera to a vantage point some -distance from Jack so that they would be able to take in the scene -from various angles. - -“If the rhino charges you, what will you do?” asked Bob, carrying -Frank’s film box. - -“I’m going to run,” said Frank. “What d’you think?” - -“Doesn’t a sense of duty to your employers fill your breast?” -demanded Bob, as if in surprise. “I should think you’d stick on the -burning deck and let the rhino charge right over you in order to get -a picture of him in action.” - -“You’ve got another think coming,” replied Frank, coming to a halt -and adjusting the tripod. “Guess this is far enough away from Jack.” - -“But just think,” persisted Bob, “of what a gorgeous picture it -would make. Imagine sitting in a theatre at home and suddenly seeing -a huge rhino come lumbering toward you, as if he were going to -charge right out of the screen and into the audience.” - -“Talk to Jack,” said Frank coolly. “I can’t hear you. Whoo, it’s -hot. Wish the battle would begin.” - -Close at hand in the marsh, as if his words had been a signal, a -tremendous uproar of cries broke out interspersed with the racheting -sound of the clappers in the hands of the native beaters. - -“Better get ready,” advised Bob. “That sounds pretty close.” - -Frank leaped to his feet, all eagerness, the lassitude of the moment -before forgotten, and took his place at the camera. - -“See anything yet?” he called. - -“No,” said Bob. “And I don’t hear any shots, either. So I suppose -Jack’s father isn’t potting away. But what an infernal din those -beaters are putting up.” - -The noise died down, became more remote, and Frank relaxed his tense -attitude at the camera, while Bob once more laid down his rifle. - -“Huh. Guess the rhino headed for another direction.” - -“I suppose so,” said Frank. “Certainly the beaters are withdrawing.” - -Once more they were alone on the sunny plain with its tall buffalo -grass, alone except for Jack whose head and chest only could be seen -above the tall grass some distance away. He waved a hand and they -replied similarly, but he was too far away to make himself heard -except by shouting and so did not call to them. - -Perhaps five minutes had elapsed during which no immediate sounds -except the drone of huge flies and the tiny hum of insects broke the -somnolent stillness. The boys spoke now and then in low voices, but -in the main were silent. Bob’s keen glance played continually along -the edge of the marsh, but Frank had taken seat on the film box and -was sunk in revery. - -Suddenly Bob’s hand gripped his shoulder, and Bob’s voice whispered -low: - -“Sh. Here he comes.” - -Frank sprang to his feet and gazed in the direction indicated by -Bob. - -A huge brute with dark, dun-colored hide had parted the reeds of the -marsh not fifty yards away. He stood sideways at the edge of the -plain, formidable horned head lifted as if listening to the distant -sounds of the beaters. - -“He eluded them in some way,” whispered Frank. “What a picture.” - -Swinging the lens of the camera about until he brought the rhino -into focus, he began to turn the crank. - -The rhino abandoned his listening attitude and, dropping his head, -began to move slowly forward on a line bringing him midway between -Jack and Frank. Although his legs were short and ponderous, so huge -was his body that it towered above the buffalo grass which parted -before him like water before a scow. - -Over him fluttered a perfect cloud of small birds, like a swarm of -bees hiving on a bough. They made continual darts at the huge back, -picking off ticks and performing his toilet for him. The boys had -heard this phenomenon described, but had never witnessed it, the -only rhinos they had seen heretofore being those captives in Zoos. - -Now and again as he moved slowly along, the huge beast would lift -his head. And at such times he gave the watching, spell-bound boys -the impression that he was sniffing the air as if in search of his -arch-enemy, man. - -Realizing that should the rhino become aware of Jack’s presence and -charge him, his comrade would be without protection as he had the -sole rifle of the outfit, Bob crouching low began making his way to -a point in the rear of the rhino where he could afford protection to -Jack as well as Frank. - -And well it was that he took this precaution. For a time the rhino -continued his slow advance on the line which would avoid both boys, -stopping occasionally to repeat his gesture of lifting his head as -if to sniff. Bob suddenly recalled that, although the day was calm, -still there was a bit of breeze blowing, and that it came from -Jack’s direction. Frank, therefore, was to leeward of the rhino and -fairly safe from detection, as the great beast is short-sighted. But -Jack was to windward and might be detected. - -Remembering what he had heard of rhinos to the effect that they are -short-tempered and fearless, Bob hurried the more and presently -found himself in the broad trail beaten down by the rhino and not -far behind him. Ahead, not twenty yards away, he could see the -grotesque, broad quarters of the beast. - -“The thinnest spot in the rhino’s armor is immediately behind the -foreleg, and that is his most vulnerable spot,” Mr. Hampton had said -on parting. - -Bob remembered. He remembered, too, that the high-powered rifle he -carried was guaranteed to shoot a steel-jacketted bullet that would -penetrate even rhino hide. And the range was close enough. He -breathed more freely, now that he had come to such close quarters. -His momentary panic at thought of Jack’s danger began to disappear. - -Anyhow, he said to himself, the rhino appeared likely to stalk clear -out of the picture, without ever spotting the presence of his -photographers to either side. - -But Bob was mistaken. Suddenly the monster swerved to the right -without warning and charged with amazing swiftness directly toward -Jack who was not more than thirty yards away. His great head jerked -at every lurch. - -Bob started running through the grass at a tangent which would place -him close to the beast before the latter could arrive at Jack’s -post. He cast a glance in Jack’s direction, expecting to see the -latter pick up his camera and decamp, but was amazed and alarmed to -see Jack busily grinding away. - -“Great guns,” he muttered, “that rhino must be charging directly -into the camera. Why doesn’t Jack run?” - -But Jack continued at his post, and the truth was, as Bob dashing -forward in alarm suspected, that in making the most of his wonderful -opportunity to obtain a film of the rhino charging head-on he had -forgotten for a moment the important consideration of looking out -for his own safety. - - - - - CHAPTER XIX - - SAVED FROM THE MONSTER - - -On came the rhinoceros, and Jack seeing him grow larger and larger -in the eye of the camera until his bulk seemed to fill the whole -world continued to crank the machine, exulting in the realization -that he was obtaining what undoubtedly would be the finest film of -the whole expedition to date, perhaps the finest and most thrilling -of all including whatever pictures lay in the future. - -He was oblivious, in his blazing excitement, of the fact that the -rhinoceros was charging directly at him. He could not hear Bob’s -frenzied cries. He was unaware of Frank running toward him from the -background. - -When finally, as the rhino came so close that looking into the -camera finder Jack could see little more than the huge formidable -head with its little eyes inflamed in anger, he realized with a -shock that in another minute it would be too late for him to escape. - -What was more, all the risk he had run would go for nought, because -the great beast would trample the tripod and camera and destroy the -film. - -Then Jack acted with a speed of which he had not considered himself -capable. But what one can do under stress of tremendous excitement -is considerable. - -Sweeping the legs of the tripod together, he slung the camera over a -shoulder and leaped away, not running in the path of the charging -rhino, but at a right angle from it. - -Seeing his prey escaping, but unable because of his great bulk to -halt his mad career in time, the rhino crashed forward. He passed -directly over the spot where Jack had been stationed not sixty -seconds after he had departed. One foot struck the film box and sent -it lurching forward, and another pile driver descended crushing it -into the ground. - -But that was the end of Mr. Rhino. For ere the great beast could -turn to pursue his quarry, Bob’s rifle rang out and, drilled through -the heart, the monster halted, swayed on his feet, then fell over on -his side with a crash that made the very ground tremble. - -Jack returning, white-faced now that he began to realize how close -had been his escape from a horrible death, could not speak as he -wrung big Bob’s hand. And the latter was still filled with nervous -excitement himself. - -They merely looked at each other, hands clasped, trying to grin, -with Bob clutching his rifle and Jack his camera, until a rather -hysterical cry of “Hold it,” from the rear caused them to swing -about. - -A score of feet away stood Frank, turning the crank of his camera. -He stopped and leaving the machine in position approached his -comrades. - -“Picture of the slain monster and of his near-victim and the -latter’s saviour exchanging pleasantries,” he said. - -Then his tone sobered and grabbing Jack by the shoulders, he shook -him fondly. - -“You good-for-nothing rascal,” he said. “I almost died of heart -failure when I saw you sticking to your post. From the rear it -looked as if the rhino were running right over you. Then I saw you -dash away to one side and, believe me, lad, that was the welcomest -sight I’ve ever laid eyes on.” - -Jack looked apologetic. “Sorry I caused you fellows any worry on my -account,” he said. “The next time I’ll be more careful of your -feelings.” - -“And, oh, yes,” added Frank, as they approached the fallen -rhinoceros and stood looking at his vast proportions, “I did what -looked like a sort of heartless thing. Seeing I couldn’t be of any -use, as I was without a rifle, I put down my camera, which I’d -grabbed when running toward you, and started cranking.” - -“But, say, that’s great,” cried Jack. “You got some of that charge -yourself then, too?” - -“I did that,” said Frank. “You obtained the picture of the rhino -charging head-on. But I got a film of his charge on you, with you -sticking to the camera until in another minute he’d have been upon -you. And I got Bob running up and firing at the crucial moment, the -rhino’s fall, and your handshake afterwards. Oh, I tell you, I got -me some real films.” - -Temporarily thrown off the trail of the rhino, Mr. Hampton and -Niellsen now put in an appearance followed by scores of Chief -Ungaba’s warriors. And an excited throng it was which gathered -around while the boys related their adventure for the benefit of the -two white men and Mabele in turn told the crowding blacks what had -occurred. - -“Well, I guess we’ve done all we can for today,” said Mr. Hampton -finally, after the story had been told and Jack had been both -scolded for his foolhardiness and congratulated on his lucky escape. -“Suppose we return to camp and leave the Kavirondos to skin the -rhino and bring in hide and meat.” - -The three boys readily acquiesced in this decision, as all were so -shaken by their experience—Frank and Bob, in fact, suffering more by -reason of their fondness for Jack than did the latter himself—that -they were glad to depart. - -But Niellsen decided to stay behind in order to obtain a film of the -skinning and cutting up process. So the four others departed for -camp where, after a bath and a change of clothing, they gathered in -front of the tent to talk over the day’s events and speculate upon -the character of the feast which Chief Ungaba would give that night -and to which they had been invited. In fact, they were to be the -guests of honor. - -Presently Jack arose and strolled away again to his tent, Bob -calling to him a lazy inquiry as to what he was doing. - -“Going to listen-in on the radio,” said Jack. He paused a moment -before going on. “There’s not much to listen to in this part of the -world,” he said. “But you know that night before last I heard Cape -Town. And then, too, there is always the possibility of getting the -wireless signals from some of these better class coast boats, even -though they are more than a thousand miles away.” - -“Yes, and the lake steamers, too,” supplemented Frank, rising. “I -heard one of them carrying on a lengthy conversation about freight -rates the other day with a trader at Entebbe. Seemed the trader chap -was a wireless nut and had gone to considerable expense to put in a -station.” - -“You’re right except for one thing,” said Mr. Hampton. “I heard of -that station when at Kisumu. Entebbe is on the northern side of Lake -Victoria. And when the trader put in his station, he didn’t find it -so very expensive, because the British government gave him a -subsidy. That might be a valuable outpost in case of trouble with -the natives, which some of the Germans who are still lurking in the -hinterland might stir up.” - -As Mr. Hampton ceased, the two boys who had waited for him to -finish, started once more for the tent. - -A long silence fell between the two left behind. Bob outstretched on -a poncho was too comfortable even to talk, and Mr. Hampton: was busy -posting his “log,” as he called the daily record of their travels -and adventures. - -Presently a sharp call in Jack’s voice caused his father to look up, -while big Bob who had been almost asleep rolled over and propped -himself on an elbow. Jack stood in the doorway of the tent, -beckoning. - -“Dad, Bob, come here. The radio.” - - - - - CHAPTER XX - - A CALL FOR HELP - - -Disappearing within the tent after his excited exclamations, Jack -left two bewildered individuals staring at each other beside the -camp fire. - -“What in the world can he mean?” wondered Bob, getting to his feet. - -“He has heard something over the radio,” surmised Mr. Hampton. “From -the way he dashed into the tent, in fact, I’d say he’s still -listening in. Come on, let’s investigate.” - -Hastening across the intervening space, they pushed aside the tent -flap, finding the interior lighted by lantern, and discovered Frank -seated at the radio with the headpiece clamped to his ears and Jack -bending above him. - -As they entered they heard Frank speaking into the transmitter say: - -“Here he is, Mr. Ransome. Just a minute.” Pulling the headpiece from -his ears, Frank proffered it to Mr. Hampton, while getting to his -feet. - -“What’s going on? Who have you?” questioned Mr. Hampton, still -bewildered. But at the same time he accepted the proffered -instrument, while Jack thrust him into the camp chair vacated by -Frank. - -“It’s the English trader we met at Kisumu,” responded Frank. “He’s -calling for you. Says he’s called every night for a week over the -station at Entebbe where he is now located. But he’ll explain. Talk -to him.” - -Pulling the transmitter toward him, Mr. Hampton obediently called -“Hello.” - -Then Bob, unable longer to control his impatience, seized Frank and -pulled him outside. - -“Now tell me what’s going on,” he commanded. “I don’t want to speak -in there for fear of disturbing Mr. Hampton. But what’s this all -about?” - -It had grown appreciably darker in the short interval since Bob had -entered the tent, for once the sun goes down in equatorial Africa -night comes on apace. But the light of the lantern fell through the -opening upon Frank who stood holding back the flap and listening to -what Mr. Hampton was saying inside, and this light showed his eyes -ablaze with excitement. - -He turned to Bob as if reluctant to discontinue trying to hear what -the older man seated at the radio transmitter was saying. Then he -grinned at big Bob’s exasperation. - -“Listen, old thing,” he said. “We’re in luck.” - -“Luck?” - -“Yes, of the biggest kind. The man on the other end of the line is -none other than the Englishman we met at Kisumu.” - -“Well, what of it? Why don’t you tell me what he said?” Big Bob’s -exasperation at this teasing grew apace. - -“He’s been calling every night for a week from Entebbe in the hope -that we would pick him up. But as you know we haven’t been using the -radio much, and so we haven’t happened to hear him.” - -“All right,” said Bob, his patience thoroughly exhausted. “I heard -that. Now will you talk turkey?” And reaching out a big arm, he -pulled Frank against his chest and began to knuckle his head with -his free hand in the familiar fashion known as administering the -“Dutch rub.” - -“Ouch. Leggo, you big bully,” gasped Frank. “Will you talk -straight?” - -“Uh-huh.” - -Bob released him. “Now speak up,” he said belligerently, “or who -knows what’ll happen to you?” - -“He wants us to go with him to the Mountains of the Moon?” - -“Are you trying to—” - -Frank backed off, laughing, hands held up defensively in front of -him. - -“No, I’m not trying to kid anybody,” he said. “Well, what’s this -‘Mountains of the Moon’ stuff, then?” - -“Not the Moon in the sky, Bob,” said Frank. “But a mountainous -district in the Belgian Conga constituting the very heart of -Africa.” - -“Oh.” Bob was mollified, but still puzzled. “What for?” - -“There are active volcanoes over there, and Mr. Ransome says they -are reported by native rumors reaching Entebbe to be in eruption. -He’s going in and says he thought we might want to go along.” - -Bob felt his interest quickened. Volcanoes in active eruption. That -would be something like, a sight worth travelling hundreds of miles -to see. “Fine,” he cried enthusiastically. “What wonderful picture -stuff.” - -Frank nodded. “That’s what I thought of the first thing, too.” - -“But what is Mr. Ransome going in for?” asked Bob. - -“Oh, I suppose these fellows who knock about the wilds like to take -in the sights as well as we who don’t live here all the time.” - -“Maybe so,” agreed Bob. Then, as a new thought occurred to him, he -asked: “How soon could we get to Entebbe? And how much farther does -this volcanic region lie?” - -Frank confessed ignorance regarding the answers to both questions. - -“Come on, let’s go back inside,” he said, “now that your curiosity -is satisfied. You know as much about it now as I do. Let’s see what -Mr. Hampton has to say.” - -The latter concluded his conversation with “That’s agreed then and -we’ll start tomorrow,” as the boys re-entered the tent, and from -Jack who had remained at his father’s shoulder burst a loud -“Hurray.” - -“Are we going?” cried Frank eagerly. - -Mr. Hampton nodded, and Jack shouted, “First thing in the morning.” - -“Fine,” cried Bob. “I was about fed up with this district, anyway. -Not enough excitement.” Mr. Hampton looked grave. - -“You’ll get enough of that where we’re going,” he said. - -“Anything beside volcanoes?” queried Bob, struck by something in the -older man’s tone. - -“Ransome said there was some unrest amongst the natives,” Mr. -Hampton replied, after a pause. “He seems to believe some of the -German officials driven out of East Africa are at the bottom of it, -although he said there was no evidence of any such thing. All the -native reports, he said, laid the trouble-making at the door of a -new medicine man who has appeared in the devastated areas and is -known as ‘The Prophet.’ I couldn’t, of course, gain a very -comprehensive survey of the situation during our rather brief -conversation. But I did find out that this medicine man has gathered -considerable of a following about him.” - -“Won’t it be dangerous?” asked a voice from the doorway, and they -turned to find Niellsen standing there. So engrossed had all inside -the tent been that they had failed to note his approach. - -He put down his motion picture camera and pulling a camp chair -toward him sank into it with a sigh of weariness. - -“I gathered enough to understand a trip to some place which might -become hot for us is under discussion,” he said. “What about it?” - -Mr. Hampton explained, adding: “Like you, I’m afraid it may be too -dangerous to undertake. At least, that is,” he added hastily to -forestall the remonstrances which all three boys looked prepared to -make, “we can go part of the way. Certainly, into the volcanic -region. But whether we push on amongst the disturbed tribes where -this medicine man, The Prophet, is supposed to be operating will -have to depend on circumstances.” - -The faces of the three boys grew bright again. “Oh, of course,” -agreed Jack, quickly. - -“But what I can’t understand,” added Bob, harking back to the -question he had earlier propounded to Frank, “is why this chap -Ransome is going in. Does he have plenty of money and time to go -running around like this? And why did he call us and ask us to go -along? Why has he been waiting at Entebbe for a week, trying to get -us, instead of setting out?” - -Mr. Hampton knew more than he was prepared to state. Had the boys -but known, which they did not, they would have suspected as much -from the fact that at Kisumu he had been in closest conversation for -more than an hour with Ransome, the ostensible invalid trader, in a -locked room at the Club. But of that conference they were unaware. -This much, however, he did state: - -“I believe him to be a secret agent of the British government, -fellows. And, although the Mountains of the Moon lie in Belgian -territory, yet Great Britain is vitally interested in anything which -may tend to upset conditions amongst the natives. As to his reasons -for wishing us to accompany him, it is possible that Mr. Ransome -wants us to act as a cloak for him.” - -“I see,” said Frank. “You mean that if we go in to take motion -picture records of events, he can go along as a member of the -expedition without arousing suspicion as to his real status?” - -“Exactly,” said Mr. Hampton, nodding his head in approval. - -“Time to go to the celebration of Chief Ungaba,” spoke a voice at -the tent flap as Mr. Hampton concluded. - -All turned about hastily. As in the case of Niellsen’s approach, -they had been unaware of anyone present. - -It was Mabele, the interpreter who had been employed at Kisumu. He -stood in a respectful attitude, holding up the tent flap, but not -venturing to enter the tent. - -“All right, Mabele,” said Mr. Hampton, shortly. “We’ll come at -once.” - -Silently, the black dropped the flap and withdrew. After a moment, -Mr. Hampton arose and crossing the tent lifted the flap and stared -into the moonlit darkness. Then he let it fall and turned around. - -“He’s gone,” he said. “Now I wonder how much he heard.” - -“Oh, I guess he just came at that minute,” said Niellsen, easily. -“Anyway, what does it matter?” Mr. Hampton shook his head. “I don’t -know as it matters at all,” he replied, thoughtfully. “But that -fellow is a man of superior parts. He’s smart. I wonder—” - -Then he shook himself and smiled. - -“No matter,” he said. “Niellsen, there’s a bit of food in the ice -box which we saved for you. Eat it, and then let’s get under way for -the village. We’ll have to stay a little while, in order not to hurt -the chief’s feelings. But we’ll leave before the party becomes too -boisterous, so that we can make an early start tomorrow. We have a -good five days of travel ahead of us before we can reach Entebbe.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXI - - THE RADIO STOLEN - - -Chief Ungaba’s party promised to be like several other similar -functions to which the boys and Mr. Hampton had been bidden as -guests by other friendly chiefs. For when they arrived, they found -the select two dozen guests of the chief already seated in a circle -around a huge iron cauldron filled with foaming, milky, African -beer, while farther off in the village square blazed a number of -fires around which the village proletariat were gathered to eat the -meat of the rhino and drink their home brewed liquor. - -Places were made for Mr. Hampton and the boys in the circle about -Chief Ungaba’s select cauldron. And each was provided with a pliant -length of hollow cane. Every guest had such a “straw,” and these -they dipped into the cauldron at frequent intervals, sucking through -them great mouthsful of beer. - -Let it be said at once, so that there may be no misconception, that -Mr. Hampton, Niellsen and the boys did not indulge. Too well they -knew that outright refusal would wound the feelings of the chief -deeply, and would bring down upon their heads such a weight of -displeasure that their stay in the region undoubtedly would be only -shortlived. Therefore, they accepted the straws and even rested them -in the cauldron, but without drinking. - -This deception, however, was not discovered. For already the party -had been in progress more than an hour, and the guests were becoming -uproarious and were little likely to pay much attention to the white -visitors. - -At frequent intervals one or other of the guests would leap to his -feet and begin to dance around the circle, lifting his knees high -and prancing. More and more often the performer of the moment would -not confine himself to dancing, but would also burst into song. - -A wild scene it made, as the light of the cooking fires in the -square played ruddily on the mud walls of the huts nearby and the -thatched roofs circular and running up to a peak from which -projected the long center pole of the dwelling. And for a time the -boys found this picture of primitive men indulging in a celebration -rather fascinating. - -But before long the dancers and singers became so wild in their -bearing that it became evident they would soon descend into a -bestial orgy, and the boys found it difficult to keep their disgust -from showing on their faces. Presently Mr. Hampton whispered to -Jack, who sat nearest him, and who in turn passed the word to the -others, that he considered it time to withdraw. Which they did -without further ado, making their way out of the circle without -attracting the attention of the Kavirondos. - -As they passed Chief Ungaba, however, Mr. Hampton paused to converse -with him, and the chief got unsteadily to his feet. When informed -that the whites planned to leave at an early hour the next morning, -he displayed sincere regret. And after finding his pleas that they -remain with him a while longer prove of no avail, he promised to be -on hand to see them depart. - -As they returned to their tent, Mr. Hampton commented sorrowfully -upon the failure of civilization to penetrate the wilds and break -down bestial customs by providing the natives with better things. - -“Some day, of course, it will come,” he said, as they reached the -boys’ tent, “but as yet civilization has not gone very far into the -African wilds.” - -Saying goodnight, he and Niellsen passed on toward their own tent, -a-gleam in the moonlight a short distance beyond, while the boys -lifted the flap and went in, Jack who led first shooting the rays of -his pocket flashlight inside—a precaution which they never failed to -observe when entering a dark tent in order to discover whether -snakes had taken possession in their absence. - -No snakes were to be seen. But as the rays of the flashlight passed -over the various objects of the interior, Jack uttered a cry of -dismay. - -“What’s the matter?” demanded Frank, at his shoulder. - -Disappearing into the tent without replying, Jack found and lighted -a lantern. Then he turned to his two comrades who had pressed after -him, and swinging the lantern so that its rays fell into the corner -where their little radio station had been set up, he pointed. - -“Gone,” he said. - -“Gone,” echoed Bob and Frank, as with one voice, in a tone of -stupefaction. - -It was true. Where their radio set had stood was now nothing but -bare space. - -For a moment or two, all three boys were too bewildered to speak. -All they could do was to stare. - -Then Bob became energized, and sprang for the tent flap. - -“Where are you going?” demanded Frank. - -“To tell Mr. Hampton,” Bob replied. - -“Let’s see what else is missing first. Evidently there’s been a -thief here.” - -Bob turned back and helped in the rapid inspection of the tent. None -of their possessions was missing except the radio. - -“Funny a Negro should take that,” mused Jack, as they looked at each -other in growing puzzlement. “Most of them who have seen us use it -look on it as a white man’s magic and wouldn’t touch it with a -ten-foot pole.” - -“I’ll say it’s funny,” said Bob darkly. “Do you know what I think?” - -“No. What?” - -Bob looked around and lowering his voice drew his two comrades -toward him while he whispered: “Mabele.” - -Jack looked at him in stupefaction. But Frank’s alert eyes displayed -complete understanding, and he nodded emphatically. - -“That’s it. Remember what your father said, Jack, when he discovered -Mabele at least had been in a position to overhear us discussing Mr. -Ransome and the trouble amongst the natives in that Mountains of the -Moon region, whether he actually had heard anything or not?” - -“That’s right,” said Jack. And now his glance grew worried. “Let’s -tell father at once.” - -“You tell him,” said Bob. “I’ll go over to the bearers’ camp and see -whether Mabele is around.” - -“You aren’t afraid?” - -“Huh.” Bob tapped his ever-ready automatic. “Besides, we mustn’t -lose any time on this. My opinion is that the beggar’s decamped. If -he has, we’ll want to pick up his trail as soon as possible.” - -“But what in the world would he steal the radio for?” asked Frank. - -“I don’t know,” said Bob. “But we can puzzle over that later. The -first thing is to find out if our suspicions that it was he are -correct.” - -“You’re right, Bob,” said Frank. “And I’ll go with you, for on a job -of this kind two are better than one. Jack in the meantime can carry -word to his father and Niellsen.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXII - - MABELE DISAPPEARS - - -While Jack hastened away toward the tent shared by the two others, -Bob and Frank made their way toward where a blazing camp fire marked -the encampment of the seventy-five bearers. - -Few of the latter could be seen, not more than a dozen. Could the -others have decamped? Had they, perhaps, departed with Mabele? The -boys hurried forward, alarm knocking within. But when one of the -dozen blacks outstretched near the fire got to his feet on being -addressed in the bush English of which all had a smattering, he -informed Bob that his comrades had gone to the village to -participate in the celebration. - -As that was to be expected, Bob’s anxieties in a measure subsided. -But when he asked whether Mabele had accompanied the party the man -shook his head in denial. - -“Mabele him not go ’long,” he said. “No see Mabele long time.” - -Quick inspection of the recumbent figures showed Mabele not of the -number, and convinced nothing as to his whereabouts was to be -learned of their informant the boys turned away. As they passed near -the boxes and bales of supplies and of equipment of one sort or -another, over which tarpaulins were lashed to protect them from -storms, Frank was seized with an idea. - -Halting, he laid a hand on Bob’s arm. - -“Have we ever used the spare radio transmitting apparatus on this -trip out from Kisumu?” he demanded. - -Bob scratched his head. - -“I don’t know. Seems to me the last time we had occasion to use it -was when our runaway raft grounded on that island in the river. And -that was before we reached Kisumu.” - -“That’s my recollection, too,” said Frank, in a tone of -satisfaction. “Come on, let’s find Mr. Hampton and the others.” - -He started forward again, and as Bob fell into pace beside him, -making for their tent before which they could observe a bobbing -lantern in the grip of an unseen hand, Bob demanded: - -“What made you ask that about the spare radio?” - -“Oh, I just thought that if we hadn’t ever unpacked it, Mabele -wouldn’t know it was there.” - -“Right,” said Bob, comprehension dawning. “In that case, we won’t be -hamstrung.” - -They were close enough now to see the lantern was borne by Jack and -that Mr. Hampton and Niellsen accompanied him. - -“Did you find him?” asked Jack as they approached. - -“No,” answered Frank, “nor did we find many of the bearers. Most of -them have gone to the village to take part in the celebration.” - -Mr. Hampton groaned. “I had expressly forbidden Mabele to let the -men depart,” he said. “The rascal violated my orders in order to -have a clear field for his operations.” - -Passing inside the tent, Mr. Hampton and Niellsen took their turn at -staring at the spot where the radio apparatus had stood, as if by -the mere fact of their glances they could conjure it back into -place. - -“Then you, too, believe it was Mabele, Mr. Hampton?” asked Bob. - -The older man nodded. - -“I hardly knew what I suspected when he appeared at the tent today -and it seemed likely he had overheard what was being said. But this -has clarified my suspicions. He’s a shrewd one, a man as I said of -superior parts. I am of the opinion now that he’s in the pay of the -trouble-makers in this part of the world, be they German or what. -Doubtless he thought that by taking the radio apparatus he could cut -us oft from communication with Ransome.” - -“And at the same time, perhaps, communicate with his confederates,” -suggested Frank. - -“It’s a serious loss, all right enough,” said Mr. Hampton. “And, -furthermore, by allowing the bearers to attend the village -celebration he increases his opportunity for escape. The villagers -will be pretty loggy in the morning, and in no condition to help us -pick up Mabele’s trail. And now the bearers will be the same. He -will be able to get a good start.” - -Sinking into a camp chair, he stared contemplatively at the ground, -and the others respected his silence. - -“Moreover,” he resumed, “we have no means now of notifying Ransome -that Mabele stands betrayed in his true light. The rascal can get to -Entebbe ahead of us in the assurance that we have no way of -informing on him. And he may be able to cause no end of trouble.” - -Frank stepped forward eagerly. - -“But, Mr. Hampton, we have the spare radio packed away. We haven’t -used it for so long a time that it’s no wonder you have forgotten -about it. But that’s probably our salvation. For we haven’t used it -at any time during Mabele’s connection with our party, and so it’s -unlikely that he knew we had it.” - -“Good for you, Frank,” said Mr. Hampton, jumping up, the lines of -worry disappearing as if by magic. “Let’s have a look. Bring that -lantern. Jack, and we’ll investigate.” - -Forebearing to summon any of the bearers to aid them, the boys -themselves overhauled the heap of supply cases and from the midst -pulled the familiar case enclosing the spare transmitting set. Many -were their expressions of satisfaction. - -Carrying it back to the tent, they opened it up. All the parts were -complete. And in another and smaller case was packed the aerial. -Assembling and setting up would be a short enough matter, but Mr. -Hampton suggested that they wait until the morning. For one thing, -he felt certain they would be unable to receive any response from -Entebbe at this hour. - -“And, besides,” he pointed out, “there is little likelihood now that -we shall be able to start tomorrow. None of the bearers who went to -the village has returned as yet, and they will be feeling so badly -in the morning, after heavy potations of that native beer, that it -would be impossible to get any work out of them. Perhaps, by noon, -we can make a start. But even that is problematical. At any rate, -you fellows will have plenty of time in which to set up your radio -and open communication with Entebbe.” - -Upon this understanding, Mr. Hampton and Niellsen were once more -about to retire for the night to their own tent, when Jack becoming -seized with a new idea again halted them. - -He wanted to know whether his father did not consider it would be -wise to place a guard over their supplies. So friendly was Chief -Ungaba that they had felt an unwonted sense of security from thefts -during the weeks spent under his protection. For dire, indeed, had -been the punishment he had desired to visit upon the one and only -thief caught during their stay. In fact, he had wanted to put the -poor fellow to death, and he would have done it, too, had it not -been for Mr. Hampton’s representations. - -“You see tonight, Dad,” explained Jack, “all the villagers will be -stupid with liquor, and the bearers, too. It just occurred to me -that, perhaps, Mabele has a number of malcontents amongst the -bearers who will follow him. If that’s the case, they can make a -rich haul and escape easily enough, if they wait until we retire and -then raid the supplies while the rest of the camp is incapacitated -by too much party.” - -“You are right, Jack,” answered his father, “and I should have -thought of that myself. However, it’s not too late. Let’s see. There -are five of us. If we all go over to the supplies and sleep tonight -around a campfire, taking turn and turn about at standing watch, -that would be the best way except for one thing. It would leave our -tents unguarded again. No, that won’t do. What can anybody suggest?” - -“Oh, I guess one man would be enough to stand guard,” said Bob. -“They’d hardly try any tricks, if they found we were on our toes -about the matter.” - -“A good thing we took our rifles with us,” said Frank. “If they had -been stolen, then we would have been out of luck. Why, they could -just pot us one after the other.” - -“On second thought,” said Mr. Hampton, “I don’t believe it will be -necessary to guard the supplies ourselves. If Mabele had any of the -men with him, they’d have stolen our things during our absence, just -as he took the radio. The fact that nothing but the radio was stolen -indicates to me that he was operating alone. No, we’ll chance his -stealing from us. He couldn’t get much, anyway. But I will put -several of those older men who stayed in camp and refused to disobey -orders on guard. They’re steady fellows, and will afford sufficient -protection. Isn’t there one of them. Bob, who you told me -understands a revolver?” - -“Yes, that fellow Samba. He used to be a British colonial soldier.” - -“The one we were talking to tonight?” asked Frank. - -“The same,” said Bob. “By the way, Mr. Hampton, he’d be a good man -to make ‘straw boss’ now that Mabele has left.” - -“Right you are,” said Mr. Hampton. “Suppose you step over and call -him.” - -Bob readily complied, Frank again accompanying him. They found Samba -and his mates sunk in slumber. Nor had the bearers who had gone to -the village yet returned. Samba was awakened, and followed them back -to the tent. - -Mr. Hampton told him that Mabele was a thief and had run away after -first disobeying orders by letting all the bearers who wanted to do -so go to the village celebration. Then he promised to elevate Samba -to Mabele’s post. After that he armed him with a revolver, laying -strict injunctions on him that he was not to use it except in case -of attack, and sent him to guard the supplies the balance of the -night. - -The stalwart black’s eyes gleamed as, after first handling the -weapon in a manner which showed he was accustomed to it, he thrust -it into his waist band holding up a long pair of cotton trousers. - -“Me un’erstan’, sar,” he said. And giving a smart military salute, -he clicked his bare heels, or rather brought them together with a -thud. Then he spun about and went out. - -“A good man,” said Mr. Hampton. “How’d you learn about him, Bob?” - -The big fellow grinned. - -“Oh, you know how,” he said. “I can’t explain it. But I expect I -have a faculty for making friends.” - -Such a faculty, indeed, Bob had. And it is an invaluable one. He was -sometimes described by Frank fondly as “the original democrat.” - -“That boy,” Frank would say on such occasions, “makes friends with -every Tom, Dick and Harry he meets. He never draws any social or -color lines. Just interested in people from the human side, I -suppose.” - -Mr. Hampton smiled and shook his head slightly. Then yawning -mightily, he arose. - -“Well, Niellsen, we may as well retire. Tomorrow will be a big day.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXIII - - ON TO ENTEBBE - - -Camp presented a scene of strange activity the next day when Mr. -Hampton forced his sodden bearers to the task of preparing for -departure. During their lengthy stay many articles of equipment had -been unpacked, and there was much to do beside striking the tents -and packing up the articles they contained. - -The task was made easier for Mr. Hampton, however, by reason of the -efforts of Samba, who took his new honors as “straw boss” seriously, -and who moreover was ably supported in spurring on the laggards by -the dozen steadier men who had refused to leave camp the night -before and go to Chief Ungaba’s beer party. - -Nothing untoward had occurred during the night as in little groups -supporting each other the guilty bearers had stolen back from the -village where revelry continued until dawn. - -“Mabele him no got any fella-boys with him,” Samba had reported in -the morning. “All fella-boys him come back.” - -That had been one comfort to Mr. Hampton in the situation, as -without all his bearers he would have been forced to abandon much of -his impedimenta. And as the load had not decreased through the using -up of supplies, but had been maintained at a steady level by reason -of the addition of animal skins, every bearer was needed. - -While all this was going on, Bob, Frank and Niellsen doing -everything possible to be of aid, Jack devoted himself to the task -of opening communication with Entebbe. The previous night in his -conversations with Mr. Hampton, Ransome speaking from Entebbe had -been extremely careful to speak only in the most guarded terms -regarding the trouble amongst the natives west of Lake Victoria. -Much that he had told the boys afterwards, concerning Ransome’s -probable connection with the British secret service, constituted Mr. -Hampton’s deductions rather than anything which had been said openly -over the radio. From this, the Hampton party drew the conclusion -that Ransome suspected there might be one or more secret radio -stations maintained in the region about them, and was taking no -chances on being overheard. Therefore, when finally he did raise -Entebbe, and got Mr. Ransome summoned to the phone, Jack exercised -extreme care not to let slip anything which might be seized upon to -advantage by hostile ears, yet at the same time to make his meaning -perfectly clear. - -“I understand,” Ransome responded finally. “I shall keep an eye out -for your messenger Mabele.” - -And from the tone employed, Jack felt assured that Ransome would, -indeed, keep an eye out for Mabele. In fact, if he did not go -further and send out scouts to lay Mabele by the heels before he -could reach the conspirators employing him, Jack thought he would be -very much mistaken. - -In this, however, he was mistaken, as later events proved. For when -after an uneventful journey of five days, during which no trace of -Mabele had been discovered, the Hampton party did reach Entebbe, on -the northern shore of Lake Victoria, they found that Ransome had not -caused Mabele’s arrest, although having obtained traces of him. On -the contrary, he had permitted him to continue at large. - -“And the reason was,” he explained in a conversation with Mr. -Hampton, to which the boys and Niellsen were admitted, “that I -thought it better to let him keep his freedom, in order that he -might lead us, perhaps, to his employers. I have him under constant -surveillance. And the last word I had from a spy put on his tracks -and sent back to me by native runner was that he was working his way -around the shores of the lake.” - -He paused, smiling with satisfaction. “Perhaps,” he resumed, “we’ll -be able to cut him off at Masaka, on the western shore of the lake, -to which we’ll cross from here, in order to save time in striking -for the Mountains of the Moon. He travelled faster than you and -slipped into Entebbe two days ago. My men apprised me of his coming, -and when he departed secretly, I sent a couple of keen fellows, -smart blacks and born trackers with a considerable knowledge of the -dialects of tribes about the northern and western shores of the -lake, in pursuit.” - -From this it can be gathered that Ransome no longer kept up in the -presence of the boys his pretense of being a trader. And such, -indeed, was the case. Informed bluntly by Mr. Hampton that the boys -were too smart to be kept in darkness but would have pierced his -secret of their own intuitions, and that consequently he had -considered it wise to put them in possession of some of the facts, -Ransome had called the boys and Niellsen to him and had laid all his -cards on the table, so to speak. - -“I am an Englishman,” he had concluded, “working in the interests of -my government. I may be mistaken, therefore, in believing that those -interests are best for the progress of civilization in these wilds. -That is for others to decide. But, at least, I want you boys to -believe that we honestly are endeavoring to do our best for the -natives. And I can’t say as much for the former officials of German -East Africa whom I suspect of being behind this trouble in the -Congo. If the trouble becomes serious, we shall have to go to the -aid of Belgium, and that is the reason I want to go in and see how -matters stand for myself. You people will be able to protect me from -detection, unless Mabele eludes my trackers and escapes us to carry -word to the conspirators that I am not what I seem. In that case, of -course, the danger to you all will become real. Otherwise, you will -be merely explorers, picturing wild game and scenery in the real -heart of Africa.” - -“I want to be of aid,” Mr. Hampton had said, “yet I do not want to -bring the boys into danger, nor imperil the trophies of our -expedition. All that we have taken to date, of course, both film -records of primitive and wild game life and trophies of the hunt, -are either already at Nairobi or will be despatched thither from -here. So they will be safe enough. But further records might be -destroyed should we be attacked in the Mountains of the Moon. As I -say, I do not want to imperil either the results of the expedition -or the lives of the boys. If at Masaka we find that Mabele has -escaped us and has the chance to carry word to his conspirators of -your real identity, Ransome, I shall probably deem it wise to turn -back.” - -“If you do so, under those circumstances, I shan’t blame you,” -Ransome had said. “But,” he had added confidently, “I am quite -certain Mabele cannot escape us. I have him, so to speak, in my -clutch all the time, and am permitting him at large merely that he -may lead us to his employers, the men higher up.” - -“It is, of course, quite possible,” Mr. Hampton had added, after a -thoughtful pause, “that Mabele did not gain sufficient knowledge of -your identity from my remarks to the boys which I feel assured he -overheard, that night in the tent, to make him dangerous to you and -us.” - -“Possible, but not probable,” Mr. Ransome had said. “Otherwise, why -did he steal your radio immediately afterwards, except to thwart -further communication between us? And why is he striking straight -for the disturbed area?” - - - - - CHAPTER XXIV - - PLANS TO CAPTURE THE PROPHET - - -At Masaka, a small trading center on the western shore of Lake -Victoria, they met with disappointment. For the two native trackers -put on the trail of Mabele by Mr. Ransome appeared the first night -after their arrival with the news that their quarry had managed to -elude them. - -They had seen him enter a lake village one night, where he found -shelter in a native hut. And believing him safe for the night, they -themselves had done likewise, for they had spent several strenuous -days sticking to his trail through broken country of hill and marsh -and were exhausted. - -Arising early the next day, however, they had discovered on -investigation that Mabele had slipped away. And cautious inquiry -developed that a native canoe also was missing. Putting two and two -together, they had come to the conclusion that Mabele had taken to -the lake. Although they believed they had kept out of his sight all -the way and had given him no suspicion of their presence, yet it was -likely he suspected he was being trailed and had taken to the lake -to shake off pursuit. - -Their one consolation was that an hour or two after their discovery -of Mabele’s flight one of the sudden storms for which Lake Victoria -is noted had arisen, accompanied by rolling thunder, lightning and a -swishing downpour of rain. Later in the day, after the storm had -departed and the waters of the lake had subsided, a native fisherman -had brought in the stolen canoe which had been found overturned and -floating a mile out from shore. It was their belief, therefore, that -Mabele had been drowned. And as on their journey from that point to -Masaka they had inquired of every native encountered if a man had -been picked up in the lake or had been observed coming to shore, -without result, they were confirmed in this belief. - -“I don’t know about that,” said Mr. Hampton thoughtfully, in talking -the matter over in a general conference later. “He may have managed -to reach shore without being observed. And in that case he is on his -way to his confederates with word of our coming to the disturbed -regions with you, Ransome, as a spy and not merely a member of our -exploring and picture-taking party. However, the boys feel so -strongly that they want to proceed that I shall chance it. We must -all be very much on our guard, however.” - -“Bully for you, Dad,” said Jack, enthusiastically. “We can take care -of ourselves, never fear. We’ve been in tight fixes before, you -know.” - -“Yes, I know,” sighed Mr. Hampton, half-humorously, as he regarded -his strapping son and the two other boys with a twinkle blending -affection and respect. “But every time you get there you add to my -bowed shoulders and gray hairs.” - -As Mr. Hampton was as straight and lithe as any of the boys, while -his thick hair showed little signs of the advance of age, everybody -laughed. A laugh in which he, too, joined. - -“But what I’d like to know,” said Bob, after the laughter had -subsided, “is what Mabele did with our radio set. He couldn’t have -carried it far alone, and so far as we have been able to discover he -had nobody with him.” - -“It’s a puzzle,” said Frank. “But he must have hidden it, intending -to return for it later, somewhere near Chief Ungaba’s village. At -any rate, the report of his trackers that he was never observed to -have that cumbersome piece of baggage with him is satisfactory in -one respect. For it means that he was unable in all likelihood to -communicate by radio with the enemy, supposing them to have a secret -radio station as Mr. Ransome suspects.” - -Several days the party spent at Masaka, completing the purchase of -supplies to add to their baggage which had been shipped from -Entebbe, and in recruiting a new corps of bearers, one hundred in -number. A guard of a dozen trusty fellows in the pay of Mr. Ransome, -every one of whom knew how to handle a rifle or revolver, appeared -mysteriously from somewhere. And into this number Samba was -recruited to his great delight. - -“A mighty satisfactory man to have around,” was Mr. Hampton’s -dictum, and accordingly Mr. Ransome took him into the force. - -“We’ll need the guards, perhaps,” he said. “And I have obtained a -permit from the Belgian authorities for them to carry arms. Our own -permits as hunters also have been obtained, so now everything is -settled.” - -Then the party set out for the Mountains of the Moon, lying around -Lake Kivu to the west and south. This gem-like lake is in the real -heart of Africa, and to get there it was necessary to travel more -than three hundred miles west by south. Kivu lies about one hundred -and fifty miles west of the southern extremity of Lake Victoria, and -between Lakes Edward and Tanganyika. - -Day after day the miles were put behind them without any incidents -of especial note. Pictures were taken at times, when the occasion -warranted. But for several reasons both Mr. Ransome and his hosts -were eager to reach the mysterious Mountains of the Moon which stand -sentinel over the unexplored heart of the Dark Continent, and so -little time was spent in picture-taking, any secured being obtained -on the march, so to speak. - -For one thing, Mr. Ransome was eager to gain the region about Lake -Kivu and the Mountains of the Moon in order to learn as quickly as -possible what was afoot amongst the natives, as disquieting rumors -every now and again reached them of The Prophet’s activities. -Evasive though these rumors were, it became increasingly apparent -that The Prophet was someone of powerful personality who had -obtained a great hold on the superstitious minds of the natives and -who, if given sufficient time, might be able to unite the warlike -and remote tribes under one head and cause serious trouble for the -whites by swooping down on their scattered settlements and -destroying even the railroad and steamship lines and other slim -evidences of civilization in the Lake Victoria region which had been -built up laboriously through the years. - -For another, Mr. Hampton was anxious to reach the volcanic region -while the craters, of which native report was more definite than -regarding the activities of The Prophet, were still in eruption. A -pictorial record of them would be something never before obtained -and valuable in proportion. Besides, the great mountain region was -reputed to be the home not only of elephants, buffalo, bush buck, -cheetahs, leopards and lions, but also of the ferocious man-apes or -gorillas. - -To bag specimens of these animals both by gun and by camera would be -the crowning achievement of the expedition. - -Therefore, the party did not delay on the way but made each day’s -march as long as possible. The more so were they content to do this -as, after passing Kabale, a tiny frontier post in the mountains of -Uganda, two weeks from Masaka, they entered a desolate volcanic -region which had been laid waste by eruptions of lava in 1912 where -little game was encountered. - -By day, in fact, this region was plunged into a silence so uncanny -as to affect the nerves of even the boys. For they were accustomed -in their travel through central Africa to hear the jungle alive -about them. Here long distances were covered where not even the hum -of an insect or the call of a bird was to be heard. It was, in fact, -as if they were passing through a dead region where even the ground -beneath them was devoid of life. - -Neither man nor animals were encountered, and glad, indeed, was -every member of the party when at length they came to the edge of -the mighty African Rift Valley and beheld below them the vast -Mfumbiro Plain with craters breaking up the contour in every -direction. - -This was the region of the volcanoes, and after glimpsing smoking -peaks in the distance all day as they approached, the boys now -beheld from the edge of a precipice, below which was spread the -great plain, three towering cones with smoke-wreathed summits. -Whereas only occasional glimpses had been obtained heretofore, they -now could observe the mountains from base to summit. - -Never had any of them beheld a more awe-inspiring sight. And -standing on the edge of a precipice which fell steeply away a matter -of two thousand feet to the plain below, with those three smoking -cones against the red sunset sky in the distance, they were -speechless. - -Presently, however, the necessity for making camp for the night -appealed to Mr. Hampton, who called the boys away. Some distance -back from the precipice, amidst the hard-wood trees of a small -grove, where a spring of fresh sweet water burst from the ground to -go tumbling down the rocks, the tents were set up and the bearers -were disposed below, along the edge of the little stream. - -“Tomorrow,” announced Mr. Hampton, as they sat about the camp fire -that night, “we shall descend into the plain. There are numerous -villages down there, and on the very slopes of the great volcanoes, -inhabited by warlike natives, so we must go prepared to cope with -trouble, should the natives prove hostile. - -“Mr. Ransome,” he added, looking to the other for confirmation, -“believes we shall find some trace of The Prophet amongst those -natives, as it is in this region he is reputed to be stirring up -trouble. I may as well tell you fellows now as later that our friend -intends, if possible, to capture The Prophet and spirit him out of -the country. With his twelve trusted men that may not be impossible -of accomplishment. And as innocent takers of pictures and hunters of -big game, we shall be able, perhaps, to turn aside suspicion and -cover his tracks. - -“Of course,” he added, “in setting out on this expedition, we had no -intention of being drawn into a political situation. But finding -that we can be of vital service, the only decent thing we can do is -to proffer our aid. And I’m glad to see from the way you fellows nod -your heads that you agree with me. - -“Mr. Ransome,” he continued, “already has despatched two of his most -trustworthy men, with orders to make their way down the mountainside -and into the plain and to the nearest village. Their object is to -find out if possible where The Prophet has his headquarters at -present. And Mr. Ransome tells me that from conversations between -his men and the inhabitants of the last village through which we -passed earlier today, there is reason to believe this disturber of -the peace is not far away, perhaps in the very village to which he -has sent his spies. If the men report early tomorrow that such is -the case, Mr. Ransome intends to have a try at his capture. Have I -stated matters correctly?” he concluded, glancing toward the tall, -thoughtful-faced Englishman whose fortitude and constant good -spirits had endeared him to the boys. - -“Righto,” responded the latter, knocking out his straight-stemmed -briar pipe, from which seemingly he was inseparable, and gazing -thoughtfully into the bowl. “But you haven’t yet told the lads what -part they will be asked to play, if they will.” - -“I was coming to that,” said Mr. Hampton. Then turning toward the -interested trio, he resumed: “Two things will be vitally necessary -to the successful execution of our plans, once The Prophet is -located. Both involve you fellows. What they are you will gather as -I go along. - -“In the first place The Prophet undoubtedly has secured whatever -hold he has on the superstitious natives of these regions by playing -upon those very superstitions. That he is a white man and a -scientist, or at least possessed of scientific information, is -deductable from the way in which he has set about winning the awed -regard of the natives, according to the reports obtained at our last -stop today. - -“By that I mean that he knows the way of volcanoes and has drawn -upon that knowledge to predict events which have come to pass. - -“His first appearance was just prior to the beginning of the recent -volcanic eruptions, overflows of lava which have since continued at -intervals. And the way in which he appeared to the natives, as we -got the story today, was descending the slope of Mount Muhavura -afoot at dusk and surrounded by a nimbus of flame. That is easily -accounted for in our eyes. Undoubtedly, he had rubbed himself with -phosphorus. - -“But as he came seemingly from the cloud-wreathed summit of -Muhavura, where the natives believe heaven to lie, his statement -that he was an immortal from the company of the gods won wide -belief. He prophesied that Muhavura, long silent except for -occasional faint rumblings, would overflow in three days. And, -behold, it came to pass. Now we know that a man of science, if he -had managed to obtain observations of the rise and fall of lava in -the crater over a period of days, could predict accurately when the -overflow would come. Doubtless, this fellow had taken such -observations, and then had utilized his knowledge to further his own -ends. For he predicted this would come to pass as a punishment upon -the natives for permitting the whites to encroach upon their domain. - -“Since that time, it seems, he has gone up and down the Mfumbiro -Plain, received everywhere amongst the natives with the profoundest -of awe. Sometimes he will ascend the slopes of one of the great -cones, Sabinio, Namlagira beneath which the natives believe hell to -lie; Muhavura or Mgahinga. Always he forbids the natives to follow -him on pain of being seized by the spirits. And when he returns, -wrapped in his nimbus of fire, he generally predicts an eruption of -lava which quite generally is fulfilled. As I say, that is easy -enough for a man of science, but the impression it makes on the -native minds may easily be comprehended. - -“In fact,” said Mr. Hampton, “at that last village, although it is -not in the Mfumbiro Plain and no member has yet seen The Prophet, -yet his influence has made itself felt. Doubtless you boys noted the -veiled hostility of the natives and their reluctance to furnish us -vegetables and fruit even in return for ample consideration. That is -because the continued statement of The Prophet that the gods are -angry with the natives for tolerating white men in their land is -taking effect. What must those natives be who live beneath the -shadow of the volcanoes and are in contact with The Prophet? - -“Now here is what I am coming to. So hostile probably are the -natives of the plains that it would be impossible for us to enter -and photograph the volcanoes, the lava overflows, or wild game, -unless we do something to overcome that hostility. And Mr. Ransome -and I have decided that something can be done. If it succeeds, we -shall have struck a blow for ourselves and the success of our -expedition and he will have eliminated the menace of The Prophet. - -“The plan is this. Two of you boys shall put up the radio station -around camp here somewhere, and stick by it while the rest of us -descend into the plain tomorrow and hunt out The Prophet’s -headquarters, providing Mr. Ransome’s spies return with word that he -has been located. With us we shall take a portable radio and -loudspeaker attachment. - -“When we find The Prophet, Niellsen with his motion picture camera -will probably be able to create a diversion by drawing the natives -about him. And while that is going on, whichever one of you fellows -is selected to accompany us will have to seize his opportunity to -put up the radio in a good hiding place near The Prophet’s hut. - -“Then we will fight The Prophet with his own tactics, only going him -one better. For we shall announce to the natives that we are -emissaries from the outside world who have heard of The Prophet’s -misrepresentations. Instead of coming from heaven on Muhavura, we -shall say, he comes from hell in Namlagira. And we shall add that we -have been sent to expose him and to warn all natives against -listening to his words lest they suffer a more dreadful calamity -than any so far experienced. - -“That’s where the radio comes in. For after our bold declaration we -shall send up signal rockets. And from that precipice out yonder, -overlooking the vast plain and the crater region for a hundred miles -or more in three directions, a man with spyglasses will easily be -able to see them. That will be the signal to you fellows left behind -to speak over the radio in the guise of spirits denouncing The -Prophet and announcing that he was about to be whisked away. - -“When that message comes like a thunderclap from the concealed radio -instrument which we shall have set up, its effect undoubtedly will -be dismaying. In the ensuing confusion, Mr. Ransome’s trusties will -seize The Prophet and whisk him away. - -“Well,” he concluded, “what do you think of it?” - - - - - CHAPTER XXV - - THE MAN-APE - - -Let us pass as quickly as possible over the subsequent discussion -during which it was decided by lot that Bob and Frank should stay -behind to operate the radio, while Jack should accompany the main -party for the purpose of concealing the receiving set and -loudspeaker in an advantageous place. - -Both Bob and Frank keenly regretted the necessity which would -prevent them from forming part of the expedition, for they wanted -very much to see the discomfiture of The Prophet. While as for Bob, -he yearned to be present in case of a fight. - -However, where necessity commanded, like good soldiers they could -only obey. Half the force of bearers was to be left with them and -two of the guards, including Samba. This latter trusted fellow, it -had developed, was a native of this region who had been carried away -by slave traders in his youth, and, therefore, knew the dialect. It -was he, accordingly, who would have to speak over the radio. - -Early in the morning, Mr. Ransome’s spies returned before daylight, -in fact, having set out from a village where The Prophet was located -during the night and camped until the first faint streaks of dawn at -the foot of the precipice, after which they had made their way up -the height in short order. - -The Prophet was located in a big village eight miles distant on the -plain. They had marked the location well, and through glasses were -able to point it out to Bob and Frank. Thus that there would be any -difficulty in observing the signal rockets, which Mr. Hampton would -send up as a sign for Samba to “speak his piece” over the radio -there no longer remained a doubt. - -Welcome was the word of the spies that The Prophet, whose activities -heretofore had lain in the central portion of the great plain, -nearest the active volcanoes, and who only recently had invaded the -fringes, had not yet aroused the natives to such a pitch of -hostility against the whites as to make it impossible for Mr. -Hampton’s party to obtain a hearing. - -“That’s all we shall need,” said Mr. Hampton, as all ready to follow -the bearers and other members of the party down the steep paths of -the precipice to the plain, he and Jack paused for a last word with -Bob and Frank. “Once we get a hearing, we can trust to the -superstitions of the natives to do the rest.” - -They wrung each others’ hands in farewell, and then the departing -ones set out. Jack was elated, of course, at the turn of fortune -which had made it possible for him to be “in at the death” as he -phrased it. Yet he realized, too, that a considerable weight of -responsibility rested upon him to see to it that the receiving set -was properly hidden and in good working order. - -As for Bob and Frank, when the others had disappeared around a turn -of the path, dipping into a canyon, they swallowed their -disappointment at being left behind and hastened away to take up -their duties. Chief of which, of course, was the drilling of Samba -not only in the message he was to utter over the radio and which he -translated into high-flown native language, but also in coaching him -how loud to speak into the transmitter, how close to approach his -lips to it, and the proper tone to employ to achieve the best -effect. - -To descend the precipice and cross the plain to the village would -take the slow-moving party much more time than it had the spies. It -was not expected they would reach the village, in fact, until late -in the afternoon. Moreover, some time would be spent there in -negotiating with the chief and in drawing off the crowd of natives -from the vicinity of The Prophet’s hut through means of Niellsen’s -motion picture camera, in order that Jack should have his -opportunity to conceal the radio receiving set and the loudspeaker. - -It had been agreed, in fact, that by no means should Mr. Hampton -call for the use of the radio until 8 o’clock that night. -Accordingly, Bob and Frank, even after spending hours coaching Samba -until he was letter perfect in his speech and likewise knew just how -to utter it to obtain the best effect, still had time on their -hands. - -They had set up their radio station not far from the edge of the -precipice, in order that the one watching for the expected signal -should when beholding it be able to pass on the word at once to the -one manipulating the station and directing Samba. In order that they -would be able to keep the village which had been pointed out to them -under their glasses after nightfall, they had planted two stakes in -line with each other and bearing directly on the village, so that -even in the thickest darkness glasses trained in the direction -indicated by the pointers would pick out the signals. - -But it was uncomfortably hot in the open sun about the radio -station, even at that altitude of 8,000 feet, and after work had -been completed and everything was in readiness, Bob retired to his -tent for a nap. Frank, who was not inclined to sleep, strolled -around through the woods, which he found so strange as to be -exciting. - -It was his first experience in the untrodden woods of this mountain -region, and had he realized the danger he would not have wandered -from camp. For this mountain region is the home of the most terrible -of all African animals, the great man-ape. Horribly human and yet -inhuman in appearance, the gorilla lives in these trackless forests -of beautiful hard-wood trees where flowering plants climb over trunk -and bough in a riot of color and where the underbrush is so tangled -as to be almost impassable. With the strength of a dozen men in his -tremendous barrel-like chest and his over-long arms, is combined a -ferocity unparalleled amongst wild beasts. - -But Frank was not even thinking of gorillas as he forced his way -through the thickets, admiring the beauty of blossoms which for the -most part he had never seen before. Of one danger only was he -fearful. That was of snakes. And to the fact that he kept his eyes -darting here and there as he pushed tough vines aside or hacked at -tangled underbrush with the butt of his rifle in order to clear a -path, he owed his salvation. - -For the sight that met his eyes as he parted a great mass of tangled -vines and found himself staring into a small clearing where a forest -giant, smitten and blasted by lightning, had fallen and brought down -with it a mass that now lay withered or dying the vines which had -connected it with other trees, was such as to freeze the blood in -his veins. - -On top of the fallen trunk not twenty yards from him crouched a -grotesque powerful gorilla with three slightly smaller brutes behind -him. It was a male and three females. - -Frank stood aghast, feeling the blood seem to retreat from his body, -unable for the moment to move. Then he started to back away, as with -a powerful effort of the will, he regained control of his limbs in a -measure. - -But the huge gorilla had seen him. And now he sent a challenge -rolling and rumbling down the forest aisles in a tone that beginning -low rose and rose in volume as he beat upon his chest with a -drumming thud. A moment before the forest had been alive with the -call of birds, but as the sound of that ferocious anger shattered -the air, everything that spoke was stricken dumb. And when the -gorilla ceased his roar, the silence which succeeded was one of -stark terror. - -That Frank, too, was stricken with terror there is no denying. But -as, after issuing his ferocious challenge, the great brute stood -upright on its short bowed legs, and started running along the -fallen tree trunk toward him, Frank realized he must act quickly if -he were to save his life. - -The sight of that tremendous barrel-like chest bent forward with the -long grisly arms a-dangle to grip dead branches here and there and, -with a heave of the powerful mis-shapen shoulders, pull the brute -forward, made him a little sick. A vision of himself in the embrace -of those arms, being crushed to death against that chest, flashed -across Frank’s mind. Then it was gone, and the coolness which -usually came to his rescue in crises sprang into being now. - -Raising his rifle and taking careful aim, he pressed the trigger. -The gorilla was hit, but the shot was too high for the heart, -passing through a lung. For a moment the great brute paused, -swaying. Then he let out another vast bellow, which was cut short by -a terrible coughing as the blood poured into his lungs. - -The three females, frightened by the sound of the gun and more -alarmed now at its effect upon their lord and master, swung away -into the trees. But the gorilla with that superhuman strength which -he possesses was not to be downed. - -As the coughing subsided, he gave another roar of pain and then -sprang straight through the air toward Frank. White-faced and -trembling, Frank yet realized that if he turned to run the gorilla -would be upon him. So levelling his rifle again, he once more -pressed the trigger. Shot in midcareer, the gorilla collapsed and -fell in a huge huddle almost at Frank’s feet. - -About the fallen ape who twitched convulsively and then lay in a -grotesque heap while his eyes glazed in death, there was at once -something so monstrous and yet human that Frank felt his heart turn -to water within him. And he realized then that he could not stalk -and shoot gorillas in cold blood, and that if any of that were done -some other member of the expedition would have the privilege of -shooting the fourteen gorillas, thirteen now, which the Belgian -government license permitted him to bag. - -After one more look at the fallen monster, a look half-furtive, so -quickly did he turn his glance away, Frank started retracing his -steps as quickly as possible, following the trail he had blazed. And -when on reaching their tent, he found Bob sunk in sound slumber, he -gazed at him unbelievingly before his legs gave way and let him down -on a camp chair. - -Could it be possible that while one boy slept, another should have -been so close to a frightful death nearby? - - - - - CHAPTER XXVI - - MFUM-BA APPEARS - - -Hours later Frank was still shaking as he stood in the darkness on -the edge of the bluff gazing through the night glasses in the -direction indicated by the pointers and waiting for the signal -rockets which he expected momentarily to see flare up from the -village in the darkened plain far below. - -Behind him at the radio station was Bob with Samba seated before the -transmitter. Every wire had been gone over, the motor had been tuned -and found to be in perfect working condition, and the two boys were -confident of being able to carry out their part of the program. - -In the grove in the background, Frank could see here and there the -gleam of one of the cooking fires about which the bearers left to -him and Bob were preparing their evening meal. With nothing to do -that day, the bearers had enjoyed life by taking a long nap. Now -they were up and about the fires, Frank knew, cooking and -chattering. He could even hear occasionally the sound of a laugh -from the light-hearted fellows, louder than usual. - -Well, they would need those fires, he reflected, not alone for the -preparation of food but to provide warmth. At this altitude of 8,000 -feet, the nights, as they had discovered the night previous, became -very cold. In fact, Frank was wearing heavy canvass knickers tucked -into high lace boots and the warmest sweater he could find, for the -first time in months. - -The presence of Bob not far away and of the bearers in the -background, together with the glow of their fires, was welcome to -the boy on lonely outpost above that pit of shadows into which night -seemed to have flung a world of soft velvet. - -For the forest world was awake. And now the quiet of day, broken -only by bird calls or the occasional bark of a gorilla, had given -way to a medley of terrifying sounds. The sobbing of leopards and -cheetahs thrilled and vibrated mournfully. Constantly the boom of -the gorilla cut across all other noises, aweing them into silence -for a moment, after which they would begin again. Owls hooted, -insects shrilled and hummed near at hand, about Frank’s face. And -from the distant plain below rose the shrill barking of a jackal -pack pierced through now and again by the mournful note of the -hyena. - -It was Africa. And by night Africa awakes. Frank was both fascinated -and repelled. But with it all he was thrilled, too, thrilled at the -thought that he had been lucky enough in his youth to be able to -penetrate into the very heart of this most mysterious continent on -the face of the globe, to behold its mysteries and wonders close at -hand. - -Suddenly out of that velvety darkness cloaking the plain a ball of -fire soared upward followed by a glowing comet’s tail of sparks, and -then another and another followed. - -Through the spyglass Frank could see them clearly, although he knew -that in his remoter position at the rear, where the radio had been -set up, Bob was unaware that the rockets had been touched off. He -did not even wait to pick his cautious way back over the rocks, -which were so uneven the boys had considered it best not to erect -the radio station upon them, but, instead, put his hand to his mouth -and called to Bob. - -“All right? Have they signalled?” came Bob’s hail in response. - -“They’ve signalled,” shouted Frank. “Let’s go.” - -Then turning his pocket flashlight on the rocks in order to guard -against either missteps or stepping upon a snake, he made his way to -his comrade’s side. - -Samba was still speaking when Frank arrived, for he covered the -intervening ground hastily when once free of the rocks. And as -Frank, at Bob’s finger on his lips, stood in silence looking at -their strange broadcaster, he could not repress a smile. Samba was -perspiring freely, although the coolness of night already had set -in. And anybody unaccustomed to telephoning who has remained seated -for any length of time at the instrument, will appreciate the -nervousness from which the poor fellow suffered. But he was -undaunted. And what was most to the point, considered Frank, was the -fact that his nervousness was not betrayed in his voice. What it was -he was saying in the dialect of the region, Frank of course could -not understand. But Samba was delivering it with unction and -solemnity, and Frank could not but reflect that in this -semi-civilized man lay the makings of a remarkable actor. The truth -is, of course, that primitive peoples naturally possess histrionic -possibilities such as more highly civilized beings must struggle and -often without result to attain. - -Turning toward Bob, Samba lifted his eyebrows in a funny quizzical -glance, a question evidently as to what to do now. Bob could not -refrain from laughing. Placing a big hand over the transmitter, he -asked whether Samba had said all that had been outlined to him to -say. - -The black nodded, and when Bob said “Well, that’s all, then,” and -closed the circuit, he breathed a great sigh of relief. - -“Him tough job,” said Samba simply, running his big hand over his -sweating shiny face. Then a look of pride crossed his features. “Him -good job, hey?” he asked. - -Both boys thwacked him heartily on the back. - -“I couldn’t understand a word of it, Samba,” said Frank. “But it -sounded mighty solemn and strong to me.” - -“Me, too,” agreed Bob, slangily. - -Samba grinned. - -In the meantime, at the plains village made headquarters by The -Prophet, raw drama was being enacted. - -Entering in the late afternoon, the party presented a not -unimpressive array. At the head marched Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome, -both lean, tall, capable looking, dressed in semi-military costumes -of khaki topped by broad-brimmed campaign hats such as are still -worn throughout the American West. Revolvers swung at their sides, -rifles over their shoulders. - -Behind marched the ten men of the guard in double file, shouldering -their rifles and keeping step with military precision. And behind -them came the fifty bearers, tall strapping fellows all and handy -men with the long keen knives in sheaths at the waist. Lake natives -selected at Masaka for their strength and intelligence, they were -all picked men. And Mr. Hampton had impressed upon them the -possibility of trouble and received from each the assurance that he -would stand by in case of attack, but would give the native populace -no cause for taking offense unless attacked. - -At the head of the bearers marched Jack, it being agreed that it -would be best for him not to appear with Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome -when they dealt with the chief of the village in order that later, -when he should slip away to conceal the radio, his absence would go -unnoticed. As for the radio, it and the aerial and loudspeaker were -all packed in two small boxes borne by bearers in the middle of the -line where they would be least noticed. - -At the very rear of the procession moved Niellsen, with his motion -picture camera and tripod, two bearers carrying his film case. -Rightly it had been figured that the front and rear of the -procession were the two points of chief interest to onlookers, and -that in placing Niellsen at the rear he would become a center of -attention. And that was the thing to be desired, when Jack should -set about his appointed task. - -Tall warriors, black as ebony, some like the Masai tribesmen who are -the giants of Africa, attaining a height of six feet seven or eight, -crowded around. With their great hide shields and twelve foot -spears, they presented a threatening appearance. But none attempted -to lay hands on the members of the column as it proceeded through -the village toward the chief’s hut. Indeed, the threatening presence -of the gun-bearing guard had a salutary effect. Well enough did the -warriors know the power of the white men’s guns. In fact, envious -glances were cast at the bearers by warriors desiring to possess a -gun more than anything else. - -Straight to the open space or central plaza of the village moved the -party. Then Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome halted, and a tall -commanding figure of a man somewhat advanced in years but still -erect came to meet them. This was Chief Namla. Hobbling at his side, -wrapped in a cotton blanket, moved a wizened figure with a face so -old and wrinkled it was monkey-like. - -Chief Namla halted some ten paces from the two white men, and the -aged man-monkey beside him likewise came to a halt, staring at the -strangers with beady bright eyes. The chief’s glance was cold and -hostile, but that of the other, whom they took to be the tribal -medicine man, contained a palpable if unspoken gleam of appeal which -caused Mr. Hampton to start. What could the old medicine man have in -mind? - -It goes without saying that they had not invaded Chief Narnia’s -village unprovided with an interpreter. But as this man stepped -forward to speak, the two white men were dumbfounded to see the -medicine man hold up a hand as if for silence. Then from beneath his -enfolding dirty robe of cotton came a strange rattle, and over the -faces of Chief Namla and the warriors drawn up in a rude semi-circle -behind him and facing the whites appeared an expression of awe. - -“The spirits of Chief Narnia’s father speak and they tell the Wizard -Mfum-ba to say that these white men come not as enemies but as -friends. They bid Chief Namla to hearken to them,” he cried. - -And once more, while the amazed interpreter hastily translated for -the benefit of the two white men these words uttered in the native -tongue by the old medicine man did the latter let that unmistakable -appeal for help appear in his eyes. Mr. Hampton felt he could not be -mistaken. And the old wizard’s words confirmed his impression. For -whatever reason yet to be explained, the Wizard Mfum-ba wanted the -white men on his side. - -“I have it,” muttered Mr. Hampton quickly to his companion. “Look at -that old fellow. He wants us to help him out of a hole. The Prophet -is destroying his power amongst his own people, and naturally he -hates The Prophet. We must manage to gain word with him aside. He -may be just the man for our purpose.” - -Mr. Ransome nodded. Then addressing Chief Namla in a firm voice, he -said: - -“O Chief Namla, the fame of your land has drawn my companion here -that he may see its wonders and carry back with him to the land of -the white man across the mighty ocean a picture of all that he -beholds. He has with him a magic machine which when pointed at a -man, an animal or a mountain while the magician sets it in motion -takes the likeness of that man or animal or mountain so that others -thousands of miles distant may see and behold the same thing that he -sees and beholds. This is a great magic, yet it does not take away -anything from the man or animal or mountain and does not harm them -in any way. He prays that you will permit him and his magician to -travel in your country and point this machine at whatever pleases -him. In return he offers such valuable objects as are fitting for so -mighty and powerful a ruler as Chief Namla.” - -Then, while the interpreter put this into the native dialect, Mr. -Ransome bade the bearers to bring forward the trade goods to be -offered the chief. Bundle after bundle was opened and laid at the -chief’s feet, consisting of many yards of gaudy cotton prints, -bundles of brass stair rods, an entire box of fezzes both red and -blue, a small set of dishes of gaudiest flowered pattern and, -finally, topping the heap, a trade gun and box of cartridges. - -Not until the last appeared did Chief Namla who stood with folded -arms, relax his frowning expression. Then his eyes gleamed -covetously, and for the first time he spoke. - -“Let the white strangers rest in the guest house,” he said. “I shall -let them know presently what I decide.” - -The interpreter hastened to repeat this but almost before he had -concluded speaking the wrinkled old wizard interrupted with a gabble -of words, while again from beneath his robe sounded that mysterious -rattling. - -“Him say Chief Namla tell white men a’ right,” announced the -interpreter hastily. Then he added on his own account: “Me think -Wizard no want. Chief go talk somebody.” - -“The Prophet,” said Mr. Ransome emphatically, and Mr. Hampton nodded -agreement. “You’re right, Hampton. Mfum-ba fears the influence of -The Prophet over the chief.” - -Nevertheless, that the chief intended to adhere to his resolve was -soon apparent. For thrusting the old wizard aside impatiently, as if -angered by his importunities, he indicated to some women who came -running forward that the presents to him should be borne away, and -then turned without more words and strode in the direction of a hut -somewhat larger than the rest at one side of the square. - -For the moment there was nothing to do except obey. And as the -warriors melted away at a sharp command flung over Chief Narnia’s -shoulder, Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome followed several women who -approached and told the interpreter they were to lead the party to -the guest house. This proved to be a commodious hut, entirely of -grass, both walls and roof, standing on the right of the large hut -into which the chief had disappeared and separated from it only by a -narrow passage some eight feet in width. - -The bearers squatted outside the hut, and the guards leaned against -the wall, but the four white men of the party, for Jack and Niellsen -had come forward to join the leaders, retired within for a -consultation. The hut was clean and free from odors, and with a sigh -they sank down on the small mushroom-like stools standing about and -relaxed. - -“Nothing to do except wait, I suppose,” said Mr. Ransome finally, -after the matter had been discussed from various angles. “But if -Chief Namla doesn’t soon send for us, we shall have to take the next -step. And that will be to summon him and inform him, as we planned, -that we intend to invoke the white man’s Great Spirit to rout his -evil counselor, The Prophet. We shall have to speak without mincing -matters, and carry it off with a high hand.” - -“Provided I can first find a way of fixing up the radio,” said Jack. -“And I believe that way already has been found. Did you notice the -chief disappear into the next hut?” - -The others nodded. - -“Well, doesn’t it strike you that if he was going to consult The -Prophet, that gentleman is located inside there?” - -“That’s right,” said Mr. Hampton. - -“Only a narrow eight-foot alleyway separates the two huts,” said -Jack. “Suppose we placed the radio so that when Samba speaks his -piece the voice will seem to come from The Prophet’s own hut? -Wouldn’t that be pretty effective?” - -“It certainly would, Jack,” said Mr. Ransome. “But how do you -propose to do it?” - -Before Jack could reply, there came an interruption from an -unexpected quarter. The grass wall at the rear was parted, and -between the bundles of thatch which closed again behind him entered -none other than the wrinkled old medicine man calling himself the -Wizard Mfum-ba. He looked from one to the other, then set his -fingers to his lips, after which he spread out his hands as if in -deprecation. - -“I believe he wants the interpreter,” said Jack, quickest to grasp -the meaning of the gesture. And stepping to the doorway of the hut, -he summoned the interpreter from the group outside. The old wizard’s -face showed relief at the fellow’s appearance, and drawing him close -he began to whisper to him. Several times the interpreter started to -speak, only to be interrupted, but at length with a nod of the head -and a low-voiced assurance, he turned from the old medicine man to -Mr. Ransome. - -“Him say much,” he declared. “Too much me tell. But him mean Prophet -bad man, take away honor from Mfum-ba so him be cast out by tribe -unless him save face. Him say he help white men kill Prophet.” - -“We don’t want to kill The Prophet but to capture him,” said Mr. -Hampton. “Look here, you ask him if he’ll help us capture him and -carry him away?” - -When this was translated, Mfum-ba shook his head in emphatic -assurance. Quite evidently he was willing to go any length to be rid -of an obnoxious rival. - - - - - CHAPTER XXVII - - JACK WORKS FAST - - -Thereupon the four white men together with the medicine man and the -interpreter put their heads together, with what result will -presently be seen. And at length the Wizard Mfum-ba, after first -poking an opening in the straw wall with a finger and peering out, -parted the thatch sufficiently to permit him to slip out the way he -had come. - -“Well, things are looking up,” said Jack. “But one thing puzzles me. -Just one little thing. Did you all notice that out there in the -square, whenever the old fellow spoke, his words were preceded by a -peculiar rattling sound, a sound which caused a look of awe to -appear on the faces of many of his hearers?” - -“Oh, that nothing,” said the interpreter, with the superiority of a -man who has come in contact with civilizing influences and has lost -his awe of home town ways. “Him carry li’l bag, made of skin, -underneath him robe, filled with pebbles. When him want to fool -somebody him rattle bag and say spirits talk. My uncle,” he added, -“him medicine man, too.” - -At this naive remark, his auditors laughed heartily. - -“Well, now, if there’s anything to that medicine man, Chief Namla is -due to appear,” said Mr. Ransome. - -And scarcely had the words been uttered than one of the guards -putting his head inside the doorway announced the chief wanted them -in the square. - -“So far so good,” said Mr. Hampton, rising with alacrity. “Mfum-ba -has made good on one promise, anyway.” - -Then he added: “Bring your camera, Niellsen, and come along. Jack, -I’ll send your radio stuff in by bearer. Remember, my lad, -everything really depends on you. But take no unnecessary risks.” - -“All right. Dad,” said Jack, in a reassuring tone. “Leave it to me.” - -They went out, and in a few moments a bearer entered the hut with -the two small cases containing the cabinet receiving set and aerial -and the loudspeaker. Putting them down he, too, retired. Jack was -again alone. But not for long. - -He could hear voices in the grassy square outside. And peering -through the doorway, he noted with satisfaction that the bearers had -shifted position as if casually, so that now they stood in two -groups, one of which effectively screened the doorway of the hut -while the other blocked the alleyway alongside, between guest house -and The Prophet’s hut beyond. - -Things were working out according to schedule. - -When he turned around, there stood the Wizard Mfum-ba, hand -outstretched to pluck him by a shirt sleeve to attract his -attention. This, too, was according to plan, and well-pleased with -the way things were going, Jack nodded. Then he picked up the two -small cases, and, one under each arm, followed Mfum-ba through the -parted thatch of the rear wall. - -Beyond some twenty paces and stretching for a considerable distance -on either hand lay an eight-foot-high wattled wall, surrounding the -yard of Chief Narnia’s abode. Jack looked up and down the space -intervening but it was deserted. He listened. From the square came -the sound of Mr. Ransome’s voice upraised in speech. And as it -ceased, the hum of many voices filled with uncontrollable amazement -succeeded. - -But he must make the most of his opportunity. And already Mfum-ba -had darted away from his side with surprising speed for one so aged, -and stood at the rear of the adjacent hut, which Jack knew was -inhabited by the mysterious individual known as The Prophet. -Immediately at the rear of this hut and towering above it rose a -spreading tree of luxuriant foliage, a forest giant which had -wandered down into the plain. - -Mfum-ba beckoned impatiently, and Jack delaying no longer ran to -join him. As he crossed the open alleyway between the huts, he gazed -toward the square. But his view of it was cut off by the dense mass -of bearers at the mouth of the alley, and so he knew that anybody -looking in could not see him, either. - -“Working like clock work,” he thought. - -To scale the tree was an easy matter. And putting down his two -cases, Jack in a trice was in the lower branches. Then Mfum-ba -handed up the case containing the radio receiving set and aerial, as -Jack indicated. Mounting into the tree, which closed about him, -concealing him completely, Jack carried the insulated wire of the -aerial to the top. Pausing only in conclusion for a hasty glance -through the branches toward the square, a glance which told him -nothing. Descending, he placed the receiving cabinet in a crotch -which had caught his eye as he passed, and where it rested as -securely as if in a place especially made for it. - -Working at top speed, Jack yet was careful that everything should be -put in proper order. And when he had finished, he dropped lightly to -the ground. The alley between the huts and the wattled wall was -still deserted. And from the sounds reaching him from the direction -of the square, Jack surmised his father and the latter’s companions -were successfully keeping the populace engaged. - -Between him and Mfum-ba not a word had so far passed, for neither -could have understood the other’s tongue. But gestures were more -eloquent than words. Mfum-ba parting the grass thatch at the rear of -The Prophet’s hut, as he had parted that of the guest house, stepped -within, one skinny, claw-like black hand left behind and beckoning -Jack on. Jack set his teeth, for the most dangerous part of his task -yet remained. Then he, too, entered the hut by this novel method, -pushing ahead of him the case containing the loudspeaker. - -The hut was empty save for Mfum-ba and himself. But curious though -he was to discover something regarding the identity of this -mysterious individual who inhabited it, Jack after a hasty glance -around which took in the floor pallet, a writing case upon which lay -a sheet of paper filled with fine writing in German script (that -much he did note), and a small box in one corner, proceeded to his -task. - -That was to fasten the loudspeaker in the roof of the hut, so that -the trumpet was on the outside but concealed by a light covering of -straw. When it had been arranged to his satisfaction, and he felt -certain it would stay in position and would not be discovered except -by direct search, Jack poked the coil of wire with which to connect -it to the receiving set out of the roof so that it rolled down and -dropped into the alley at the rear. - -Then, listening a moment to assure himself that the crowd in the -square outside was still engaged, he indicated by signs to Mfum-ba, -who stood near the doorway, alternately peering into the square and -up at him, that his task was finished. And parting the thatch of the -rear wall, he stepped out with Mfum-ba at his heels. - -Then came the first upset in his schedule, which so far had gone -along precisely as planned. For as Jack stepped through the thatch, -he saw a tall Negro passing through the alley at the rear pause not -a yard away from him and stare open-mouthed as if at an apparition. -If the fellow gave the alarm, all would be lost. As this reflection -flashed through his brain, Jack became desperate. Was all his effort -to go for nought, because a chance passer-by discovered him at that -crucial moment? Not if he could avoid it. - -With panther-like swiftness Jack leaped toward the Negro, and his -right fist shot out and caught him beneath the ear with stunning -force. The black toppled over without a sound, and Jack caught him -in his arms as he fell. Mfum-ba stood behind him, wringing his -hands, at this unexpected catastrophe. But the next second the old -wizard’s face became wreathed in fury, and whipping a knife from his -cotton robe he would have plunged it into the heart of the poor -fellow had Jack not dropped his unconscious burden and seized the -wizard’s upraised arm with a powerful grip. - -Jack was almost frantic. Here he had an unconscious man on his -hands, who, as soon as he returned to his senses, would give the -alarm. And he had to deal with Mfum-ba or the latter would knife the -Negro without compunction. To make matters worse, his task was not -yet completed. The loudspeaker had still to be connected with the -receiving set. - -Turning the man over, Jack tied his hands behind his back with his -own belt, for the naked warrior had none which could be employed for -that purpose. Then he seized him beneath the armpits and dragged him -to the rear of the guest house, where, parting the thatch, he -tumbled him inside. Running to the doorway, he pulled one of the -bearers standing outside with his back turned, watching events in -the square, within, and indicated he should keep guard over the -bound man. - -Then again he pushed through the thatched wall, saw by a hasty -glance that Mfum-ba was alone, and, picking up the wire which had -fallen down from the roof of The Prophet’s hut, he shinned back up -the tree and connected it with the receiving set. Again he dropped -to the ground and pulling Mfum-ba with him re-entered the guest -house without discovery. - -The bearer looked at him with lively curiosity, the bound warrior -who had opened his eyes with the deepest respect mingled with fear, -and Mfum-ba with stupefaction. But Jack wasn’t caring who stared at -him, or how. He had never worked so fast nor so furiously in his -life, nor ever under such an impulse of fear. Throwing himself flat -on his back he lay with eyes closed, resting, until his father’s -voice aroused him when, opening his eyes, he sat up. - -“Where did this fellow come from, Jack? And did you manage it?” -asked Mr. Hampton anxiously. - -“I’ll say I did,” said Jack, and he explained what he had been -through. - -“What happened to you?” he asked. “Did things work out as planned?” - -“Exactly as planned,” said Mr. Hampton, while Mr. Ransome and -Niellsen who stood behind Mr. Hampton nodded. - -Then he explained that when summoned to the square they had found -Chief Namla already there, surrounded by a big crowd of his people. -In fact, everybody in the place was on hand, made curious to hear -what the chief’s answer to the white men’s strange request would be. - -“The chief asked us to show him our machine, as Mfum-ba had prompted -him,” continued Mr. Hampton. “So Niellsen set it up and let him look -into the range-finder. When he saw reflected there every hut, -distant volcano or warrior close at hand, at which Niellsen directed -the camera, he was stupefied. That was what we had expected. And so -we invited his chief men to step up and have a look. The crowd -became more and more excited. - -“Then we told the chief we had a communication from the Great Spirit -of the white man to deliver.” He paused, glancing at Mr. Ransome. “I -thought you did that rather well, Ransome,” he said, smiling. “Of -course, I don’t know just what hash the interpreter made of your -remarks. But at any rate, they got across.” - -Mr. Ransome nodded. - -“The Prophet was brought from his hut to face us,” he said. And he -laughed heartily, as if at some humorous recollection. “You could -never imagine what he is, Jack,” he said, “so I’ll tell you. Of -course, I can’t be sure. But I believe he is one of these soured -German professors, a man who doesn’t know the Great War ended years -ago. In his warped mind there is only one thought uppermost. And -that is that Germany was martyred in the war, that all the world was -against her without reason, and that he must obtain revenge. I think -he is a little crazy.” - -“At any rate, he scorned us. ‘Pigs, you think to scare me,’ he said. -‘It is you who shall pay with your lives.’ Nevertheless, I think he -was impressed at our promise to make the Great Spirit speak from the -air at 8 o’clock tonight. And he’ll be outside to listen. And so -will everybody else in the place.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXVIII - - CONCLUSION - - -Sharp at 8 o’clock, Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome set off the rockets -in the square. And as they went up with their comet’s tail of fire, -the “Ohs” and “Ahs” of the natives could be heard all over the big -enclosure ringed by its grass-thatched huts and lighted by a fire -flaming in the center. - -Then Mr. Hampton, who stood full in the glare, held up his hand for -silence, and the interpreter cried that now the Great Spirit of the -white men was about to speak. - -To one side of the fire stood Chief Namla and beside him The -Prophet, bespectacled and wrapped in a long white cotton robe. He -looked both scornful and, to the keen discerning eyes of the only -other white men, worried. - -As for them, they were worried, too. They had cast all on this throw -of the dice. Would they win or lose? Would everything go as planned? -Or had Jack failed to connect the radio properly? Or had Frank and -Bob fallen down on their part of the job? - -Silence filled the great square, a silence accentuated by the deep -breathing of the hundreds assembled, who waited for they knew not -what. - -Then it came. And what a feeling of relieved thankfulness filled the -hearts and minds of the white men. Except The Prophet. He started in -amazement, stared all about him as if in search of that strange -voice—the voice of Samba speaking weighty words in the native -tongue. As the voice concluded, amidst a stunned silence which had -fallen upon the multitude, leaving them breathless, awe-stricken, -mute. The Prophet turned furiously toward Mr. Hampton. - -“Pig, dog,” he cried, in a voice made squeaky by rage. “I might have -known. It is only the radio. I shall show you up.” - -But he went alone. Of all those hundreds of natives who heretofore -had been his admirers, his followers, almost his slaves, none would -have dreamed of invading The Prophet’s hut whence that voice came. - -Mr. Hampton chuckled, and leaning close to his companion whispered: - -“Jack was right. A scientific man couldn’t be fooled, but would -realize we were using the radio. He is falling right into our trap.” - -Just what he meant could have been understood by anyone inside The -Prophet’s hut. For as the furious man, speeding to search for the -radio receiving set which he now realized must have been concealed -somewhere within, entered the pitch black darkness of the interior, -strong hands closed about his throat, throttling all possibility of -outcry. And then a gag was thrust into his mouth, and he was -propelled through the parted thatch of the rear wall, Where a -half-score armed men tossed him up on a rude litter which they -raised to their shoulders, after which they trotted off down the -alley between the huts and the wattled wall of the chief’s courtyard -and were lost in the darkness. - -As they melted away in the night, going in the direction of the -mountain wall, eight miles away, upon which lay the expedition’s -camp, Jack looking after them heaved a tremendous sigh of relief. - -“Whew,” he remarked to Niellsen. “I’m glad that’s done. But it -worked to perfection, didn’t it?” - -Jack was correct. Men, women and children, every inhabitant of the -village was in the square. And, therefore, none saw the shadowy -forms of the guards pass between the last huts on the outskirts and -disappear with their burden. - -Nor were they destined ever to see The Prophet again. For, looking -ahead, it may be stated that, kept a close prisoner but well treated -during the ensuing weeks of the expedition’s stay in that region, -The Prophet, whose real name was Professor von Hertwig, was turned -over on the return of the expedition to civilization to the Belgian -authorities. Examined by alienists and pronounced insane, he was -ordered sent to an asylum in Belgium. But on his way down to the -coast under guard he contracted a tropical fever which caused his -death. - -That the man had not been acting solely on his own initiative but -had been the tool of cunning minds still at large was the belief of -Mr. Ransome, a belief in which Mr. Hampton concurred. But for the -time being these “higher ups” remained quiet, and no trace of them -could be found. - -No trace of Mabele could be found, either. And it seemed likely that -he had, indeed, been lost in the storm which swept Lake Victoria the -day his stolen canoe was found overturned offshore. As to the radio -set of which he had robbed the boys, it still is in all likelihood -mouldering in its hiding place near Chief Ungaba’s village. But as -they never again passed that way, they could not very well organize -an expedition to hunt for it. - -A month more the party spent in the Mountains of the Moon, -photographing the volcanoes and obtaining some very excellent -pictures of lions, leopards, Uganda cobb, elephants, herds of topi, -reed-buck, hippopotami and wart-hog. Their bag of animals shot by -rifle instead of camera also grew apace. - -As for the natives, they could not do enough to display hospitality -toward the expedition. For the story of the voice from the sky which -had condemned The Prophet to his doom passed from mouth to mouth -throughout the vast district faster than if it had been telegraphed, -it seemed. At any rate, it had preceded the party wherever they -went. And it grew in the telling, so that before long the natives -were telling of how after the voice from the sky had spoken, The -Prophet was seized by red demons and hurried away into the bowels of -Tamlagira, which opened to admit them, displaying the eternal fires -of hell leaping high. - -Toward the end of their stay, the members of the expedition made -their way to Lake Kivu, cupped gem-like amidst the mountains of the -mighty Ruwenzori range. And here, in what is perhaps the only -considerable body of water in all equatorial Africa which is free of -crocodiles, the boys spent their days mainly in or on the water -until finally the last leg of their wonderful trip was made to a -little port on the western shore of Lake Victoria, whence they were -carried by steamer to Kisumu and by rail to Nairobi. - -There, after assembling their thousands of feet of film and their -many trophies of hide and horn, they went by rail to Mombasa and -after shipping by coastal steamer to Zanzibar, transshipped to a -larger vessel which carried them up through the Suez Canal to -Marseilles. And so at length, aboard a great trans-Atlantic liner, -the Radio Boys returned to New York. - -Historic though their trip had been, never had they been so glad to -see the Goddess of Liberty. As they moved slowly up the harbor in -the tow of puffing, busy little tugs, all three lined the rail and -solemnly saluted her. - -With this, we shall bid farewell to the Radio Boys for the time -being, feeling assured that, no matter what their future adventures, -if they acquit themselves as well as in Darkest Africa they will be -doing well, indeed. - - THE END. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa, by -Gerald Breckenridge - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA *** - -***** This file should be named 63099-0.txt or 63099-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/0/9/63099/ - -Produced by Roger Frank -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/63099-0.zip b/old/63099-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a7d896a..0000000 --- a/old/63099-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63099-h.zip b/old/63099-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1a58b24..0000000 --- a/old/63099-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63099-h/63099-h.htm b/old/63099-h/63099-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 8051dab..0000000 --- a/old/63099-h/63099-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6211 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" -"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> -<head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <title>The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa, by Gerald Breckenridge—A Project Gutenberg eBook</title> - <link rel='coverpage' href='images/cover.jpg' /> - <meta name='cover' content='images/cover.jpg' /> - <style type="text/css"> - body { margin-left:8%; margin-right:8%; } - p { text-indent:1.15em; margin-top:0.1em; margin-bottom:0.1em; text-align:justify; } - h1 { text-align:center; font-weight:normal; page-break-before: always; - font-size:1.4em; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; } - h2 { text-align:center; font-weight:normal; page-break-before: always; - font-size:1.0em; margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; } - h2.nobreak { page-break-before: avoid; } - div.section { page-break-before:always; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:4em; } - div.chapter { page-break-before:always; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:4em; } - div.cbline { margin-left:1.4em; text-indent:-1.4em; } - .caption { text-indent:0; padding:0.5em 0; text-align:center; font-size:smaller; } - body { font-size:110% } - </style> -</head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa, by Gerald Breckenridge - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa - -Author: Gerald Breckenridge - -Release Date: September 2, 2020 [EBook #63099] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA *** - - - - -Produced by Roger Frank - - - - - -</pre> - -<h1>THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA</h1> - -<div class='section'> - -<div id='frontis' style='margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:10.0%; width:80%;'> - <img src='images/ifpc.jpg' alt='' style='width:100%' /> -<p class='caption'>“You certainly won his heart that time, Bob. Look at his face if you want to see real amazement.”</p> -</div> -</div> - -<div class='section'> - -<div style='text-align:center; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; '> -<div style='font-size:1.6em;margin-bottom:1em;'>THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA</div> -<div style='font-size:1.2em;margin-bottom:1em;'>By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</div> -<div style='font-size:0.9em;font-variant:small-caps;'>Author of</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>“The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>Boys with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>Search for the Inca’s Treasure,” “The Radio</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition”</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;margin-bottom:2em;'>“The Radio Boys Seek the Lost Atlantis.”</div> -</div> -<div style='width:20%; margin-left:40%;'> -<img src='images/itpg.jpg' alt='' style='width:100%;' /> -</div> -<div style='text-align:center; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; '> -<div style='margin-top:2em;'>A. L. BURT COMPANY</div> -<div>Publishers New York</div> -</div> -</div> - -<div class='section'> - -<div style='text-align:center; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; '> -<div>THE</div> -<div style='font-size:1.2em;'>RADIO BOYS SERIES</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>A SERIES OF STORIES FOR BOYS OF ALL AGES</div> -<div>By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</div> -</div> -<div style='text-align:center; margin-top:0.5em; margin-bottom:0.5em; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto'> -<div style='display:inline-block; text-align:left;'> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border</div> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty</div> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards</div> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys Search for the Inca’s Treasure</div> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</div> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys Seek the Lost Atlantis</div> -<div class='cbline' style='font-size:0.8em;'>The Radio Boys In Darkest Africa</div> -</div> -</div> -<div style='text-align:center; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; '> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>Copyright, 1923</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>By A. L. BURT COMPANY</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA</div> -<div style='font-size:0.8em;'>Made in “U. S. A.”</div> -</div> -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<div style='text-align:center; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; '> -<div style='font-size:1.4em;margin-top:4em;'>THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA. </div> -</div> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chI' title='I: Wimba’s Trial'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER I.</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>WIMBA’S TRIAL</span> -</h2> - -<p>“Look here, Jack, we ought to do something to help Wimba. I don’t -believe he’s getting a square deal.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I, Frank. But what can we do? Chief Ruku-Ru is supreme here. And if -he decides against Wimba—”</p> - -<p>Jack Hampton’s tone was as near hopeless as one could ever expect to -hear from the lips of that optimistic young adventurer.</p> - -<p>Nor is that to be wondered at. The predicament of their head man, Wimba, -a Kikuyu of superior parts whose services they had been fortunate enough -to obtain at Nairobi, administrative capital of British East Africa or -Kenya Colony, was serious.</p> - -<p>Here on the far fringe of the Kikuyu country, several hundred miles from -Nairobi, the nearest outpost of white civilization in Central Africa, -Wimba was being tried on a charge of murder. Chief Ruku-Ru, head of the -local tribesmen, presiding as judge, gave every indication of being -about to sentence Wimba to death.</p> - -<p>And the two boys knew Wimba was innocent. They believed the latter’s -story. Wimba said he had come upon two local tribesmen stealing from the -effects of his employers and that, when discovered, they had attacked -him. Fighting in self-defense he had been unfortunate enough to kill -one, whereupon the other had run to Chief Ruku-Ru with the tale that -Wimba had murdered his comrade.</p> - -<p>During the course of the trial, which was being held beneath a great -thorn tree, Jack Hampton and Frank Merrick had been breathless -spectators. Their companion. Bob Temple, lay weak from fever in his -tent, and could not be present.</p> - -<p>In an old armchair which had been brought by a trader years before to -this remote village, sat Chief Ruku-Ru, as if in a throne. His hair was -drawn to a knob on the very top of his round head. His black face was -preternaturally grave as became an administrator of justice. Around his -neck were a half dozen strands of copper wire. His arms were covered -from wrist to elbow with bracelets of similar material. Thrown across -his right shoulder and drawn together beneath his left armpit was the -single cotton garment which constituted his only clothing. And in his -right hand he held a number of small sticks. These were important. If -the prosecution scored a point in the testimony, he planted a stick in -the ground on the right. If Wimba’s defense scored a point, he planted a -stick on his left. At the end of the trial, he would count the number of -sticks in each row and that side having the greater number would win.</p> - -<p>This much had been explained to the boys by Wimba’s assistant, an -intelligent young Kikuyu named Matse. But the latter’s command of -English was not much to lean upon, and he could not inform the boys of -every point in the case. From him, however, they had learned enough to -realize that Wimba was drawing near the end of his defense, and that the -prosecution had the better of it. The pile of sticks on the right was -larger.</p> - -<p>“If only Dad was here,” groaned Jack, in a whisper.</p> - -<p>But Mr. Hampton, together with Oscar Niellsen, their cameraman, was off -on an expedition to photograph wild animals at a water hole many miles -away.</p> - -<p>Frank squirmed at his companion’s side. “Jack, I’ve got an idea. It’s a -long chance, but it may work.”</p> - -<p>“What is it?”</p> - -<p>For a minute or two Frank whispered in Jack’s ear, and the latter’s face -lighted up.</p> - -<p>“What do you think of it?” asked Frank, in conclusion, drawing back. -“Will it work?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll chance it,” whispered Jack, in reply, nodding. “But you’ll have -to be quick. Now scud away with Matse and leave me to do my part.” -Without further waste of words or time, Frank drawing the young Kikuyu -interpreter after him drew back amongst the grass-thatched huts of the -Kikuyu village fringing the council square.</p> - -<p>His departure was unnoticed by the big crowd of tribesfolk gathered in a -circle, and hanging upon the progress of the trial.</p> - -<p>The minutes passed and with the passage of each one Jack grew more -anxious. But presently Frank again slipped into position beside him.</p> - -<p>“Thank goodness,” he whispered, breathlessly, “that we rigged up that -loudspeaker in the council tree last night.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Jack, “and that we haven’t had a chance to try it out -yet. Nobody knows it’s there, But was Bob all right?”</p> - -<p>“A little weak yet,” replied Frank. “But he took charge of operations, -all right. Was tickled to death.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we meant to give them a concert out of the council tree,” said -Jack. “But this will be better. Wonder we didn’t think of it before.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, well,” replied Frank, “so long as the idea came to us in time, what -does it matter?”</p> - -<p>“But Matse?” asked Jack, anxiously. “Does he understand the part he’ll -have to play? Will he handle it all right?”</p> - -<p>Frank smiled confidently. “When I give him the signal,” he said, “Matse -will do his part, never fear. He’d undertake anything in order to save -Wimba. But we’re not out of the woods yet, Jack. We don’t know what’s -going on. Oh, if we only had another boy who could speak English and -could translate this for us.”</p> - -<p>Jack gripped his companion’s arm. “Look, Frank, the trial is over. Now -Chief Ruku-Ru is about to pronounce sentence. See. Wimba is staring hard -at us. Poor fellow, he believes his end has come and what a look of dumb -appeal. Up, Frank, it’s time to act I’m sure.”</p> - -<p>From their place on the outskirts and a little to one side of the -semi-circle of savages, Frank and Jack rose with white determined faces -and advanced the few steps necessary to bring them face to face with -Chief Ruku-Ru seated opposite across the open space surrounding him.</p> - -<p>The tall warriors forming the chief’s guard, coal-black, six foot tall, -magnificent specimens of manhood, stood aghast. What did the white -strangers contemplate?</p> - -<p>Chief Ruku-Ru half rose from his chair in anger at this interruption. -But before he could give a command to have the boys seized, if such -discourtesy to his guests was contemplated, Jack holding himself proudly -erect addressed the throne.</p> - -<p>“Oh, great chief,” he cried in English, “we be strangers in your land, -it is true. Yet have we watched with interest the progress of this -trial, and your impartial conduct. But we believe you have been deceived -by liars amongst those who seek Wimba’s life. Therefore we appeal to our -gods to speak from the sky and tell you the truth. Wimba,” he commanded, -“tell the chief what I have said. Forget nothing. There will be a voice -from the sky and in the chief’s own language. Do not fear. But speak -quickly.”</p> - -<p>From his position between two tall Kikuyu warriors, Wimba who stood to -the left of the chief, had been listening in blankest astonishment. His -strong face with the thin lips and intelligent lines of many of the -Kikuyu tribesmen had betrayed as much despair as his self-restraint -under ordeal would permit him to betray, when Jack had begun to speak. -But now not only the despair but the succeeding astonishment -disappeared.</p> - -<p>“Speak Wimba,” commanded Jack. “Remember what you placed in the council -tree for us last night.”</p> - -<p>He was safe, he knew, in thus reminding Wimba, as none in the audience -had any knowledge of English. And he had explained enough of the -mysteries of radio the previous night, when the entire village slept -after heavy potations of native beer following a royal reception to the -new guests, to give Wimba confidence now that Jack would be able as he -promised to bring a voice seemingly out of the sky.</p> - -<p>At any rate, Wimba was in a desperate situation. He was ready to grasp -at any straw. Gazing about he saw the multitude of natives crowding -close, awaiting the verdict. He saw Chief Ruku-Ru open-mouthed at the -white boy’s interruption. He knew if he were going to act, he must act -at once. Otherwise the chief would order the interrupters seized, -perhaps; and most certainly would order him slain.</p> - -<p>And he could not contemplate being staked out on an ant hill with -equanimity.</p> - -<p>Bowing low, Wimba addressed Chief Ruku-Ru in a loud voice. The boys -could not understand his words, for he spoke in the Kikuyu tongue. But -they could perceive that he was making their startling announcement, for -over the chief’s face spread a look of startled bewilderment while -through the swarm of natives sweeping around behind them in a -semi-circle passed a murmur like a wind rippling the surface of a lake.</p> - -<p>They watched Wimba closely, and saw the perspiration burst on his face. -He was speaking in deadly earnestness, for it was a matter of life or -death to him.</p> - -<p>When Wimba ceased, Chief Ruku-Ru appeared to pull himself together and -he addressed a few sharp words to Wimba in a contemptuous tone.</p> - -<p>“He’s scared, but doesn’t want to show it,” was Jack’s whispered -comment.</p> - -<p>Frank nodded, but did not reply. His face was on that of Wimba. He knew -the crisis had come. And the prisoner’s words confirmed his belief.</p> - -<p>“Bring the voice from the sky, baas,” said Wimba. “The chief says he -does not believe, but he is afraid.”</p> - -<p>Frank was pale as death. Stepping a few paces in front of Jack, he -paused in the middle of the open space before Chief Ruku-Ru’s armchair -throne. Then lifting his eyes skyward, as if appealing to some Deity in -the brazen vault overhead, he put his fingers between his lips and -emitted a piercing whistle. Once, twice, thrice, it shrilled.</p> - -<p>Silence.</p> - -<p>Over all that assemblage of savage black men, over the group of bearers -cowering to one side, awaiting the verdict upon their comrade, over the -old gray-haired elders in a knot near the chief, over the tall warriors -of the guard with their spears, over the ring of warriors with their -shields of painted bullock and elephant hide on the ground before them, -over the pushing mass of women and children behind, spread a deathlike -silence.</p> - -<p>Every eye was lifted in awe. Every face gazed skyward. The words of the -white young men as interpreted by Wimba had spread unbelievable -amazement. They waited, fascinated, half believing, half terrified, for -the voice from the sky which the white men had promised.</p> - -<p>Then it came.</p> - -<p>From the top of the great council tree apparently boomed out a voice in -the Kikuyu tongue. It was a voice unknown to them all. It was a voice -the volume of which seemed supernatural. Yet every word was clear. And -this great voice cried:</p> - -<p>“Oh, Chief Ruku-Ru, great amongst the Kikuyus, I am the spirit invoked -by the white men. Their fate is in my keeping. I watch over them and -their servants. And I tell you that Wimba is guiltless. Let but a hair -of his head be touched and thy village shall be levelled, thy people -destroyed by plague, thy cattle die, thy springs dry up. I have spoken. -Set Wimba free or these things shall come to pass. It is an order.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chII' title='II: THE GODS SPEAK'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER II</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>THE GODS SPEAK</span> -</h2> - -<p>Through the ranks of the Kikuyu tribesmen behind and encircling them, -Jack and Frank could hear a murmur of fear that grew in volume until the -air was filled with cries of fright. The warriors forming the inner ring -of the circle shook with terror.</p> - -<p>So, too, did those tallest of the Kikuyus forming the chief’s own -bodyguard. As for Chief Ruku-Ru, over his face spread an ashen hue.</p> - -<p>But Frank’s programme was not yet complete. In the few minutes with Bob -and Matse in their tent beyond the grass-thatched village huts, he had -concocted a second step which he assumed would clinch their hold over -the chief and assure the complete terrorization of the Kikuyus. Now he -proceeded to put this into execution.</p> - -<p>Standing alone in the midst of the great circle Of savage blacks, facing -the ashen chief, noting the spears of the bodyguard trembling like -forest trees in a strong wind as the hands which held them shook with -terror, he was filled with satisfaction. So far all had gone well. Now -to strike the final blow.</p> - -<p>“Quick, Wimba,” he cried to the prisoner, who alone of that alien -multitude had any inkling as to the source of that mysterious voice from -the sky, yet who was not sufficiently civilized to be free entirely from -the terror which gripped the other blacks. “Quick, Wimba. Translate for -me.” And facing the chief, Frank cried:</p> - -<p>“Oh, Chief Ruku-Ru, thou hast heard the response of our gods. To show -you there is none concealed within the council tree, who might have said -these things, for it is thence came the voice, I ask that you order your -warriors to discharge their arrows into the midst of the foliage.”</p> - -<p>Well Frank knew that in the great hollow on the back side the main -trunk, so opportunely found the previous night, the loudspeaker and its -connections would be safe from stray arrows. Furthermore, the loop -aerial employed was securely lashed amidst a thick bushy mass of leaves, -and likewise would be safe from harm.</p> - -<p>But Chief Ruku-Ru was past giving any orders. He attempted to speak, -upon Wimba translating Frank’s words, but was unable to command his -stricken tongue. Nor did the warriors of his bodyguard upon hearing -Frank’s injunction show any inclination to shoot into the top of the -sacred tree. That they were terror-stricken was plain to be seen. And -equally plain was their reluctance to antagonize any supernatural agency -which Frank had invoked.</p> - -<p>This Frank had counted upon. Drawing his revolver, he levelled it at the -treetops and himself announced that he would make the test. This Wimba -translated. Again a murmur of awe swept through the encircling mass of -natives.</p> - -<p>Frank fired. Three shots he pumped into the treetop. Scarcely had the -echo died away, and before Chief Ruku-Ru or anybody else, either, for -that matter, could speak, than the voice from the air rang again in the -Kikuyu tongue.</p> - -<p>“I am a Spirit,” it cried. “Neither white man’s thunder nor Kikuyu -arrows can avail against me. Obey, O Chief Ruku-Ru, or thy country shall -be laid under my spell. Set Wimba free.”</p> - -<p>Neither Frank nor Jack could understand what was said. But well they -knew that Matse was merely uttering into the broadcasting phone in their -tent, while Bob manipulated the motor, those statements which upon his -signals Frank had arranged he should declaim. And that such was the case -was apparent from the profound and devastating effect upon the chief and -his followers.</p> - -<p>It was unnecessary for Wimba to translate the messages from the air for -the boys’ benefit.</p> - -<p>Chief Ruku-Ru managed upon the dying away of the mysterious voice to -gain some control over himself. Not for nothing was he chief. His -self-command was remarkable. The more so in view of the fact that he was -as profoundly impressed and terror-stricken by these manifestations -which Frank had evoked as was the meanest of his followers.</p> - -<p>He did not rise from his armchair throne, for the very good reason that -he feared his treacherous knees would give way beneath him. But he did -manage to speak.</p> - -<p>Pointing to the two guards who clasped Wimba on either side, he ordered -them to release their prisoner. To Frank and Jack, tense and anxious -regarding the outcome of their experiment, his words were as so much -Greek. But they were left in no doubt as to their meaning.</p> - -<p>The guards at once untied the cords binding Wimba’s wrists together -behind his back and unwound the heavier rope about his right ankle tying -him to a stake in the ground. Likewise they released their grip on his -arms. Then they bowed low to him.</p> - -<p>A moment Wimba stood uncertain. He was dazed. He could hardly believe -his good fortune. He gazed first at the chief, then at the encircling -natives, half of whom were poised for flight, fearing a further -demonstration by the white man’s god, and finally brought his eyes to -bear upon Frank.</p> - -<p>Then with an inarticulate cry of gratitude, he rushed across the -intervening space, and threw himself on the ground. Tears streaming from -his eyes, he clasped Frank’s feet and in broken sentences thanked him -for his deliverance.</p> - -<p>“Get up, Wimba,” commanded Frank. “Tell Chief Ruku-Ru that our Great -Spirit is about to bless him for this deed.”</p> - -<p>Once more Wimba faced the chief and in a voice trembling with feeling he -repeated Frank’s words.</p> - -<p>Then Frank inflated the final step in his hastily-thought-out plan. -Setting his fingers to his lips he whistled. But this time only twice. -It was the agreed signal.</p> - -<p>From the air boomed forth again the mysterious voice:</p> - -<p>“O, Chief Ruku-Ru, thy name shall be great as an administrator of -justice. Thy tribe shall be fruitful, thy cattle fat, thy springs filled -with sweet water. I have spoken.”</p> - -<p>Silence.</p> - -<p>“Let’s make our getaway now, Frank,” whispered Jack. “We’ve gotten out -of this a whole lot better than we had any right to expect. Don’t tempt -fate too much.”</p> - -<p>But filled with the confidence of success, Frank only smiled. He -whispered to Wimba, and the latter addressing Chief Ruku-Ru announced -that in honor of the occasion his white masters would that night bring -music from the air, and that they invited the whole tribe to assemble -after dusk before the council tree.</p> - -<p>With this, leaving the chief and all the assemblage stunned, the boys -and Wimba departed. As they moved away, the Kikuyus opened a passage for -them in grotesque haste. Now that the strain of the situation was over, -both Frank and Jack were seized with an insane desire to laugh. But they -managed to control their emotions, and to retain upon their faces a look -of the most solemn gravity. Only when at length they had passed out of -earshot of the multitude and had put the last of the grass-thatched huts -behind them, did they give way to their feelings. Then they flung -themselves prone into the long buffalo grass of the meadow separating -the village from their encampment and rolling over and over they simply -howled with laughter while Wimba watched them in the greatest -astonishment.</p> - -<p>“I’ll never forget that scene to my dying day,” laughed Jack, finally.</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” said Frank, weak from hysterical laughter. “Come on. Let’s find -Bob, and tell him how it worked out.”</p> - -<p>Before he could strike away, however, Jack sobering turned to Wimba. -Laying a hand on Frank’s shoulder, he said:</p> - -<p>“Wimba, here is the fellow who saved your life. It was his idea. He’ll -explain it all to you. It is to him you must give your thanks first, and -then to your comrade Matse who helped.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, come, Jack,” said Frank uncomfortably. But Wimba threw himself once -more at Frank’s feet.</p> - -<p>“My life belong you, baas,” he said in a choking voice.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chIII' title='III: CAMERA SHOOTING'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER III</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>CAMERA SHOOTING</span> -</h2> - -<p>In after days, Frank was to remember with thankfulness the gratitude of -Wimba for his “baas” or master. But now he was embarrassed, and making -light of the matter as possible without hurting the black’s feelings he -hastened along by Jack’s side across the meadow toward the clump of -tents which marked their encampment.</p> - -<p>Leaving Jack and Frank to regale the convalescent Bob with the tale of -what had occurred under the council tree, while Wimba and Matse put -their heads together and discussed the same event surrounded by the -awe-stricken native bearers from whom Wimba, at Frank’s warning, was -careful to withhold the real explanation, let us consider briefly how -the three white boys came to be here in Central Africa.</p> - -<p>For those of our readers who have not followed their adventures in other -parts of the world as set forth in previous volumes of The Radio Boys -Series a brief word or two of introduction is necessary. Jack Hampton -was the only son of an internationally famous engineer and explorer, -whose wife had died when Jack was only a youngster. Frank Merrick, too, -was orphaned and made his home with Bob Temple, whose father was his -guardian. The Hampton and Temple country estates on the far end of Long -Island, New York, adjoined each other. And the three boys, companions at -preparatory school and now at Yale, were the closest of friends.</p> - -<p>Supplied by wealthy parents with the means to gratify their scientific -bent, all three boys from the beginning of the popularity of Radio had -pushed their investigations in that field. And upon the numerous -adventures into which they had been drawn in one way or another in South -America, Alaska, their own land, and the Sahara Desert in Africa, they -had found Radio time and again prove of the greatest service.</p> - -<p>Now, as has been related in the previous chapters, it had again come to -the fore to help them at a crisis in their affairs.</p> - -<p>But how did they come to be again in Africa, where the previous year -they had discovered in an unexplored mountain region in the southern -Sahara a race of white men living in a high state of development and -treasuring ancient papyrus records indicating continued existence of the -race from the earliest period of the world’s history?</p> - -<p>That is easily explained.</p> - -<p>So widespread was the publicity showered upon the Radio Boys, as they -had become known, following their repeated exploits in out-of-the-way -corners of the world that one of the great motion picture concerns of -America had come to them some months previously with a fine offer. Would -they accompany a cameraman into Central Africa to explore little known -or entirely unknown regions for the purpose of filming wild animals in -their natural haunts and natives in the primitive state? That was the -proposition, and, needless to state, the motion picture concern -propounding it agreed to make acceptance worth the boys’ while.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton was included in the offer. And upon his advice, coupled with -that of Mr. Temple, the boys had yielded to their natural inclinations -and had accepted.</p> - -<p>“You boys have still some years of college ahead of you,” Mr. Temple had -said. “It may be unwise to interrupt your college career, for such an -expedition necessarily will be an interruption, as, undoubtedly, you -will be a year or two in the wilds. Nevertheless, Central Africa cannot -remain unexplored or unopened to civilization much longer. Here is a -chance such as may never come your way again.</p> - -<p>“Sometime, doubtless, Jack will want to become an engineer and follow in -his father’s footsteps, and Frank and Bob will want to take charge of -the export business, Frank’s father before he died and I, built up. But -there is no hurry about those matters. In the meantime, here is a chance -for the three of you to go on a big game hunting expedition with the -strangest of weapons—a motion picture camera. And you will be well paid, -to boot.</p> - -<p>“Of course, the fame you fellows have piled up brought you this -opportunity. Well, you deserve it. Three more rattle-brained rascals -with the ability always to fall on their feet I never saw.” He smiled at -them affectionately. “So,” he concluded, “I consent to Bob and Frank -going. And as Jack’s father already has consented for him and is, -besides, to head the expedition, I cannot see but what that settles the -matter.”</p> - -<p>Here, then, they were. From Mombasa on the east coast they had made -their way on the railroad to Nairobi. This small but important -settlement, which was the administrative center of Kenya Colony, marked -their last touch with civilization.</p> - -<p>Procuring bearers and guides, they had thence set out afoot into the -Kikuyu country. Day had followed day without striking incident. The -Kikuyus are a peaceful people, above the average of African -intelligence, inhabiting a magnificent country abounding in streams, -uplands and forest. It is one of the most healthful and fertile of -regions.</p> - -<p>Although, despite their proximity to the advance guards of white -civilization, the boys had found the Kikuyus still living in primitive -state, nevertheless they found them peaceful. Adventures had been few. -Not only had they seldom been in any danger from the natives, but wild -animals also had been scarce.</p> - -<p>It was not until they came to Chief Ruku-Ru’s territory where Mr. -Hampton had departed with Niellsen, the cameraman, for the dried-up bed -of a river where baboons were said to be in the habit of coming to dig -for water, that the first real adventure befell them. That was the -arrest and trial of Wimba, and his consequent release as related.</p> - -<p>It was only by accident that the boys were on hand. Ordinarily they -would have been with Mr. Hampton and Niellsen. But Bob’s succumbing to -fever had kept them behind to provide him with company and attendance. -Bob’s fever was not sufficiently strong enough to cause Mr. Hampton any -real anxiety, however, so, leaving the boys careful instructions -regarding the medicines to be given their comrade, he had departed with -Niellsen and a few bearers carrying camera, film box, etc.</p> - -<p>With this digression, let us return to camp. The quick-falling African -night was closing in and the boys were finishing preparations for the -concert which they had promised to bring out of the air to the assembled -villagers about the council tree.</p> - -<p>Frank and Jack had just completed a complete overhauling of the talking -machine which they planned to use and were dusting off the records of -martial band music which they considered would provide the most -acceptable concert for savage ears. Bob who was feeling considerably -improved was lolling on a camp cot, watching them.</p> - -<p>“Hey, fellows,” he said suddenly, “has it occurred to you that some -warrior more curious and less fearful than the rest might climb up into -the council tree? If one does, and if he finds the aerial or the -loudspeaker which you concealed there, good night. Even if he ran away -from it, he might damage it first so that your concert would be a -fizzle.”</p> - -<p>Jack stopped work, a record in one hand, dusting cloth in the other.</p> - -<p>“That’s right, Bob. Hadn’t thought of that.”</p> - -<p>But Frank looked unconcerned.</p> - -<p>“From what Wimba and Matse tell me,” he said, “Most Kikuyus wouldn’t -dare to climb into that sacred tree. I had a hard time getting even -those two to ascend it with me last night and help locate our traps. And -they’ve lived in Nairobi and come in contact with the whites and have -lost some of their native superstitions. And now that we caused the -voice of our mysterious spirit to emanate from the tree today, I feel -pretty sure there isn’t a Kikuyu whom you could pay to climb it.”</p> - -<p>Jack looked relieved, but Bob apparently was reluctant to relinquish his -idea and needed further convincing.</p> - -<p>“Just the same,” he said, “I believe we ought to send somebody over -there to scout around for us and see that everything is all right before -we pin our hopes on giving a concert. Why not send Matse?”</p> - -<p>“All right, if you think it’s necessary,” replied Frank. “Let’s call him -in.”</p> - -<p>Putting aside the records he had been cleaning, he went to the door of -the tent and, lifting the flap, poked his head out to utter the -necessary call which would bring Matse from the bearer’s camp nearby.</p> - -<p>But the call was not issued. Instead, Bob and Jack heard Frank utter a -muffled exclamation and then step swiftly out of the tent, letting the -flap fall behind him.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chIV' title='IV: WIMBA SAVED AGAIN'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER IV</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>WIMBA SAVED AGAIN</span> -</h2> - -<p>The two boys left behind in the tent stared perplexedly at each other in -the light of the lantern hanging from the pole and casting a steady if -not brilliant illumination over the canvas walls, bed rolls, packs and -camp chairs. From his bed roll or flea bag, as the boys adopting the -term of African explorers had come to call it, the outstretched Bob, -propped on one elbow, looked toward the tent flap which had fallen -behind his comrade and said:</p> - -<p>“Gosh, Frank went out of there as if somebody had grabbed him by the -hair. Wonder what he’s up to.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll go see,” said Jack, getting up from his seat on a folding camp -chair, and walking toward the exit.</p> - -<p>But just as he was putting out his hand to draw the flap aside there -came the sound of three revolver shots in rapid succession from nearby, -followed by a hubbub of native cries. Jack leaped through the exit, -drawing his automatic from its ever-ready position at his side, while -Bob jumped to his feet with all thought of weakness forgotten.</p> - -<p>Before he could follow Jack’s example, however, the tent flap was again -thrust aside and Jack returned followed by Frank.</p> - -<p>The latter’s face was white. In one hand he still gripped his automatic.</p> - -<p>Bob stared at his comrades in astonishment too great for a moment for -speech. And in the silence the yells of the natives could be heard -withdrawing into the distance.</p> - -<p>Frank flung himself into a camp chair. His revolver dropped from his -relaxed fingers, and he put up his hands to his face. Bob saw he was -trembling. Jack stooped and put an arm across his comrade’s shoulders.</p> - -<p>“What in the world’s the matter?” cried Bob, finding his tongue at last. -“What happened?”</p> - -<p>“I haven’t got it straightened out,” said Jack, shaking his head. “It -was all over when I got outside. Give Frank a minute’s time to collect -himself. He had a bad experience, I guess.” He patted the smaller -youth’s shoulder. “Take your time, old boy,” he said soothingly. “It’s -all over now.”</p> - -<p>Bob sank back onto his flea bag. This was too much for him, his -expression of profound bewilderment seemed to say.</p> - -<p>Frank looked up and essayed a smile. But it was ghastly in result.</p> - -<p>“Guess you fellows think I’m crazy,” he said, in a shaking voice. “But -it’s no joke to have to shoot at a man. I never get over the shakes when -it’s necessary.”</p> - -<p>“What?” cried Jack.</p> - -<p>“A man?” exploded Bob. “You shot at a man?” Frank nodded. “It was that -fellow who had it in for Wimba, I guess,” he said. “The one who charged -him with murdering his pal. That Kikuyu thief, you know.”</p> - -<p>With an effort, he pulled himself together, shook off Jack’s grip on his -shoulder, and got up. “I poked my head out of the tent to call Matse,” -he said, in a firmer voice. “The bearers have a big camp fire going. -Between here and the camp fire I could see Wimba. He was approaching our -tent. There was no mistaking his form, outlined against the glow of the -fire. Then I saw a man spring up from the ground as Wimba passed and -stalk after him.</p> - -<p>“I was scared for Wimba, because the other obviously meant mischief. And -it was plain Wimba was unaware of his presence. I didn’t want to yell a -warning because his pursuer might leap on Wimba.</p> - -<p>“So I started forward. But the fellow was creeping up on Wimba. I could -see them both like silhouettes against the fire glow. There was no time -to delay. I could see the rascal’s arm drawn back as if to bury a knife -in poor old Wimba’s shoulders.”</p> - -<p>“Then you shot?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>Frank nodded. “But I didn’t kill him,” he said. “I aimed to hit his -upraised hand, and I guess I did.”</p> - -<p>“But there were three shots,” objected Bob. “I counted them.”</p> - -<p>“I shot over his head,” said Frank.</p> - -<p>“What happened then?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“He got away. And the bearers are chasing him.”</p> - -<p>Bob’s face became grave. “That’s liable to get us into more trouble with -Chief Ruku-Ru.”</p> - -<p>“I sent Wimba to bring the boys back,” explained Frank. With a laugh, as -his self-possession returned he added: “That was the quickest way to put -an end to his expressions of gratitude.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Jack, “you certainly have put that fellow in your debt. -You’ve saved his life twice in one day.”</p> - -<p>With his usual modesty, Frank’s thought dwelt not on himself and his own -actions, but on the other fellow. “Poor Wimba,” he said. “He certainly -had a hard time of it.”</p> - -<p>The excited voices of the returning bearers could be heard without. Bob -sank back on his flea bag as Frank went out to hear Wimba’s report. With -an exclamation, Jack looked at his watch.</p> - -<p>“So much excitement made me almost forget Dad,” he remarked, going to -the corner where the radio sending apparatus was set up. Taking his seat -and adjusting several loose wire connections, he began manipulating -controls.</p> - -<p>Then he pulled the transmitter toward him and began announcing on a -200-metre wave length a resume of the day’s activities, telling in -detail of Wimba’s arrest and trial and of how he had been saved from -execution by Frank’s ruse for playing upon Chief Ruku-Ru’s superstition -through means of the loudspeaker installed in the council tree.</p> - -<p>“Luckily we keyed it to 300-metres, Dad,” he explained. “So when we talk -to you like this over your 200-metre length, the loudspeaker is -inoperative.”</p> - -<p>He than related the recent episode wherein Frank again had saved Wimba’s -life, and concluded with the explanation that they were about to -broadcast a concert of band music out of the council tree for the -further mystification of the Kikuyus.</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry about us, Dad,” he said, before hanging up. “We’re making -out all right, I expect. I don’t look for any more trouble, after what -happened today.”</p> - -<p>Bob grinned as Jack, his task concluded, turned around to face him.</p> - -<p>“Well, Mr. Reporter,” he said. “You’re becoming quite expert at making -these daily reports.” Jack laughed. “Just the same,” he commented, “it’s -not a bad idea, that of these individual portable sets. No matter where -Dad is, it’s a pretty safe bet that he heard me.”</p> - -<p>Each member of the expeditionary party was provided with a small but -powerful portable radio set of wide range. Thus whenever, as in the -present instance, anybody was absent on side expeditions by tuning in at -a fixed hour each night and morning, he received a resume of the day’s -activities and of any startling events occurring during the night, which -those remaining at the headquarters encampment broadcasted.</p> - -<p>These sets were the boys’ pride. All three had had a hand in their -manufacture. Each set was mounted in a cabinet the size of a portable -typewriter case. It contained a regenerative tuner, a detector and one -stage of audio amplification, and was a powerful receiver with two -tubes. The secret of its smallness was that it operated on ordinary -little flashlight batteries. The head set clamped into the inside of the -lid when not in use. Closed, the cabinet could be carried by means of a -handle. The whole business weighed less than ten pounds. Throw an -insulated wire over a tree, and one would be ready to listen-in.</p> - -<p>Almost as compact, in its way, was the sending apparatus which now -occupied a small collapsible table in one corner of the tent. Table and -all, including the motor, fitted into the oblong box yawning emptily on -the ground beneath at the present moment—a box two and a half feet by a -foot in breadth and nine inches in height.</p> - -<p>In its construction, the boys had labored to achieve an apparatus for -both sending and receiving. When one spoke, the vocal impact against a -sensitive diaphragm closed reception, but the minute the voice of the -speaker ceased, the instrument again was ready to receive.</p> - -<p>It was over this apparatus that the boys planned to broadcast a concert -for the benefit and mystification of the Kikuyus, and now that his -evening bulletins had been radioed to his father Jack got busy with -final preparations. Moving their small talking machine into position and -attaching the audion, he laid the records he and Frank had dusted within -reach for quick adjustment. All was now ready, and the only thing he -waited for was Matse’s report from a reconnaissance into the village -that their loudspeaker and apparatus concealed in the council tree had -neither been discovered nor tampered with.</p> - -<p>The council tree arrangement which had been installed the previous night -at a late hour, when all in the village were asleep, consisted of one of -the portable receiving sets with loop aerial and loudspeaker attachment.</p> - -<p>Really, the loop aerial had not been necessary. An insulated wire thrown -over the topmost branches of the tree would have been sufficient. -Installation of the small loop aerial had been considered by Bob as a -“piece of dog.” But Frank and Jack had insisted upon it, in the desire -to make their proposed concert a superlative success. And they -considered the clearness of the voice from the air during Wimba’s trial -ample justification of the extra trouble to which they had gone.</p> - -<p>Frank returned as Jack finished his preparations, with the announcement -that Matse reported the entire village assembled expectantly beneath the -council tree about a great fire.</p> - -<p>“So far as he could see or learn nobody has been into the council tree,” -Frank added. “And I guess that’s correct. These Kikuyus wouldn’t go into -that tree now, after what happened today, under any circumstances. So -your fears are groundless, Bob. Well, let’s go, Jack.”</p> - -<p>Jack arose and Bob with a humorous groan made his way to his comrade’s -place at the radio apparatus.</p> - -<p>Because it was bad for his health to be abroad in the night air, he had -been elected to act as operative.</p> - -<p>“You fellows have all the best of it,” he said.</p> - -<p>Frank and Jack grinned sympathetically, then set out for the village -center. They wanted to be on hand to see how Chief Ruku-Ru and his -people took the concert.</p> - -<p>Beside them trailed Wimba, who henceforth was to constitute himself -Frank’s faithful shadow, while ahead went the chattering bearers with -the exception of four left behind as guards over the encampment.</p> - -<p>Frank looked back once over his shoulder. “I suppose Bob will be all -right,” he said. “Only I don’t quite like the idea of leaving him -alone.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, come on,” said Jack. “To be sure he’ll be all right.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chV' title='V: THE KIKUYUS DANCE'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER V</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>THE KIKUYUS DANCE</span> -</h2> - -<p>So mystified were Chief Ruku-Ru and the Kikuyus by the concert that it -was apparent the presence of the portable radio set with loudspeaker in -the uppermost branches of the spreading council tree was totally -unsuspected. And all lingering doubts as to whether any of the Kikuyus -had ventured into the tree and discovered the apparatus were swept from -the minds of Frank and Jack.</p> - -<p>For both it was a weird experience. Under the silver radiance of the -African moon, now at the full, the square was bright. Any lingering -shadows not dispelled by that flood of moonlight, disappeared, -vanquished before the dancing gleams of a great fire. For the night here -on the uplands was cool and the savages had built a roaring fire which -crackled and leaped in the center of the square. To one side sat Chief -Ruku-Ru in his armchair throne, surrounded by his bodyguard of tall -warriors with spears erect, while in a semi-circle about the fire and -facing the council tree squatted row upon row of natives. And beyond -them on every hand shown the conical roofs of the big huts.</p> - -<p>At first alarmed at the music, the natives soon got over their fears and -in no time at all, as Jack called to Frank’s attention, they were -swaying to the strains. Jack decided to take advantage of this tendency -on the part of the rhythm-loving blacks. On leaving their encampment, he -and Frank had noted on a slip of paper the names of the records Bob -intended to play and their order. Between each two records Bob was to -permit the lapse of a couple of minutes, in order that his comrades -might be able to announce to Chief Ruku-Ru and the Kikuyus what the next -number would be. In this way, they could add to their reputation as -wizards, for wizards the Kikuyus believed them to be.</p> - -<p>“The next number is going to be one of those Hawaiian things,” he -whispered to Frank, as the strains of a familiar Sousa march drew near -their conclusion. “Let’s announce to Chief Ruku-Ru that we are about to -summon out of the air a piece of music for the especial benefit of the -wonderful Kikuyu dancers of whom we have heard so much.”</p> - -<p>“Good idea,” Frank nodded. “That Hawaiian umty-tum will be just about -their speed.”</p> - -<p>Jack whispered to Wimba and, upon conclusion of the march, the latter -arose in the scheduled interval before the next number was to be -broadcasted, and made Jack’s announcement. That it met with friendly -reception was apparent to the two boys by the stir of interest which -went through the crowd.</p> - -<p>“Who do you think will dance?” whispered Frank.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” said Jack. “Perhaps everybody.”</p> - -<p>The music began and at the first strains of the wailing syncopated air -with its suggestion of beaten tom-toms, of jungles and of tropic nights, -the Kikuyus uttered low cries of approval. From their place near Chief -Ruku-Ru the boys looking out over that assemblage saw that now, indeed, -they had won the hearts of the savages.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, from amidst the ranks of the natives squatting on their heels, -the lithe slim figure of a young Kikuyu warrior sprang into the wide -space about the fire.</p> - -<p>Firelight falling upon him illumined the gleaming muscles of his body, -naked except for breech clout. He stood a moment, still, rigid as a -statue, then began to turn slowly about as if on a pivot.</p> - -<p>“A black Apollo,” whispered Jack.</p> - -<p>The music swelled, the note of savagery became more insistent. It was as -if the invisible orchestra were playing for this particular audience, as -if into the players had crept the very spirit of this night in a remote -corner of central Africa. Jack and Frank both felt a strange stirring -within them as if a response to the music, to the occasion. But what -they experienced in their cultivated minds was but a trifle, the merest -breath, compared to the effect of the music upon the savage, uncivilized -minds, of the blacks about them.</p> - -<p>Wimba and Matse began to sway with the rest. A glassy look came into -their eyes.</p> - -<p>But they were strangers in this community. They did not dare to get to -their feet.</p> - -<p>Not so the young men of the Kikuyus. As the black Apollo ceased pivoting -and began to circle the fire with arms rigid against his sides, body -swaying, knees lifting high like those of a horse on parade, other young -warriors leaped from the audience into the cleared space about the fire. -Falling into line behind the leader, they circled in a dance at first -rather stately but soon becoming madder and madder in movement until, -upon the concluding strains of the record, they were flashing by the -boys in a whirling, swirling mass of legs and gleaming ebon bodies.</p> - -<p>“Wow,” said Frank, expelling a long breath as, following the subsidence -of the music, the dancers ceased and melted back into the audience. -“That was some sight. What a shame Niellsen wasn’t here to take a movie -of that?”</p> - -<p>“Certainly is a shame,” agreed Jack. “Can’t you just see the audience in -some movie palace back home, sitting there in the dark, when suddenly -this moonlit village square with its fire and its circle of blacks -flashes on the screen? Then the dancers begin! Can’t you just see it? -Oh, boy.”</p> - -<p>The Hawaiian records had been the last number of the programme. At -Jack’s prompting, Wimba bowing low to Chief Ruku-Ru made this -announcement. In reply, the chief spoke at such length that the boys, -unable to understand a word of what was said, became impatient. Then -Wimba turned to them, his eyes big.</p> - -<p>“Chief Ruku-Ru, him say tomolla him Kikuyus give warrior dance for um -baas,” interpreted Wimba. “Him say white wizards give um good time -tonight, him give white wizards good time tomolla. Warrior dance when -sun come up.”</p> - -<p>Jack let out a low whistle. “Tell Chief Ruku-Ru we are very much -pleased,” said Jack, “and we’ll be there.”</p> - -<p>Wimba started to speak, but Frank with an exclamation checked him.</p> - -<p>“Ask him, too, Wimba, whether we can take pictures of the dance,” he -commanded. “He may be scared of it, because we haven’t taken any movies -here as yet, and he hasn’t become familiar with it.”</p> - -<p>“He saw a music box once,” interpolated Jack. “And now he thinks every -box with a handle to be turned ought to produce music.”</p> - -<p>Frank grinned. Then, realizing that they had not yet thanked Chief -Ruku-Ru for his invitation to witness the warrior dance and military -tactics, he turned to the interpreter and ordered him to speak up. A man -of superior parts, Wimba could be trusted to couch acceptance in the -floweriest of diplomatic language.</p> - -<p>The main body of Kikuyus were melting away into the moonlit darkness, -doubtless discussing at a great rate the marvellous music played by the -spirits of the air at the bidding of the young white wizards. The sound -of laughter and high voices came muffled out of the darkness. As for -Chief Ruku-Ru, he sat watching the boys, still surrounded by his -bodyguard of tall black warriors, awaiting a reply.</p> - -<p>Wimba spoke at length, the chief listening attentively. And when upon -the interpreter’s conclusion, he replied, the boys saw by the relieved -expression on Wimba’s features, even before he interpreted for their -benefit, that the chief had given the required permission for the boys -to photograph the warrior dance.</p> - -<p>Such, indeed, proved to be the case. And, when diplomatic exchanges at -last having been brought to a conclusion, the boys made their way back -to their encampment followed by Wimba, Matse and the bearers, they were -both jubilant and excited.</p> - -<p>Contrary to Frank’s earlier formless fears regarding possible danger to -Bob through his being left alone, nothing untoward had occurred during -their absence. In fact, the big fellow was feeling better than for days, -the medicine left for him by Mr. Hampton having routed the fever. By the -morrow, he believed he would be back to normal. And this was a -satisfaction, as it would enable him to witness the military tactics and -warrior dance.</p> - -<p>“Set that alarm clock for an hour before sun-up,” said Frank to Jack -who, as the lightest sleeper, always took charge of waking everybody.</p> - -<p>“All right,” said Jack. “But Wimba will see to getting us up, never -fear. That fellow has the faculty of waking at any hour he decides upon. -It’s a habit which all natives possess, he tells me.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a good thing Niellsen gave us some lessons in the operation of a -motion picture camera,” said Frank. “I wouldn’t have dared to try to -take that picture stuff in front of the council tree by moonlight, -because I don’t know enough about the game and would just have ruined a -couple of hundred precious feet of film. But at this daylight stuff -tomorrow, I expect we’ll be all right.”</p> - -<p>With this the others agreed. The photographic equipment brought in by -the expedition consisted of four film cameras, three Graflex hand -cameras for obtaining “stills,” many film packs for the latter, and -eighty thousand feet of film for the former.</p> - -<p>At Nairobi was a motor truck outfitted as dark room and developing -plant. Originally, it had been Mr. Hampton’s intention to take this -motor truck with them on their wanderings, but so rough had proved to be -some of the country negotiated on the first trip out from the -settlement, that it had been decided to leave the plant thereafter at -Nairobi so long as the party remained in the Kikuyu country.</p> - -<p>Before the boys retired to sleep, there came a low call from outside and -then Wimba parted the tent flap and looked in.</p> - -<p>“Him funny bizness here, baas,” said he, as Jack advanced to meet him. -“Wimba and Matse take um down.”</p> - -<p>With that, he lifted the tent flap and thrust within the loudspeaker, -loop aerial and portable radio set which several nights before, under -the direction of Frank and Jack, he had installed in the council tree.</p> - -<p>“By George, I forgot all about that,” said Jack, taking the articles one -by one as Wimba passed them into the tent.</p> - -<p>“You’re a good scout, Wimba,” said Frank approvingly. “I forgot, too.”</p> - -<p>Wimba shrugged and ducked. “No good let um b’long council tree too -long,” he said. “Mebbe Chief send um man up pretty soon to have -look—see.”</p> - -<p>“He’s right, fellows,” growled Bob from his cot. “These people are -curious as monkeys, and after the novelty wore off they’d be sure to -investigate.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Jack, as Wimba dropped the flap behind him and departed, -“thanks to Wimba, when Chief Ruku-Ru goes to investigate now he’ll not -find anything. And certainly the old radio saved Wimba’s life and pulled -us out of a bad hole.”</p> - -<p>“Besides really being responsible for getting us a chance to see the -Chief’s army at drill tomorrow,” said Frank sleepily. “Well, fade out, -will you? I’m dog tired.”</p> - -<p>Presently all three were sunk in slumber—a sleep tinged with pleasant -thoughts of the novel sight in store for the morrow, but untouched by -premonition of the perils to follow.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chVI' title='VI: A SURPRISE ATTACK'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER VI</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>A SURPRISE ATTACK</span> -</h2> - -<p>The night passed without disturbance, and dawn found the boys with the -ubiquitous Wimba clinging like a shadow at Frank’s heels, stationed on a -rise of ground west of the village.</p> - -<p>The ground here rolled away in an open treeless plain filled with grass -of vivid hue to where a half mile distant a line of trees marked the -beginning of a forest. It was rolling country, rich green pasture -uplands with clumps of forest here and there, and all rising in the -background to a line of low hills that stretched away as far as the eye -could see.</p> - -<p>A never-ending source of surprise to the boys was the striking -similarity of this country to the choicest New York State or New England -landscapes. Evidences of civilized occupation such as farmhouses -nestling amidst the greenery, the twin steel ribbons of railway, or -stone fences or hedges, of course, were lacking. And the colors were -more vivid, under the brilliant sunshine and seen through air untainted -by the smoke of cities, than at home. The greens were greener, and the -purples and greys of distance were deeper. Nevertheless, with cultivated -fields and herds of cattle in the distant meadows, the similarity to -scenes of home was so striking that on this particular morning Jack, at -least, experienced a pang of homesickness.</p> - -<p>This feeling was soon dispelled, however, for an exclamation from Frank, -echoed by Bob who ventured forth for the first time in days, recalled -Jack to the present. Following the indication of Frank’s pointing -finger, he saw the distant forest suddenly spout warriors.</p> - -<p>“By George, what a sight,” he cried as, the long slanting rays of the -newly-risen sun full upon them, the warriors advanced, five hundred -strong, spread out in open order, with the beautifully decorated hide -shields carried by the front rank gleaming in the sunlight.</p> - -<p>Frank already was turning the crank of the motion picture camera, while -Chief Ruku-Ru, separated for once from his arm chair, stood to one side -watching him with absorbed interest. The advance of his drilling -warriors meant nothing to the dusky monarch, for it was something with -which he was familiar. This strange machine, into which the young white -wizard peered, while slowly turning a crank, was, on the other hand, a -mystery.</p> - -<p>So engaged in watching Frank was the chief that he did not at once note -the panting messenger who came tearing up to the royal party from the -direction of the village in the rear.</p> - -<p>Then, as his eye fell on the boy, for such he was, the chief spoke a few -words to him sharply. The youth replied between gasps, more at length.</p> - -<p>Watching the advancing warriors, who now had come to a halt in the -middle of the plain, where they knelt and took cover behind their -shields, only their round black heads and long lances showing above, the -boys paid no attention to this by-play.</p> - -<p>Not so Wimba, however, for as the messenger poured out his tale, he -clutched Jack by an arm and, having obtained his attention, repeated -hastily what was being said.</p> - -<p>“Him bad tribe raid village,” he said. “Carry off cattle and women. Boy -escape and make tell Chief Ruku-Ru.”</p> - -<p>“What! Great Scott!”</p> - -<p>“What’s that? What’s that?” cried Bob, excitedly. “Say, Jack, if raiders -cleaned out the village, maybe they went after our camp, too.”</p> - -<p>Frank, unhearing, continued to crank his camera.</p> - -<p>But Jack was dismayed. Bob’s words had aroused his own fears. Much of -their paraphernalia was at the camp. Other cameras, thousands of feet of -film, both taken and unused, clothing, gifts for various chiefs yet to -be encountered, rifles and ammunition. These latter had been left -behind, and the boys wore only their automatics. Above all, their radio -apparatus had been left in camp. Clumsy handling might destroy it -irreparably.</p> - -<p>“Find out all you can, Wimba,” he commanded sharply. “Did the raiders go -near our camp?”</p> - -<p>“Maybe, they missed it,” he added hopefully to Bob. “You see we lie to -one side and out of sight of the village.”</p> - -<p>Wimba was rapidly interrogating the chief who, with a word or two, -dismissed him, then turned to face the plain and using his arms as a -semaphore went through a set of gestures which quite obviously were some -kind of signal.</p> - -<p>That they were so understood by the warriors was apparent, for the -latter leaped forward in a tearing run that ate up the distance.</p> - -<p>In the meantime, Frank, all unaware as yet of what was going forward, -cranked away for dear life, delighted with the marvellous picture he was -obtaining, while the others questioned Wimba as to the chief’s reply.</p> - -<p>“Him say no know,” replied Wimba. “Raid come from other side. Mebbe your -camp, baas, not found.”</p> - -<p>“Anyhow, we left a half dozen bearers with guns on guard,” said Bob. -“They’d be able to stand off these savages armed only with bows and -arrows.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, if they didn’t get scared and run,” said Jack. “Look at those -fellows come. They’ll be here in a minute. What’s the chief going to -do?” Frank for the first time withdrew his head from the camera hood.</p> - -<p>“Say, you chaps,” he cried delightedly. “You ought to see this. It’ll -make one great picture.” He was about to place his eyes again to the -machine and resume grinding, but Bob gripped him by an arm, and in a few -words apprised him of what was up.</p> - -<p>To within twenty-feet of the chief, who had advanced several paces in -front of the boys, charged his warriors at a furious rate. Then they -suddenly halted, the whole mass, as if turned to stone. Execution of the -maneuver in such dramatic fashion left the watching boys breathless. For -a moment they forgot their own worries in admiration of the Kikuyus, and -Frank mourned loudly because Bob had restrained him from resuming camera -operations in time to get that last picture.</p> - -<p>The black warriors gazed expectantly at their chief, and the latter -addressed them in a loud voice. When he had ceased, angry cries went up, -and then, like a wave splitting on a rock, the warriors without more -ado, parted into two divisions and, flowing on either side of the chief -and the dumbfounded boys, charged over the hill toward the village.</p> - -<p>“Come on, fellows, here’s a chance to see some action. Maybe, to take a -hand in it,” cried Bob, starting in pursuit.</p> - -<p>Chief Ruku-Ru had placed himself at the head of his men and departed on -the run before the boys could so much as ask his intentions. The blacks -were still flowing along, on either side of the boys.</p> - -<p>“But my camera,” wailed Frank, who was a great movie fan. “I can’t tote -all this stuff myself. And I don’t want to leave it behind. Think of the -chance to get a real battle picture.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll take the dratted thing,” said Bob. And sweeping the legs of the -tripod together, he gathered up tripod and camera, and started away, -automatic already out and gripped in his free hand.</p> - -<p>Jack picked up one reel case and Frank another, and, with Wimba and -Matse clinging to their heels, away they went in pursuit of the running -warriors.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chVII' title='VII: BOB MEETS THE BONE CRUSHER'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER VII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>BOB MEETS THE BONE CRUSHER</span> -</h2> - -<p>Closer to civilization than most native tribes, by reason of the British -development of Kenya Colony, yet the Kikuyus still cling to primitive -customs. In nothing is this more apparent than in their methods of -warfare and in the instruments employed.</p> - -<p>Instead of paying many head of cattle to rascally traders for the trade -guns smuggled to many tribes, they continue to use bows and arrows and -spears, both for making war and for hunting.</p> - -<p>So now as the boys galloped along at the tail end of the charging -warriors of Chief Ruku-Ru, automatics in hand, they realized that if it -came to close quarters with the enemy they would be of material -assistance to their hosts by reason of the superiority of their weapons. -For the enemy were Kikuyus, too, although of another clan, this big race -being scattered in thirteen loosely-organized clans over a wide -territory. And the raiders would be no differently armed than their -hosts.</p> - -<p>Down the hill, through a cover of woods, and into the village dashed -Chief Ruku-Ru and his warriors, the boys at the rear but holding their -own.</p> - -<p>Loud cries from the foremost sounded warning that the enemy was still on -the ground. At once the blacks ahead of them leaped to take cover behind -the nearest huts, and began creeping forward from hut to hut, crouching -and running close to the ground in covering open spaces.</p> - -<p>The boys were not slow to follow this example, the wisdom of which -became apparent when arrows began whizzing overhead, burying themselves -in the thatched roofs of the huts or smacking with a dull thudding sound -against the mud walls.</p> - -<p>Sticking closely together, the three boys with Wimba, Matse and a number -of bearers at their heels, took shelter behind one of the largest huts -of the village as the rain of arrows increased.</p> - -<p>So loud and close at hand now were the shouts that it was clear the -enemy had been surprised by Chief Ruku-Ru before they could run away -with their prisoners and loot. From the sounds, the hottest part of the -fighting was not far away. In fact, Bob, who had leaned the tripod and -film camera against the mud wall of the hut behind which they were -momentarily sheltered, and had advanced to the nearest corner past which -swept a perfect storm of arrows, returned with the report that in his -opinion the main fight was being waged on the other side of the hut.</p> - -<p>“And no wonder,” said Jack “Don’t you fellows recognize this hut? Well, -I can’t blame you, for you’re seeing it for the first time from the -rear. But this is Chief Ruku-Ru’s palace, I’m sure. Look. You can see -the tip of a tree on the other side from here. There’s only one tree -large enough to be seen like that, and that’s the council tree. Yes sir, -fellows, this is the Chief’s palace.”</p> - -<p>“Probably surprised the raiders looting it,” asserted Frank.</p> - -<p>“May be so,” said Bob. “The chief has forty wives, you know. And these -raiders undoubtedly came to carry the women away as captives. Women do -the work amongst the Kikuyus, and they’re pretty valuable critters.”</p> - -<p>“Listen to that,” interrupted Jack, as louder shouts gave warning of -more intense fighting. “And, by George,” he added, in high excitement, -clutching Bob by an arm, “look there. Those are some of Chief Ruku-Ru’s -men, aren’t they?”</p> - -<p>He pointed to several figures, crossing the open space by the side of -the “palace,” speeding back toward the rear.</p> - -<p>“Running away,” said Bob. “They’re getting the worst of it.”</p> - -<p>He stepped back, gazing upward.</p> - -<p>“I can do it,” he cried. “Give me a hand, Jack. Cup your hands for a leg -up.”</p> - -<p>“Do what?”</p> - -<p>“Scale that wall,” cried Bob. “Mud wall’s about eight feet high. We can -swarm over it, drop into the chief’s courtyard, and then from behind the -wall on the other side we can attack the enemy in the rear. Come on.”</p> - -<p>“Right,” said Jack, putting his back against the wall and cupping his -hands.</p> - -<p>Without more words. Bob set a foot therein and springing gripped the top -of the wall and pulled himself up. Then, facing about, he lay down, with -his arms hanging. And Jack, leaping upward, seized his wrists and was -pulled to position beside him.</p> - -<p>“All right, Frank,” cried Bob.</p> - -<p>“Take this camera first,” Frank answered. “If you fellows are going to -take potshots at the enemy from the chief’s domicile, I want some -pictures of it.”</p> - -<p>“Hurry, then,” cried Bob, impatiently. And Frank obediently hoisted -aloft the camera on its long tripod, which was seized and whisked to -position over the wall. Frank was boosted up by Wimba and hauled to -position beside his comrades.</p> - -<p>“Me come, too, baas,” pleaded the faithful fellow.</p> - -<p>So Wimba, although without firearms to render him a useful ally, -likewise was hoisted to the wall.</p> - -<p>Then all four leaped down into the courtyard, where ordinarily Chief -Ruku-Ru stabled his milch cows. But now the courtyard, deep in dung, was -deserted. The raiders already had driven off the animals.</p> - -<p>In one corner of the spacious yard lay two guards outstretched in the -sun. The boys shivered.</p> - -<p>“Killed,” said Bob, gritting his teeth. “Well, these rascals need a -lesson. Come on.”</p> - -<p>Yells from the other side of the opposite mud wall apprised them their -surmise was correct. The fight was raging there, and with uncommon -fierceness. But Chief Ruku-Ru’s forces were getting the worst of it. The -raiders were too many for them.</p> - -<p>Bob leaped to the low roof of a cow shed built against the wall, which -overtopped it by two or three feet. Crouching behind this bulwark, he -peered out. He found he faced the great village square. The two forces -were fighting at close quarters. The air was filled with arrows. Here -and there lay fallen warriors, never to move again, while others were -dragging themselves away with ghastly wounds upon them.</p> - -<p>It was easy to distinguish between the two forces. Easy for one thing, -if for no other. Not because of the fact that one side had herded cattle -and wailing women indiscriminately into one corner of the square at its -back. That betokened the enemy host, right enough. But a clearer -indication was afforded by the two leaders.</p> - -<p>Chief Ruku-Ru, strongly built, a ferocious fighter, had thrown aside -shield, spear, bow, and armed only with a wicked knife was engaged in -hand to hand combat with a gigantic negro similarly accoutred who wore -in addition a tuft of golden eagle feathers in his hair.</p> - -<p>These were the respective chieftains, and their fighting men stood back -to permit them free play. In fact, in the vicinity of the two warriors, -all other fighting had died away.</p> - -<p>The boys were unaware that Chief Ruku-Ru’s opponent was known as the -Bone Crusher, and that his fame as a terrible fighter was widespread -amongst all the Kikuyu clans. But that this individual combat had -dwarfed all others for the moment was apparent. Not only those warriors -in their vicinity had ceased fighting, as if by common consent, but over -the whole square in a trice spread a truce that reached to the farthest -combatants. The shouts of the fighters, the wails of the captive women, -died away. Only the panting of the two gladiators could be heard.</p> - -<p>Jack and Frank had clambered into position beside Bob, with Wimba close -at Frank’s heels. Frank, moreover, as soon as he saw what was going on -had set up the camera and already was busy grinding away as if with no -thought except to obtain a motion picture of that contest.</p> - -<p>“Like something out of the old tales of Homer,” whispered Jack.</p> - -<p>Bob nodded, half absently. He was too busy watching that strange contest -to waste time drawing comparisons with the past. Biggest of the boys, a -youth of gigantic frame although still only in his teens. Bob was one of -the cleverest amateur boxers and wrestlers in America. Moreover, -although not exactly pugnacious of spirit, yet he did frankly and -openly, as he was wont to express it, “love a good fight.”</p> - -<p>And a good fight he was beholding now.</p> - -<p>Crouching, wicked knives clasped in their right hands, left arms -advanced with the long cotton garments betokening their chiefhood ripped -from their shoulders and wrapped about the forearm as guard, the two -warriors circled each other, looking for an opening. What Chief Ruku-Ru -lacked in height and weight by comparison with his huger opponent, he -made up in superior speed and litheness. The pliant muscles of his back -and thighs could be seen writhing beneath the ebon skin of his naked -body as he leaped this way and that.</p> - -<p>That his blows did not all miss soon became apparent as first one and -then another long rip gushing crimson appeared on the black skin of the -Bone Crusher. The latter, on the other hand, try as he would, could not -get past Chief Ruku-Ru’s guard. His knife struck and struck again, but -always as if by a miracle Chief Ruku-Ru’s padded forearm fended off the -blow at the last second of time.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, the Bone Crusher, rendered desperate by his foe’s superiority -with the knife, goaded into insensate fury by the repeated slashing to -which he was subjected, tossed his knife high into the air and with a -vast bellow leaped upon Chief Ruku-Ru. But he was canny, this Bone -Crusher, and even as he sprang he flung the flowing cotton garment -hanging from his left arm over the other’s head.</p> - -<p>Thus confused and blinded, Chief Ruku-Ru lashed out wildly with his -knife, but without being able to see to direct his blows.</p> - -<p>Wrapping his long arms about the other’s waist, the Bone Crusher whirled -him aloft and sent him spinning like a giant top into the midst of Chief -Ruku-Ru palsied followers.</p> - -<p>But he was not left long to enjoy his victory. Before his forces could -renew the combat, before the stricken followers of Chief Ruku-Ru could -turn and flee, a new assailant appeared.</p> - -<p>He was none other than Bob. Leaping down from the mud wall before Jack -and Frank could move to restrain him, big Bob launched himself like a -thunderbolt at the Bone Crusher.</p> - -<p>A shout of warning from his henchmen at his back caused the gigantic -black to face about. But before he could put up any defense. Bob shot -forward as if for a low football tackle. Many a time on the field he had -swooped in just such irresistible fashion at the legs of an opposing -player. But this time his intention was not merely to bring his man -down.</p> - -<p>His hands closed about the ankles of the Bone Crusher, and then he -straightened up with startling swiftness. And for all his bulk, the Bone -Crusher went hurtling through the air, over Bob’s shoulders, to fall, -not amongst his own followers, but into the ranks of the enemy.</p> - -<p>Had he fallen on his head, his neck might have snapped. For never had -Bob put into that particular hold the viciousness he had employed now.</p> - -<p>But in falling the Bone Crusher brushed against a warrior. His course -was deflected. And instead of alighting on his head and shoulders, he -fell on his side.</p> - -<p>With a catlike agility not to be expected in a man so huge, he bounded -up from the earth with an ear-splitting roar of rage, and ran foaming at -the mouth toward Bob. Just what he intended will never be known.</p> - -<p>Bob saw him coming and set himself. As the Bone Crusher lunged forward. -Bob sidestepped and launched a triphammer blow with his right fist. It -caught the Bone Crusher behind the point of the jaw with a thud that -sounded like a dull explosion, and the huge Negro chieftain collapsed as -if a mountain had fallen upon him. His great body jerked once or twice -then lay still.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chVIII' title='VIII: THE TIDE TURNS'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER VIII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>THE TIDE TURNS</span> -</h2> - -<p>The tide was turned. The next moment, as Bob, flushed with victory, -prepared to leap in amongst the wavering mass of the Bone Crusher’s -followers, Jack and Frank appeared at his side. Too well they knew the -big fellow’s rashness when his blood was up to hold back any longer. Not -that they had been holding back, however. So quickly had Bob acted that -the passage of time since he had leaped down from the top of the wall -and made his sudden attack on the Bone Crusher could be measured in -seconds.</p> - -<p>Jack and Frank had followed at once, Wimba at Frank’s heels like a -faithful dog. Now they ranged themselves beside their comrade.</p> - -<p>“Steady, old thing,” warned Jack, as Bob with a wild gleam in his eyes -appeared on the verge of tackling the enemy host single-handed. “Let’s -stick together. You’ve thrown an awful scare into them.”</p> - -<p>In fact, the Bone Crusher’s men showed little stomach for fighting, that -is, for facing Bob. The mute evidence of the latter’s prowess was at his -back, where the prone figure of the Bone Crusher lay without a quiver, -since that blow on the point of the jaw.</p> - -<p>But the lull in hostilities did not last. Chief Ruku-Ru’s men were -heartened by the turn of events in their favor. They crowded forward -with sharp yells. The flight of arrows into the mass of the enemy began -anew.</p> - -<p>“I haven’t the heart to shoot to kill,” muttered Frank. “But if they -realize we have firearms, they may flee more quickly. I’m going to shoot -over their heads.”</p> - -<p>He suited action to word, and began pumping away with his automatic. It -was the last thing needed to hasten the growing panic. In a trice, -conditions were reversed. The Bone Crusher’s men broke into headlong -flight, dashing away pell mell amongst the huts on the opposite side of -the village square. And the villagers streamed past the boys in pursuit.</p> - -<p>They found themselves practically alone in the square. Pursuit drew away -into the distance. The victorious vengeful cries of the villagers -mingling with the screams of the vanquished came back to them. Dazedly, -they gazed about at the numerous evidences of the battle just ended, in -the cowering women abandoned by their captors and not yet fully -realizing their fortunate rescue, in the bodies of a score of men, -including that of Chief Ruku-Ru and the Bone Crusher, and in arrows -scattered here and there.</p> - -<p>“By golly, Bob,” said Frank, whose face was pale, as he thought of the -peril into which his big chum had launched himself, “I’ve seen you do a -lot of foolish things, but that was the worst. To tackle that giant.”</p> - -<p>“Huh,” was all the other deigned to reply.</p> - -<p>Jack was bending above the form of Chief Ruku-Ru, and a moment later he -straightened up and beckoned the others to join him.</p> - -<p>“Unconscious but beginning to mutter,” he said. “He’ll recover soon. I -think his right shoulder is dislocated, but I don’t believe he has any -serious injury. Let’s carry him to his hut, and I’ll try to set his -shoulder.”</p> - -<p>With Wimba’s aid, the four boys bore the body of the chief to the door -of his hut, from which one of the chief’s wives who hastened to join -them brought out a pallet. On this they laid the unconscious form, while -Jack worked at setting the dislocated shoulder. In this he was -successful as, like all the boys, he was well drilled in administering -first aid and performing rude surgery such as mishaps in the wilds -necessitated.</p> - -<p>Wimba and Matse rounded up the scattered bearers, and several were -despatched to the boys’ camp to obtain the medical kit. They returned -quickly, bringing the welcome intelligence that the camp had not been -disturbed by the raiders who, approaching the village from an opposite -direction, doubtless were unaware of its presence.</p> - -<p>Thereupon, all three boys busied themselves administering to the -wounded, a score of whom were collected. Women were pressed into -service, as all the able-bodied men had joined in the pursuit of the -routed enemy. Not until many hours of toil under the hot sun had been -spent, however, was their self-imposed task of mercy completed. Then all -the wounded had been attended to and made as comfortable as possible in -the biggest hut of the chief’s enclosure, which had been commandeered as -hospital.</p> - -<p>It was nightfall, and most of the warriors had returned, under the -leadership of Chief Ruku-Ru’s nephew, when the chief who had recovered -consciousness and, in fact, was little the worse as a result of his -encounter with the Bone Crusher, was informed that the boys had attended -to all the injured.</p> - -<p>He met them in the village square, where already a great fire was -blazing and preparations for a big feast in celebration of the tribe’s -victory were going forward. Wimba as usual acted as interpreter. And -into his eyes came a gleam which warned the boys something unusual was -afoot, before he ever interpreted the chief’s lengthy speech.</p> - -<p>Lengthy though the chief’s speech had been, however, it was brief enough -on Wimba’s lips. He was not so proficient in his command of English as -to be able to render all the chief’s verbal flowers, and contented -himself accordingly with reporting the gist of what the dusky monarch -had said. Chief Ruku-Ru, one arm in a sling, in the meantime stood -smiling at one side.</p> - -<p>“Him much honor, baas,” said Wimba, addressing Frank whom, since the -latter’s rescue of himself from death by means of the radio, he regarded -as the leader of the boys. “Him chief say him take all three white young -men into tribe and make Strong-Arm,”—indicating Bob, with a wave of the -hand—“great chief.”</p> - -<p>That this was an honor, the boys knew enough of local history to -realize. Many African tribes degenerate when coming into contact with -white men, and for them to make such an offer would be insolent and -presumptuous. But the Kikuyus, far above the average of African -intelligence, were a proud people. And the boys realized that, holding -themselves in high esteem, the Kikuyus felt they were bestowing an -honor.</p> - -<p>In such a spirit, they accepted it.</p> - -<p>“Tell Chief Ruku-Ru,” said Frank to Wimba, after consulting with his -comrades, “that we shall make only one stipulation. We are very -flattered. So much so that we want Mr. Hampton here to see when the -ceremonies take place. Tell the chief that we shall summon Mr. Hampton -through the air tonight to return, and that probably he can be back in -two days. The ceremonies can be held then.”</p> - -<p>Wimba translated this as best he could, and then interpreting the -chief’s reply stated matters would be arranged as requested.</p> - -<p>Before permitting the boys to depart, however. Chief Ruku-Ru pressed a -bracelet of heavy silver, oddly worked by native silversmiths, and -containing a turquoise matrix, upon Bob.</p> - -<p>They examined it in turn as they made their way back to the camp, and -many were their expressions of appreciation. The fact that it bore a -family resemblance to the silver and turquoise bracelets of the Navajo -Indians of the American Southwest was commented upon by Jack.</p> - -<p>“Curious,” he said, “how the same sort of workmanship, as well as the -combination of silver and turquoise, can bob up among two primitive -peoples who never heard of each other.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, it is,” said Frank. “But what I’m thinking of is this big bum with -a bracelet. Lady stuff.” Bob made a grab for him, and the pair began -rolling over and over in the long buffalo grass.</p> - -<p>“Ouch. Leggo,” begged Frank, almost choked with laughter.</p> - -<p>“Take it back.”</p> - -<p>“Sure,” gasped Frank, and Bob arose. “Only thing that would be funnier,” -cried Frank, sprinting for their tent, “would be for you to wear a -lady’s wrist watch.”</p> - -<p>Watching his comrades, the soberer Jack smiled sympathetically. They had -all been through a trying experience, and it was natural that their -spirits should find relief in play.</p> - -<p>Then he, too, entered the tent, after giving Wimba orders regarding the -preparation of dinner, and began tuning up to call his father and not -only make report regarding the momentous adventures of the day, but also -ask him to return so as to be present at the ceremonies of induction -into the Kikuyus.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chIX' title='IX: AFRICAN KNIGHTHOOD'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER IX</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>AFRICAN KNIGHTHOOD</span> -</h2> - -<p>At the end of two days Mr. Hampton and Niellsen, the photographer, a -tall rangy Scandinavian some ten years older than the boys, returned. -And when this intelligence was communicated to Chief Ruku-Ru he made -preparations for the carrying out of the ceremonies in honor of the boys -that very night.</p> - -<p>Prior to going to the village, the two parties exchanged experiences. -And while Mr. Hampton and Niellsen had had no such exciting times as the -boys, yet they, too, had not been without adventure.</p> - -<p>In particular, the boys laughed heartily over Niellsen’s description of -an incident attending the photographing of some baboons. It being the -dry season, their guides had taken Mr. Hampton and Niellsen to a certain -dry river bed in which water could be obtained by digging, a fact with -which the baboons were well aware. Here, prophesied the guides, they -would undoubtedly be able to obtain excellent pictures of baboons. And -in this prophecy they had been correct.</p> - -<p>“But,” laughed Mr. Hampton, “you should have seen what happened to -Niellsen. Tell it, Oscar.”</p> - -<p>Niellsen joined the older man in the laugh. He had an honest open face -with a tip-tilted nose and sandy recalcitrant hair which gave him a -humorous appearance calculated to induce smiles in his auditors before -ever he spoke. And in keeping with his appearance he had a habit of dry -speech which the boys found highly amusing.</p> - -<p>“The joke was on me, all right,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Or the baboon was,” said Mr. Hampton, laughing harder than ever, as if -at some diverting recollection.</p> - -<p>At this Jack could no longer conceal his impatience. “Come on, tell it,” -he said. “Don’t keep this all to yourselves.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it was this way,” said Niellsen. “You know if I’d have shown -myself to the baboons with my camera, I’d never have gotten them to -stand still long enough to have their pictures taken. Instead of -watching the birdie, they’d have come up and tried to operate the -machine. So I decided to hide myself. And for my place of concealment, I -chose the branches of a small uprooted tree.</p> - -<p>“There I was, had been waiting about half an’ hour, when the baboons -arrived. They began digging in the sand like regular ditch diggers. How -they did make the dirt fly. There were baboons everywhere, scores of -them. The whole tribe must have eaten pretzels and then hustled off to -this spot in the river with a whale of a thirst to be squenched.</p> - -<p>“I was fooling around, trying to get a good focus, for the light was -tricky. And at last I had just what I wanted, and set my hand to the -crank, all ready to begin grinding.</p> - -<p>“At that moment, something lighted on my head with such force that I -fell clean out of my perch. But fortunately the ground wasn’t far away, -a matter of three or four feet.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t know what had struck me. But when I got to my feet and looked -around, there sat a baboon in my old perch. And he was cranking away, -just grinding for dear life, and chattering with delight.</p> - -<p>“The beggar had jumped on my head, and then had taken my job away from -me.”</p> - -<p>The boys roared.</p> - -<p>“What did you do?” asked Frank.</p> - -<p>“Do? I bows to him and says, ‘Please, Mr. Baboon, won’t you go away?’ -And after giving me a line of baboon talk that I couldn’t understand -because I didn’t have my dictionary with me, he swung away to join his -friends.”</p> - -<p>“But the camera?” asked Jack. “Had the baboon damaged it?”</p> - -<p>“Not a bit of it,” averred Niellsen. “I found the focus still good, and -continued to grind out some more film. And I believe the beggar took -some good stuff while he was at the crank. If it comes out all right in -developing, I’m going to have stuff worth a fortune. ‘Baboons -photographed by one of their number.’ Can’t you just see that caption on -the screen?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I was fortunate enough to obtain a picture -of the baboon turning the crank, for I was standing nearby with my -camera when it occurred. So you see we could show an actual ‘still’ of -the baboon playing photographer.”</p> - -<p>Dinner was hastily consumed, and then the whole party escorted by a -guard of honor from the chief’s own bodyguard, comprising the tallest -and best formed of the young warriors, proceeded to the village.</p> - -<p>Under the council tree in his battered arm chair sat Chief Ruku-Ru, and -near him the boys took their station. A great fire blazing in the middle -of the square threw off a dancing light which illumined the mud walls of -the nearest huts, showed rank on rank of dusky bodies gathered in the -square and, falling upon the spears of the chief’s bodyguard at his -back, struck from their brightly polished heads a myriad gleams as if -fireflies flitted in the dusk.</p> - -<p>A hush hung over the scene, a solemnity that impressed itself on the -boys. And as they took their places at the chief’s right, surrounded by -their warrior escort, they spoke only in whispers.</p> - -<p>“What’s that package under your arm, Bob?” asked Jack, for the first -time noting a bulky package borne by his comrade. “Is it—”</p> - -<p>But he did not get to finish his question, for Mr. Hampton laying a -warning hand on his arm enjoined silence as Chief Ruku-Ru, rising from -his chair and advancing several steps in their direction, began to -address them.</p> - -<p>He spoke at length, the sound of his voice alone being heard in the -great square. And when he had finished, Wimba translated hurriedly.</p> - -<p>Chief Ruku-Ru, said he, was deeply grateful to the young white men for -the part they had played in routing the Bone Crusher’s warriors. For -this, all three were to be admitted to warriorhood in the clan.</p> - -<p>“It’s just as if you fellows were young squires in some old medieval -kingdom,” whispered Mr. Hampton. “And the king was about to lay the -accolade on your shoulders and acclaim you knights.” Moreover, continued -Wimba, while Chief Ruku-Ru stood silent, with folded arms, awaiting the -interpreter’s conclusion, Bob was to be especially honored. He had -overcome the Bone Crusher, and had proved himself the mightiest of all -Kikuyu warriors. He was to be given the title of Mikalwa which meant -Strong-Arm and the honorary rank of war chief of the clan.</p> - -<p>As the import of Wimba’s words dawned upon him, big Bob could be seen by -a close observer to pale slightly. And Frank was a close observer.</p> - -<p>“Hold your ground, old boy,” he whispered. “They’re not going to eat -you. Don’t let War Chief Mikalwa show fright now.”</p> - -<p>Three tall warriors now advanced at the chief’s signal from the -bodyguard at his back. Each carried a conical cap of rhinoceros hide, -with a gleaming white rhinoceros tusk, upcurving like a sickle, attached -to each side. These caps were placed on the heads of the boys.</p> - -<p>So impressive was this ceremony, there in the African night, in the -heart of an African village, with the gleaming firelight flashing on -spearheads and on the multitude of assembled blacks in the background, -that for once the boys did not feel like giving way to the spirit of -fun-making. Not a whisper passed between them. Their faces were solemn.</p> - -<p>As for Niellsen, stationed at his camera equipped with a lens for night -photography, he was grinding merrily away, assured that the film he was -obtaining would be without a parallel.</p> - -<p>After the caps with their rhino tusks had been placed on the boys’ -heads, the three warriors retired, giving way to three more. These -latter placed long spears in the boys’ hands, in turn giving way to -still another trio who equipped them with beautifully decorated hide -shields.</p> - -<p>Once more Chief Ruku-Ru spoke, but this time to his people, and his -words were followed by a burst of approving cries that seemed to shake -the very leaves of the council tree drooping in the windless night -overhead. Wimba translating said the chief had announced to his people -that the boys now were Kikuyu warriors, and that Bob should henceforth -be Mikalwa or Strong-Arm.</p> - -<p>“You will have to thank him, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton. “And I guess, -Bob, since he singled you out, it is up to you to act as spokesman.”</p> - -<p>Bob groaned; nevertheless he advanced a step or two in front of his -friends and, addressing the chief, thanked him for the honor conferred -upon himself and his comrades. This Wimba translated. Then Bob tore the -paper wrappings from the parcel which he had been carrying under his -arm, and Jack with a start recognized it as one of their portable radio -sets.</p> - -<p>“Tell Chief Ruku-Ru,” said Bob, to Wimba, “that in return for his -kindness to us, we wish to make him a present. By means of this, he can -hear strange music and speech tonight and so long as we are in his -vicinity.”</p> - -<p>When Wimba had translated, Bob advanced and asked Chief Ruku-Ru to seat -himself in his armchair throne. Then he adjusted the headpiece to the -chief’s ears, threw a wire over the council tree, and tuned in to catch -the music which Matse, who had been left behind at the camp for the -purpose, was playing on the talking machine.</p> - -<p>“You certainly won his heart that time, Bob,” said Jack, admiringly, as -Bob returned to the side of his comrades. “Look at his face, if you want -to see real amazement.”</p> - -<p>The chief continually taking off and restoring the receivers, and all -the time curiously eyeing the cabinet. It was as if he were trying to -determine the origin of the strange sounds which he heard when the -receivers were attached to his ears but which were reduced to the -thinnest of whispers when he removed the headpiece.</p> - -<p>“I wondered what that package under your arm contained,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>“Well, you see, I thought we owed the old boy something in return for -what he was doing for us,” said Bob. “So I decided to give him a real -present. I fixed up with Matse to play the records. He’s become a great -radio fan, and when you fellows left me alone with him the other -night—when you used the radio to free Wimba, you know—why, I showed him -how to operate the set. He’s as imitative as a monkey and as bright as a -new penny. I listened in for a minute, before putting the headpiece on -the chief’s ears, and Matse had things going all right.”</p> - -<p>“Well, you might have let a fellow in on it,” said Jack.</p> - -<p>“Oh, you and Frank were too busy talking to your father,” said Bob.</p> - -<p>In the meantime, although Chief Ruku-Ru had retired from the center of -the stage, so to speak, matters had not come to a standstill. Quite the -contrary, in fact, for with the completion of the ceremonies having to -do with the boys, the Kikuyus had gone about the business of celebration -in earnest.</p> - -<p>Numerous smaller fires sprang into being about the square, and some the -feasting was in full swing. Always ready for merry-making, the Kikuyus -had seized upon this occasion for a celebration despite the fact that -only two or three nights before another had been held.</p> - -<p>However, as Mr. Hampton and the boys had no desire to participate in the -drinking of the heavy native beer or to witness the orgy which was bound -to follow as the natives came under the influence of liquor, they -excused themselves to the chief on the ground that they found it -necessary to retire in order to be prepared for breaking camp at an -early hour on the morrow, and departed.</p> - -<p>Wrapped up in his new toy, Chief Ruku-Ru made no objection, and so they -managed to get away. Behind them already the dancing about the fires was -growing wilder and more unrestrained.</p> - -<p>“These Africans are just children, after all,” said Mr. Hampton, shaking -his head. “They don’t know the meaning of the word restraint. Well, now -for a good night’s sleep, everybody. We start at dawn.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chX' title='X: ONE GOOD TURN'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER X</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>ONE GOOD TURN</span> -</h2> - -<p>Camp was broken at the first faint streaks of dawn the next day. Mr. -Hampton was eager to penetrate farther up-country in order to get into a -big game region of which he had heard reports. And by the time day had -fully broken, the column was on its way.</p> - -<p>Looking back from the top of a little hill, the three boys could see the -village of Chief Ruku-Ru, which they had skirted, still sleeping after -its exciting night. Ahead, through the long buffalo grass, wound the -bearers under the direction of Wimba and Matse, each man either carrying -a bundle on his head or else supporting on his shoulders one end of a -pole from which was slung one of the more bulky articles of equipment, -while a companion upheld the other.</p> - -<p>Then they dropped down on the other side of the rise, and the village -was lost to view.</p> - -<p>“I wonder if we’ll ever pass that way again,” mused Jack.</p> - -<p>“If we do,” said Frank, “there’ll be an ebony, chieftain looking for War -Chief Mikalwa’s scalp.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean, looking for my scalp?” demanded Bob.</p> - -<p>“Oh, nothing,” said Frank, airily. “Only when Chief Ruku-Ru goes to put -on his headpiece after we’ve left and thinks he’s going to hear a -concert, how do you think he’ll regard you?”</p> - -<p>Bob laughed. “Well he had a good time with it last night. And, besides, -possession of that set will always mean something to him. It’s white -man’s magic. And that alone will raise him in the esteem of his people.”</p> - -<p>After putting the village behind them, the party settled down to -continuous travel, for the big game country for which Mr. Hampton was -heading lay ten days travel to the northwest. The marches were made in -the early morning and late afternoon. During the heat of the day, there -was a halt of four hours, as travel would have been too arduous and, -indeed, dangerous in the extreme under that blazing sun.</p> - -<p>Hot though the days were, however, the nights were cool. And so the boys -hot only managed to hold out without falling ill, but even enjoyed the -trip. Their irrepressible spirits, moreover, came to the fore. And on -several occasions they played practical jokes on each other which were -the cause of much laughter on the part of Mr. Hampton and Niellsen.</p> - -<p>One such occurred after they had been on the march more than a week and -were encamped one night near the bank of a river on the edge of the big -game country.</p> - -<p>The day had been hot and breathless, but the night had turned cool. And -after camp was pitched, the boys with Mr. Hampton and Niellsen were -gathered about a camp fire not far from their tent. Niellsen who had -taken motion pictures in many out-of-the-way corners of the world had -been telling of some of his experience.</p> - -<p>“And so,” he concluded, “when I turned back my bed before jumping in -that night, I found a puff-adder all curled up nicely there for a -snooze. You fellows have often asked me why I always look into my bed -before hopping in. Well, that’s the reason.”</p> - -<p>“Brrr,” shuddered Bob, “if there’s anything I detest it’s a snake. And -puff-adders are the deadliest in the world, aren’t they?”</p> - -<p>“They are that,” said Niellsen, emphatically. “While that is true, -though,” added Mr. Hampton, “yet the deaths from snake bites are -remarkably few in Africa. The natives have various antidotes. And many a -man who has been bitten by one or other of the various poisonous snakes -of Africa, even by the puff-adder, has failed to die of his injury. -However, I for one have no desire to be bitten. Well, let’s turn in, -fellows. We want to make an early start tomorrow and try and find some -place where we can ford this river.”</p> - -<p>Then, noting with surprise the absence of Jack and Frank, whom he had -failed to see slip away several minutes before, he asked what had become -of them. But so quiet had been their departure that neither of the -others had noted it.</p> - -<p>“Maybe they’ve already turned in,” said Niellsen, getting up and -stretching.</p> - -<p>All three set out for their tents, and a look into that shared by the -three boys showed Jack and Frank already snuggled down in their “flea” -bags.</p> - -<p>Good nights were said, and then Mr. Hampton and Niellsen parting company -with Bob went to their tent. So fatigued was the big fellow after an -arduous day of marching that he was half-asleep, while disrobing, and he -tumbled into his sleeping bag unaware of the fact that his comrades -watched his every movement alertly through slitted eyelids.</p> - -<p>One long sigh he gave, the kind a fellow emits just before settling down -to a good night’s sleep. He squirmed once or twice, making himself -comfortable. Then his eyes closed and he fall into that half-waking, -half-sleeping stage from which insensibly one drifts into profound -slumber.</p> - -<p>Suddenly his every nerve quivered. He was just on the point of drawing -his body together and springing up, blankets and all, when he recalled -the advice given him for just such an emergency and by an effort of will -controlled his nerves so that he lay perfectly still and motionless. But -what an effort was required! For big Bob felt something clammy and cold -touch his leg, something alive, something that moved and wriggled and -was gliding alongside his body toward his head.</p> - -<p>Undoubtedly, it was a snake. Into his mind leaped recollection of what -had been said only a short time previously about the camp fire on the -subject of snakes.</p> - -<p>Niellsen had said puff-adders were the deadliest of snakes, and likewise -that they preferred to coil themselves in a fellow’s bedding. This must -be a puff-adder, nothing less.</p> - -<p>If a fellow exhibited no sign of life when in the vicinity of a snake, -Mr. Hampton had earlier declared, the reptile might fail to become -alarmed and might glide away without striking. It was his only chance. -And big Bob, suffering agonies of mental torture, nevertheless exercised -an iron self-control and lay without moving a muscle.</p> - -<p>But not for long could he or anyone control himself under such -conditions. Hot eyeballs glaring into the darkness began to see -pinwheels and rockets. He felt as if his chest would burst. In another -moment, he must let go, and leap up, no matter what the consequences.</p> - -<p>All this time the clammy something had been creeping farther and farther -up Bob’s body. Now it came to his thigh, and then he could feel it on -his abdomen. Bob couldn’t stand the torture of passivity any longer. He -was just on the verge of crying out in horror, when realization came to -him with a jolt that the something, whatever it was, was crawling, not -gliding, crawling on four legs. Therefore, it couldn’t be a snake.</p> - -<p>One bound shot Bob out of his blankets. He seized an electric torch -which he always kept near at hand, and whirling about focused its -brilliant gleam upon his “flea” bag. There, in the middle of the -blankets, blinking in the white glare, sat an insignificant little green -frog.</p> - -<p>Which felt the smaller—the surprised froglet or the chagrined Bob—it is -difficult to say.</p> - -<p>Suddenly a flash of realization came to him. He saw it all. Frank and -Jack had slipped away and preceded him to the tent. Camp was near the -river bank. It would have been easy enough to walk along the edge of the -stream with a flashlight, and by its glare surprise a frog and capture -it. Easy enough, indeed; and, undoubtedly, that was what had been done. -Then the two rascals had put the frog in his blankets.</p> - -<p>Assured of this, Bob’s first idea was to tumble his comrades out of bed -at once and roughhouse them. He had been badly scared. In fact, his -nerves still quivered. He considered they had gone a bit too far in the -matter of practical joking. Then he decided against instant action.</p> - -<p>That was just what they would be looking for. Undoubtedly, they were -awake and watching his every movement, enjoying his discomfiture. If he -started to tumble them about, they would join forces against him. The -result would be a rough-and-tumble combat, endangering the safety of -various articles of equipment scattered about the tent.</p> - -<p>“I’ll not give them any satisfaction,” thought Bob. “I’ll just turn in, -and not say anything. They’ll be worried as to what I mean to do. And -when my chance comes—”</p> - -<p>Switching off the flashlight, and tossing the frog aside, he crawled -back into his blankets. Once he believed he heard a subdued chuckle, -whether on the part of Frank or Jack he could not decide. But nothing -was said to him.</p> - -<p>As for the others, they felt foolish. Both experienced an uncomfortable -sense that their practical-joke had been too startling in character. -Besides, old Bob had robbed them of their enjoyment by refusing to -display resentment.</p> - -<p>Presently, all three were asleep.</p> - -<p>But Bob was first to wake. He had an infallible system. If he decided on -retiring that he wanted to wake at a certain hour, at that hour he would -wake. It is a power many people possess. Bob called it “setting his -mental alarm clock.”</p> - -<p>At four-thirty his eyes flew open and after a few seconds spent in -collecting his thoughts, he carefully surveyed the interior of the tent -without stirring or making a sound. Darkness had gone, and a dim gray -light penetrated the tent walls, making it possible to distinguish -objects. Bob could see his comrades, both sleeping soundly. He smiled in -satisfaction.</p> - -<p>Crawling out of his blankets, he dressed with infinite caution to avoid -making any sound which might disturb the sleepers. Then he stole away to -the bearers’ camp. The Negroes still slept, but Bob shook Wimba into -wakefulness and then held whispered consultation with him.</p> - -<p>“Move fast, now,” he concluded, “so as to get ’em before they wake.”</p> - -<p>Wimba, whose primitive nature took the keenest relish in practical -jokes, nodded vigorously. Then he wakened half a dozen of the bearers -and spoke to them in their own tongue. All grinned and several, glancing -toward Bob sat at one side watching them, laughed outright and nodded as -if in encouragement.</p> - -<p>This was enough for Bob, who felt certain the surprise he was planning -for his comrades, in return for the trick played upon him the previous -night, would go through successfully, if only the Negroes did not delay -overlong in their necessary preparations. Regarding the latter, however, -a glance assured him there was not going to be any undue delay, for the -Negroes selected were rapidly becoming most fearsome looking objects, as -they daubed faces and bodies with the ghastly white clay used as war -paint by the Kikuyu warrior when he is about to go on the warpath.</p> - -<p>“All ready, baas,” reported Wimba, approaching Bob with one of the -bepainted bearers trailing behind him and tying his wrists loosely -behind his back. For Wimba was to appear to be taken prisoner by a party -of Kikuyus from the Bone Crusher’s clan, and to that end he was being -tied up.</p> - -<p>Bob was delighted with the speed displayed.</p> - -<p>“Very good, Wimba,” he said. “I’ll slip back into my tent now and crawl -into bed. Now, you’re sure you understand what to say?”</p> - -<p>The jolly black laughed. “Oh, me un’erstand, baas. Him funny. Leave to -Wimba.”</p> - -<p>“Good,” said Bob. “Then I’ll be off. Do you follow in five minutes.”</p> - -<p>As he approached his tent, Bob wondered whether his comrades had waked -yet by any chance. It was too early for them. But if they had waked, and -had noted his absence, the probability was they would become suspicious -when Wimba and the “war party” appeared on the scene.</p> - -<p>A hasty look about, however, reassured him. The boys had not moved from -the positions in which he had left them. They were sleeping evenly. If -either had been snoring, Bob would have suspected feigning. But such was -not the case.</p> - -<p>Smiling satisfiedly, he hastily disrobed and got back into his “flea” -bag. Hardly had he settled down again, than Wimba poked his head into -the tent and, catching Bob’s meaning glance and nod of the head, -shouldered his way inside, hands bound behind him. And close at his -heels came six of the most fearful looking warriors one could find in -all Africa.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXI' title='XI: TURN ABOUT'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XI</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>TURN ABOUT</span> -</h2> - -<p>Three of the warriors bore hide shields and spears, which Bob knew to be -those given him and his comrades by Chief Ruku-Ru upon their induction -into the clan as warriors. The bearers carried no such war -paraphernalia. And these had been taken from the baggage. The others -handled wicked-appearing clubs studded with spikes, such as sometimes -were used in battling smaller animals.</p> - -<p>All six were the tallest and best formed amongst the bearers. And -hastily though they had bedaubed themselves, yet the job had been -thorough-going. As he looked at the grinning mask on the chest of the -tallest who was to enact the role of leader, Bob shuddered -involuntarily.</p> - -<p>So noiseless had been the entry of the party into the tent that Jack and -Frank still slept soundly and Wimba, who knew the location of every -object in the tent, experienced no difficulty in collecting the -automatics lying close to each sleeper. Bob nodded approval. Here was -something of which he had failed to take account. Good for Wimba. He -wasn’t taking any chances on having his men potted before explanations -could be made.</p> - -<p>Then Wimba with a toe stirred first Jack and then Frank, and as they -opened their eyes Bob composed his features into a glare of angry -surprise in keeping with the role he had set himself to act.</p> - -<p>Both newly-roused boys struggled upright, as did Bob. And beside each a -warrior with knobbed club threateningly upraised sprang to take his -place. Fear written in every feature, Wimba stood cringing in the middle -of the tent, gazing from one to the other of the boys and trying to -speak, but experiencing difficulty, apparently, in emitting any sound at -all. He was the picture of a man in mortal terror. And Bob almost forgot -himself and the part he must play, in his delight at Wimba’s histrionic -abilities.</p> - -<p>As for Jack and Frank, so real did it all seem to them that there was no -thought in their minds but what a terrible calamity had befallen the -party. The camp had been raided, and at the very moment when they -believed themselves in friendly territory and had not considered it -necessary to post guards. Wimba was a prisoner. And some ghastly fate -undoubtedly awaited themselves. Jack and Frank both were pale. And -seeing them glance about wildly, as if in search of their revolvers, Bob -was mightily pleased that Wimba’s forethought had removed the weapons -from reach.</p> - -<p>Before either Frank or Jack could speak, Bob took charge of the -situation. Glaring ferociously as the black warrior towering above him -with upraised club, who glared just as ferociously at him in return, Bob -shouted to Wimba:</p> - -<p>“What’s the meaning of this, Wimba?”</p> - -<p>“Him Bone Crusher’s warriors, baas,” returned the latter in tones of -purest terror. “Oh, baas, save Wimba.”</p> - -<p>“The Bone Crusher’s men?” shouted Bob. “Why, we left their vicinity days -ago.”</p> - -<p>“Very angry clan,” returned Wimba. “They follow. Say white young men -spoil their plans. So now they capture white young men.”</p> - -<p>Bob groaned, and casting a glance of despair toward Jack and Frank, he -added in a husky voice: “This looks tough, fellows. If we’d only kept a -guard.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t we fight ’em.” Frank was shaky-voiced but game.</p> - -<p>“I’d be the last fellow to hold back,” said Bob. “But what chance would -we have? Cumbered up in these blankets and without weapons? We’d just -get our heads split open.”</p> - -<p>“Wh—what of father and Niellsen?” asked Jack. He was terrified and -showed it. And who could blame him? Nevertheless, his thought was not -for himself but his father.</p> - -<p>“I’m prisoner, too, baas,” said Wimba, mournfully.</p> - -<p>Jack groaned and buried his face in his hands. “Look here, Wimba,” said -Bob, “ask that big chief what they intend to do with us, and when -they’re going to begin.”</p> - -<p>Wimba and the majestic-looking leader of the war party conversed rapidly -in the Kikuyu tongue. Then Wimba turned to Bob. There was respect in the -tone with which he addressed him.</p> - -<p>“Um Bone Crusher’s men say Mikalwa great fighter. Bone Crusher gone, so -they want Mikalwa for chief.”</p> - -<p>“What? Who’s Mikalwa? Me?”</p> - -<p>Wimba nodded. And the tall leader approached Bob and bowed low before -him.</p> - -<p>“Fine,” shouted Bob, leaping to his feet. “Then there’s nothing to worry -about. I’ll just order you fellows set free.” And he turned toward Jack -and Frank.</p> - -<p>But Wimba shook his head.</p> - -<p>“Mikalwa to be chief,” he said. “But others must die. Mikalwa can’t save -them.”</p> - -<p>Bob struck an heroic attitude, arms folded across his chest. The fact -that he was in pajamas, and that the pants were slipping down while the -jacket hung together by only one button, rather spoiled the effect. But -nobody laughed. The situation was too serious for Jack and Frank, whose -anxious gaze roved from Bob to Wimba to the leader of the raiders and -back to Bob again.</p> - -<p>“Tell them, Wimba,” cried Bob, “tell these rascals that Mikalwa prefers -to die with his own people. If he cannot set his friends free, he will -not become their chief. They must treat him as one of their prisoners.”</p> - -<p>“Bob, Bob,” begged Frank, in a broken voice, “don’t throw away your only -chance.”</p> - -<p>At the tone employed by his closest friend, big Bob began to weaken. -Poor Frank’s feelings had been harrowed sufficiently, and Jack’s, too, -he thought, to atone in full for the playing of that snake trick on him -the night before. However, he was nearing the end of the little drama -which he had concocted with Wimba, and so he decided to play it out.</p> - -<p>Wimba in the meantime, as soon as Bob had finished speaking had -addressed the pseudo-chief.</p> - -<p>The latter replied, and Wimba turning with beaming face cried joyfully:</p> - -<p>“Him say all right, baas. If Mikalwa be big chief him can set all -friends free.”</p> - -<p>“Good,” shouted Bob. And turning toward his astounded comrades, still -seated in their blankets, he flung out both hands in a magnificent -gesture, as if showering largess upon them. “Fellows,” he cried, -“receive your freedom at the hands of Big Chief Mikalwa, otherwise known -as”—he paused for dramatic effect, then added—“the snake charmer.”</p> - -<p>Spinning about he laughed and said: “All right, Wimba. Show’s over. Give -each of the actors an extra help of tobacco. I’m proud of you and your -troupe.”</p> - -<p>Wimba spoke rapidly to the others, and on each face broke out a broad -smile while the trio standing guard over the boys lowered their clubs -and relaxed their hostile attitude. The smiles gave way to chuckles as -the Negroes took in the dazed expression spreading over the features of -Frank and Jack. And then as Bob, unable longer to control his mirth, -broke into loud laughter, the Negroes followed suit.</p> - -<p>With a vigorous thrust of his bare foot against the chest of each, Bob -sent Jack and Frank toppling backward into their blankets. With a wave -of the hand, he indicated Wimba and his impromptu minstrel troupe should -withdraw. And while Jack and Frank still were struggling to right -themselves and, at the same time, to readjust their reeling thoughts to -this outrageous development of the situation, the chuckling Kikuyus -filed out with Wimba bringing up the rear and casting knowing grins over -his shoulder at Bob.</p> - -<p>“Look here,” said Jack, sitting up and regarding Bob with a rueful -expression, “did you honestly put those Johnnies up to that?”</p> - -<p>“I can’t believe it yet,” said Frank, running his fingers through his -uncombed hair.</p> - -<p>Bob laughed. “Just a little show for your benefit,” he said. “I thought -you’d appreciate what real talent could do—after your own puny effort -last night.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll bet I’m still as white as those ghastly Negroes were painted,” -said Jack. “I don’t expect to find my natural youthful color restored -for a week at least.”</p> - -<p>Frank said nothing, but getting up went over to Bob and offered his -hand.</p> - -<p>“Yours was a jolly good job, old boy,” he said. “Ours was a kind of mean -trick. Sorry.”</p> - -<p>Once more amity was restored. And Mr. Hampton appearing at the entrance -to the tent at that moment, all three began rehearsing together the -story of recent occurrences. What between their bubbling laughter and -their frequent interruptions of each other, it was difficult for the -older man to gain a real appreciation of what had occurred. Finally, he -threw up his hands.</p> - -<p>“One at a time, one at a time,” he pleaded. “And, anyway, save it up to -tell me later. We must get under way at once, if we are going to ford -this river today.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXII' title='XII: AN UNEXPECTED JAUNT'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>AN UNEXPECTED JAUNT</span> -</h2> - -<p>Finding a ford, however, was no easy matter, for the river was both wide -and deep. Several times the bearers ventured into the water at -likely-looking places, but the rapid deepening and the swiftness of the -current caused them to withdraw in haste.</p> - -<p>The country in which they found themselves was sparsely-inhabited marsh -land. The last village, occupying a high plateau, lay two days’ journey -to the rear. Since leaving it they had failed to encounter any local -tribesmen. Only by luck had they found knolls of dry firm ground -projecting above the jungle growth of the marsh on which to pitch camp -the two nights spent in this district.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton, fearing the effects of the miasmatic surroundings on the -health of all, was resolved that this day should see them cross the -river and into the hills rolling up in the background on the other side. -Therefore, he kept the bearers plodding through the thick jungle growth -of reeds and trees along the bank in search of a ford. For, although of -human habitation there seemed little evidence, yet of animals there were -many signs. And undoubtedly some of the latter were accustomed to cross -the river at some point or other in the vicinity.</p> - -<p>None being discovered, however, toward noon, Mr. Hampton decided they -would build a raft. Rope a-plenty was in their equipment. When the raft -was ready, a bearer would swim the river with the end of a rope to be -attached to a tree on the other side. By fastening the rope similarly on -the near side of the river, they would obtain a ferry, along which the -raft could be pulled back and forth until everybody and all the supplies -and articles of equipment could be sent across.</p> - -<p>The work of building the raft out of felled logs bound together with -tough vines and creepers went on apace, and by the middle of afternoon -everything was in readiness for the attempt. All three of the boys were -expert swimmers and volunteered to make the crossing with the rope. But -Mr. Hampton would not give his consent.</p> - -<p>“As to your ability to swim several times the distance, there can be no -question,” he said. “But one can never tell when crocodiles will appear -in these African rivers. Wimba tells me there are several men amongst -our bearers who have a reputation for fighting crocodiles. I’ll see -whether either or both want to swim across.”</p> - -<p>The two men mentioned by Wimba readily consented to make the crossing, -being eager to receive the extra pay for the hazard promised by Mr. -Hampton. And with knives clutched between their teeth, they plunged into -the river, the rope paying out behind them. However, although through -his glasses, Jack, who was maintaining a lookout, could discern three of -the long sinister beasts sunning themselves on a sandy shelf along the -opposite shore but considerably below the point at which the swimmers -planned to land, yet none appeared in midstream to attack the two -Kikuyus. And the latter swimming strongly, presently were seen to -clamber out of the water. Then they disappeared into the luxuriant -undergrowth, to reappear a few minutes later shouting that the rope had -been made fast to a tree.</p> - -<p>“First, Dad,” cried Jack. “You wouldn’t let us swim the river, so now -you must let us be first to cross on the raft.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton smiled indulgently. “You’re as big as I, Jack,” he said, -“but you’re only a kid still, aren’t you? All right. Let it be as you -say. You three and six of the bearers can make the first crossing with -the major portion of our stores. Then send the raft back, and Niellsen -and I will cross over with our photographic equipment and whatever -supplies you haven’t taken. Then Wimba can follow with the rest of the -bearers.”</p> - -<p>“But, Mr. Hampton,” Frank objected, “do you believe we ought to put all -our supplies, or even the major portion, in one load? What if the raft -upsets?”</p> - -<p>“You’re right, Frank,” said the older man, approvingly. “We would be out -of luck in a case like that. No, we’ll split our provisions, and send -over only half at a time.”</p> - -<p>“The same idea can be applied to our radio equipment, too,” said Jack. -“We’ll take several of the portable receiving sets with us, as well as -that emergency sending set. You can bring the one we’ve been using, when -you come, together with the remaining portable receivers.”</p> - -<p>The good sense of both these suggestions being readily apparent, they -were adopted and, carrying half the provisions and half the radio -equipment, the three boys with six bearers sent out to negotiate the -crossing.</p> - -<p>Long poles had been cut and with these half the number on the raft -essayed to pole, while the balance pulled on the rope stretching now -from bank to bank and tied about trees at either end.</p> - -<p>But almost immediately it became apparent the force of the river current -had been underestimated. So strong was the downstream drag that all soon -found themselves working as if for their very lives to make headway. -Moreover, the rope drawn as taut as a violin string by the force of -their weight upon it began to screech with a dry sound.</p> - -<p>“We better turn back, Jack,” panted Frank, from his position at the rear -end of the raft where he was battling valiantly with a pole. “In a -minute we won’t be able to touch bottom any longer, and then our -unsupported weight is going to be too much for that rope.”</p> - -<p>Hardly had the words been uttered than there came a sudden sharp report. -The rope had parted at a weak spot. The two ends fell into the water, -out of reach. And at once, seized in the hungry clutch of the swift -current, the raft was whirled into midstream and started down river.</p> - -<p>Fortunately, Matse was of the number aboard. And when Jack shouted an -order to the bearers not to use their poles lest they be snatched from -their grasp, as the river was running too strongly at this point, Matse -translated his command. At that, however, Jack’s forethought came a -moment too late to prevent one of the blacks from losing his pole. It -was sucked from his grasp as the raft whirled along, when he attempted -to strike bottom with it to arrest their progress. Only through the fact -that Bob throwing an arm about his waist at the crucial moment tugged -him inward did the black escape following his pole.</p> - -<p>“Tell the men to sit down and pull in their poles,” Jack ordered Matse. -“Pretty soon the current will swing in toward one shore or another as we -round a bend, and then we may stand a chance to strike bottom and pole -ashore. Try to make them see that it is necessary to save the raft and -equipment, Matse, so that they won’t jump off and swim ashore.”</p> - -<p>The intelligent young Kikuyu nodded his comprehension and then began to -lay down the law to his comrades in their own tongue.</p> - -<p>In the meantime, Mr. Hampton could be seen starting the bearers on shore -down stream. And Jack knew his father’s thought was his, namely that -some turn of the current might throw the raft toward the river bank and -thus afford those on land a chance to be of aid.</p> - -<p>“If we only had a rope,” he groaned.</p> - -<p>“What’s that your father is shouting, Jack? Can you understand him?” -asked Bob.</p> - -<p>Jack shook his head.</p> - -<p>“Too far away,” he said. “This river certainly is sweeping us along at a -great rate. There, I can’t see them any more.”</p> - -<p>And standing up, Jack waved his handkerchief as the raft swept around a -bend and his father and the party ashore were lost to view.</p> - -<p>Then Jack crouched down between Bob and Frank.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to remember one thing, fellows,” he said, lowering his voice -to a whisper. “And that is that these blacks will stick to the raft, -perhaps, if we can manage to keep them from becoming excited and -apprehensive. But if they lose their heads, they’ll jump overboard and -swim for it. And in that case our chance of saving the raft and all -these supplies and equipment will be mighty slim. So it is up to us to -keep smiling, because they’ll be watching us. In fact, they’re watching -us now.”</p> - -<p>The blacks were, indeed, casting anxious glances toward the three boys. -And the latter, accepting Jack’s outline of the situation, grinned in a -way to disarm apprehension. Nevertheless, they could see from the way in -which the Kikuyus turned to gaze at the water that they were speculating -upon the possibilities of swimming ashore.</p> - -<p>“Can the men swim, Matse?” asked Jack of the young interpreter who -crouched nearest them, staring with fascinated gaze at the swift water -bearing them along.</p> - -<p>“All, baas,” replied Matse. “They say they stay long as can, but will -swim if no can save raft. They ’fraid crocodile but more ’fraid -waterfall.”</p> - -<p>“Waterfall?” cried Frank, in alarm.</p> - -<p>Matse nodded. “Me no can tell, baas,” he said. “Fella-boys say river um -run too fast. Waterfall soon.”</p> - -<p>Bob jumped to his feet. “Look here. We can’t sit here idle, waiting to -be tossed toward one bank or the other, while all the time we may be -skidding along toward a falls. I can’t hear any roar indicating one near -at hand. Just the same, this river is running mighty fast, and there may -be a falls ahead. Let’s get some of these poles together and try to rig -up a stern sweep to guide us inshore.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the idea,” approved Frank. “It’s about our only chance to save -the raft, and if we don’t do it we may soon all be in the water trying -to swim to shore.”</p> - -<p>Matse called to the bearers who shoved their poles across the raft -toward the boys, and watched eagerly while Bob set to work to develop -his idea.</p> - -<p>What he wanted was a paddle on the end of several poles lashed together. -The poles were available, and the paddle blade was easily obtained by -ripping off several heavy boards from a packing case. But hammer and -stout nails were none. However, Bob got around that by tearing up many -feet of stout creeper binding the logs of the raft at one end. Then he -placed the boards between the ends of two poles and lashed them in place -with the vine.</p> - -<p>“Now for it,” he said, surveying his work dubiously. “It looks strong -enough, but whether it will hold together is a question. However, here -goes.”</p> - -<p>The felled logs comprising the raft were in several layers, -criss-crossing each other. In none of these layers had the logs been -placed tightly together. Bob poked around until he found a succession of -openings in the various layers of logs which were in line with each -other, and then managed to push the paddle through and into the water. A -little pressing apart of the logs and tearing of vines here and there -enlarged the opening sufficiently to permit slanting the poles forward -so far that the blade trailing at the rear became a genuinely effective -sweep.</p> - -<p>“Hurray,” yelled Bob, jubilantly, as the raft began to swing sluggishly -but steadily toward shore. “Get some of those fellows to help hold this -steady, Matse.”</p> - -<p>Two of the bearers sprang with alacrity to positions on the two poles -lashed together which constituted the handle of the sweep.</p> - -<p>Bob stationed them in position to hold the paddle steady at an angle -which swept the raft shoreward, for he was not using it as a sweep for -propulsion but as steering oar.</p> - -<p>Then he stood back to contemplate his work with a look of pride on his -face.</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess that’ll turn the trick if the paddle doesn’t break,” he -said to Jack. “The tug of the water is tremendous.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied the latter, leaning close and speaking in a whisper, “or -if we aren’t swept into the rapids ahead. Take a look but don’t draw the -attention of the Kikuyus. They are so interested in watching the result -of your labors and in playing around with your steering oar that they -haven’t seen yet. There. Down stream.”</p> - -<p>Bob looked.</p> - -<p>Some distance ahead, where the river swept around a big island, -scattered rocks jutted above the water of both channels. And over them -foamed the river.</p> - -<p>Then the first sound of the rapids was borne to their ears.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXIII' title='XIII: IN THE RIVER’S CLUTCH'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XIII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>IN THE RIVER’S CLUTCH</span> -</h2> - -<p>The raft leaped forward like a thing alive. Kikuyus sweating at the -steering oar were unable to point the unwieldly craft inshore any -longer. Frightened cries broke from the blacks as they saw the spouters -ahead, saw too the black teeth of the basaltic rocks waiting to tear -them.</p> - -<p>“Back, back,” shouted Jack, stationed on the shoreward side of the raft. -He waved his arms frantically in warning to the blacks. “Don’t let them -jump in, Matse,” he screamed. “They’d drown.”</p> - -<p>But the thoroughly frightened blacks had lost all awe of their -superiors. They continued to crowd forward as if planning to leap -overboard.</p> - -<p>“Look out, Jack,” cried Frank, standing in the bow, his attention -diverted from the river ahead by Jack’s predicament. “You can’t stop -them. They’ll brush you into the river if you get in their way.”</p> - -<p>But big Bob saw the danger to his comrade, too.</p> - -<p>He gained Jack’s side and, legs braced, facing the hysterically -frightened blacks, he waved his automatic in their faces.</p> - -<p>“Any man deserting will be shot,” he cried. “Matse, tell these fellows -we want to save their lives. We’ll swing the raft against the island -below us. If everybody works on the steering oar it can be done. And -we’ll all be saved.”</p> - -<p>Matse also had succumbed to the fright of the moment, along with his -companions. But not to the same extent. One look ahead showed him the -possibilities and, flinging himself in front of his wavering assistants, -he shouted at them in their own tongue. The boys could not understand -his words, but there was no misreading his tone. He was lashing them -with whips of scorn. And that it was proving effective was plain to be -seen.</p> - -<p>“Fella-boys help, baas,” cried Matse, in the end, turning to Bob. “You -tell um what can do.”</p> - -<p>It was an anxious moment for the three boys. Fate had thrust them -without any preliminary warning into a mighty tight place, indeed. Ahead -lay possible, even probable, disaster. To escape to the shore by -swimming was out of the question. The current was running like a mill -race, and even the strongest of swimmers could not have stemmed it, but -must of necessity have been swept along helpless in its clutch. And upon -the young shoulders of the trio rested the responsibility for -extricating not themselves alone from this threatening monster of a -river, but also the half dozen blacks. Moreover, if it were humanly -possible, they desired also to save the raft and its contents.</p> - -<p>But was it possible? Was it possible to save the lives of all concerned? -Could they hope to save the raft? Was not their only chance to be flung -upon some of the rocks which, bare, jagged, wet from the constant spray -spouting over them, offering only insecure hold at best, seemed to leap -toward them, so swiftly were they borne along? And then the raft would -go whirling and bumping into the further rapids around the bend which as -yet they could not see and be swept to destruction over the falls they -suspected lay not far away by reason of the growing volume of sound -which came to them, the dull booming roar of water tumbling, cascading, -over a precipice.</p> - -<p>At such moments, one’s eyes seem to drink in all the surroundings as if -in one vast comprehensive glance, and one’s thoughts stimulated by the -unwonted danger race madly. It was so with the boys. They saw the high -wooded bluffs, rank jungle growth descending to the water’s edge. They -saw the broad river, fully half a mile wide, sweeping on like a great -sheet of glass to crash and splinter upon the rocks at the bend and upon -the wooded island in the middle. What lay beyond that mighty curve, -where the river turning sharply bore away to the right whence came the -roar of the waterfall which they suspected to be there, they could not -see. All this they saw, all this their vision grasped, in that one -sweeping glance when a moment seemed an eternity. And their thoughts -moved as swiftly as sight. In fact, only one possible salvation for all -lay ahead. And all three grasped it simultaneously.</p> - -<p>“The island,” cried Jack. “We must try to reach the island.”</p> - -<p>This island was in shape long and narrow and as they drew nearer, they -could discern the contour of that portion at the upstream end quite -clearly. At the tip were rocks in a jumbled mass which would spell -destruction to the raft, perhaps to themselves, if they were swept upon -them. But, caught in a current setting into the channel between the -island and the left bank of the river, they could see as they drew -closer to the island that just below the rocks lay a cove with a -shelving sandy shore.</p> - -<p>They were still some distance above this point, and Bob believed they -could maneuver the raft into the cove before being swept beyond it and -into the rocks which began not far away. He said as much to the others, -who nodded agreement, then he leaped to position at the steering oar. -Three of the blacks helped him swing the clumsy but effective sweep and -hold it in position. Steadily but surely, the raft swung in toward the -cove.</p> - -<p>Frank and Jack in the meantime took command at the bow of the raft, if -the square end downstream can so be dignified. And Matse passed the word -to the two remaining blacks of what was intended. All five were to stand -ready to leap into the water as they approached the cove and help to -direct the raft into it.</p> - -<p>On swept the raft. And now it could be seen that, even though the -direction given it by the steering oar was carrying it steadily toward -the island, yet so strong was the drag of the current upon its unwieldly -bulk that the raft would arrive only by the narrowest of margins, if at -all. And, if they missed the cove, almost certain destruction awaited -beyond.</p> - -<p>“If I think we’re going to miss it, Bob,” shouted Jack from the bow, -“I’ll warn you in time so that you and the blacks can run forward and -swim for the cove.”</p> - -<p>Bob shouted an “All right,” to show he had heard. But he did not look -up. The improvised steering oar was bending under the strain placed upon -it, and he was fearful it would snap at any moment. Still it held, -however. And Bob was grimly determined that as long as there remained a -chance to bring their rude craft to shore, he’d stick to it.</p> - -<p>A sensible diminution in the tug of the water a moment later apprised -Bob that they had managed to swing the raft out of the center of the -current. They were close to the island now. But they were close to the -cove, too. In fact, they were almost abreast of it. And that meant that -unless they could swing the raft in at once, it would be carried beyond -the only possible landing place.</p> - -<p>Bob decided to change his tactics. Instead of using his improvised -paddle as steering oar, he would use it as a sweep. The raft had been -spun around so that the forward end faced the shore. Bob couldn’t speak -to the Kikuyus in their own tongue, but he could signal his intentions. -And this he did by thrusting them away and himself straining to work the -oar back and forth. Then he beckoned them to assist him, and they -understood and leaped to obey.</p> - -<p>Over his shoulder he glanced anxiously toward the forward end, and with -a leap of the heart he saw that they were making progress. The threshing -of the sweep, acting as a paddle wheel, was sending them toward the -shore. But still their progress was not sufficient to put them into the -cove for, although the pull of the current had diminished, it still was -sweeping them along at a rate which threatened to carry them beyond the -safety zone.</p> - -<p>But Frank and Jack also were alive to the danger. And they had changed -their original plan of all leaping into the water and attempting to pull -the raft ashore by swimming. For as they drew closer to the cove, Jack -had gotten the idea that, perhaps, the river grew shallower here and had -thrust one of the long poles into the water. It had been almost torn -from his hand. Nevertheless, he had touched bottom.</p> - -<p>So now the two boys and the three blacks not engaged on the sweep with -Bob lined the downstream side of the raft, two to a pole. And at every -thrust they touched bottom.</p> - -<p>For a long minute it was touch and go, and whether the combined efforts -of the men at the poles with those at the sweep would succeed in -bringing the raft into the backwater of the cove, hung in the balance. -But human determination defeated the river, robbed it of its victims. -After proceeding only by inches, the raft suddenly shot ahead, as if the -river deciding it was defeated spurned this stubborn craft at the last. -And the next moment, the raft was bobbing in the backwater of the cove, -where the current was not perceptible, while just beyond the rocks -guarding the two extremities of its half-moon shore the river rolled on -so swiftly as to make a sharp line of cleavage between the main stream -and the cove.</p> - -<p>After their strenuous exertions, all were a trifle bewildered to find -themselves thus suddenly shot into safety with no call to extend -themselves further. The Kikuyus began chattering like magpies and, -leaping into the shallow water, dragged the raft up until the forward -end rested on the sand above the water line. As for the boys, they could -only look at each other, each reading in the eyes of his friends -unutterable relief at escape from that threat of a watery death.</p> - -<p>Quite simply big Bob bent his head and closed his eyes. And the others -did likewise. And from three profoundly grateful hearts there went up to -the Divine Providence which guards poor mortals a prayer of gratitude no -less sincere because unspoken.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXIV' title='XIV: RADIO BRIDGES THE GAP'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XIV</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>RADIO BRIDGES THE GAP</span> -</h2> - -<p>It was not a large island, as islands go, being something less than half -a mile in extent by a quarter of that in breadth. But it was densely -wooded, and the underbrush was so thick as to make exploration -difficult. Nevertheless, after securing the raft to the trunks of trees -by means of stout creepers twisted and used as ropes, the boys pushed -exploration of the island in order to determine whether there was some -means of reaching the mainland from it.</p> - -<p>That, however, would be difficult. At no place did either river bank -approach the island closely. The likeliest chance appeared to be to -cross to the left bank, that upon which was the main party, by means of -a score of half-submerged rocks, between and over which the water boiled -and foamed. These rocks lay between the forward end of the island and -the shore.</p> - -<p>“We might be able to leap from rock to rock in some cases, and in others -to bridge the chasms with poles,” said Jack, considering the situation, -as he and the two others, with Matse behind them, stood on the shore -near these rocks.</p> - -<p>“But then,” said Frank, “we’d have to abandon the raft.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded gloomily.</p> - -<p>At one other point, another solution suggested itself. Near the upstream -end of the island, on the side opposite that upon which they had landed, -the mainland was less than one hundred yards away. And through this -lesser channel the water, as they ascertained by tossing chips into the -current, flowed less swiftly. A strong swimmer, heading upstream, -probably would be able to make his way to the opposite shore before -being swept down into the rapids below. He could carry a rope and, once -such a connection was made, other ropes could be passed back and forth -until a strong enough ferry was established to make it possible to -transport the raft without danger of the ropes parting and letting it be -carried down.</p> - -<p>But where was rope to be obtained? Examination of the boxes revealed -numbers were bound with short ends of rope. But all these tied together -would not be of sufficient length to bridge the channel even once. And -more than one rope, as experience had revealed, would be necessary to -ensure safety.</p> - -<p>“We might make a rope of creepers,” Bob suggested, at length, as, after -a survey of their resources, the three stood on the raft, gazing wryly -at each other.</p> - -<p>“Dad has several big coils of rope with him,” said Jack. “If we could -only get in touch with him and tell him to cross the river up above and -come down on the right bank.”</p> - -<p>Bob looked at his watch. “More than three hours since we started our -runaway journey,” he commented. “Great Scott, I hadn’t realized how long -we’d been on the way. Why, we must have been carried fifteen miles -downstream.”</p> - -<p>“All of that,” said Jack. “And Dad will have a hard time making his way -through the underbrush and jungle growth along that marshy river bank on -his side of the stream. He’ll keep hunting till he finds us. But we can -hardly look for him to put in an appearance today. Well, thank goodness, -we not only saved ourselves but the raft and its supplies, too. That’s -something. And we’ll find a way out of this all right.”</p> - -<p>Frank who, although the smallest of the three suffered most from the -heat oppression, had remained silent, sitting on a box and fanning his -flushed face with his sun helmet. Now he leaped to his feet, and his -eyes lost the drowsy look induced by the heat and sparkled with -animation.</p> - -<p>“Jack, if we’ve been gone more than three hours, it’s dollars to -doughnuts that we can get in touch with your father.”</p> - -<p>“You mean—”</p> - -<p>“Radio. No less,” answered Frank, triumphantly. Then he proceeded to -elaborate.</p> - -<p>“Your father, as you say, cannot have pushed his way very far through -that jungle growth in three short hours. He knows that whether the -blacks swam for it or not, we would stick to the raft as long as there -remained a chance to save it. So he will figure either that we have -reached shore somewhere below him with the raft or else that we are -still being carried downstream. After he has forced his way through the -jungle a mile or two, what is he most likely to do? Why, to set up the -radio and start calling for us on the chance that we are doing likewise. -Doesn’t that seem probable.”</p> - -<p>“Probable or not,” said Bob, beginning at once to poke about amongst the -contents of the raft in search of the box containing the spare -transmitting set; “at least putting up the radio will give us something -to do.”</p> - -<p>“Right,” said Jack, laying his hand on a case, “and here it is. Now to -get it set up.”</p> - -<p>The blacks, with the exception of Matse who sat dozing on the bank, were -not in sight, having retired to a glade back amongst the trees and gone -to sleep. Their philosophy seemed to be to leave worry to the young -white men.</p> - -<p>“Anyhow, we wouldn’t need them,” decided Jack. “Because we won’t have to -take this stuff ashore to set it up. We can put it up right here on the -raft. Water is a fine conductor and will give us a good ground. And we -can have better luck out here in the open with our aerial than in -amongst the trees.”</p> - -<p>With this the others agreed, and all went to work unpacking the -apparatus. Little was said as they worked, and so expert were they at -this job of putting up a set in double-quick time in the wilds that in a -very short space the loop aerial was in place, all the wires were -connected, and then Jack sat down at the instrument and began tuning in -to the wave length his father would be employing.</p> - -<p>At first there was no response, try as he would. And Jack feared that -perhaps water had penetrated the packing boxes and saturated some of the -wiring. He put off the headpiece, and the three boys went over every -inch of wire. True enough, what Jack feared had really occurred. But -only one small wire was wet. Armature windings and other portions of the -apparatus which could not have been dried out readily had they become -saturated, had escaped.</p> - -<p>“I suppose now we’ll have to build a fire and dry this out,” said Jack, -detaching the three foot strand of insulated wire connecting one post of -the tuning coil with one of the end posts of the switch. “It’s a -nuisance, but I can’t find any replacement wire.”</p> - -<p>“No use building a fire,” said Frank. “This sun is hot enough, goodness -knows. That strand ought to dry out soon enough. Let’s put it here,” he -added, indicating a packing case standing in the sun from the surface of -which heat waves visibly radiated.</p> - -<p>That was done and then the boys sought the shaded end of the raft where -they crouched, talking intermittently, while awaiting the result of the -drying-out process. Several times one or other went and turned over the -wire and at length Jack triumphantly declared it thoroughly dry. Then -the connection was restored, and again he put on the headpiece and tuned -in.</p> - -<p>Bob and Frank looked on anxiously. Almost at once a broad grin broke -over Jack’s face.</p> - -<p>“It’s Dad,” he cried; “calling for us.”</p> - -<p>Then pulling the transmitter toward him, he began to reply. This two-way -set for both transmitting and receiving was of the boys’ own design. -Simpler, more compact, than any device turned out by the great companies -manufacturing radio supplies, it had served them well in other lands and -climes and in the most perilous of circumstances had proven their -staunchest support. The impact of the voice against a sensitive -diaphragm acted to automatically close the receiver. It was this which -constituted the chief feature of the device, making the jump from -transmission to reception and vice versa a matter of no account at all.</p> - -<p>Bob and Frank, unable to hear what Mr. Hampton had to say, but listening -to Jack’s remarks, gathered the drift of the conversation. As Frank had -surmised, the main party had been so delayed in pushing down river -through the jungle growth along the bank that only a couple of miles had -been made. Then, finding no trace of the runaway raft, Mr. Hampton had -returned to their old camp site and obtained the radio which had not -been set up for some days. Rigging it up with Niellsen’s aid, he had at -once begun calling. When no reply was received, he had continued to call -at fifteen-minute intervals. And it was one of these calls which had -caught Jack’s ear.</p> - -<p>Jack was outlining their situation on the island to his father. And -after having heard how matters stood, the latter apparently, so far as -Bob and Frank could gather from Jack’s replies, was of their opinion -regarding a method of rescue. Consequently, he intended again to essay -the crossing of the river at the old camp site, after which he would -make his way down the right bank which was higher ground and freer of -jungle growth to the point opposite the island where the boys believed a -swimmer could cross the channel with a rope.</p> - -<p>Finally, Jack closed communication and turned to his comrades. Relief at -this quick opening of communication with the main party was uppermost in -the minds of all. Once more they had reason to be thankful that radio -was at their command.</p> - -<p>“And a mighty good thing, too,” said Jack, “that we took Frank’s advice, -and split our equipment, so that both Dad and ourselves are supplied.”</p> - -<p>The attempt at rescue, however, could not be made until the following -morning. The better part of the day already was sped. Mr. Hampton would -spend the balance in crossing the river and starting downstream. He -might, of course, reach a position opposite them before nightfall, as -four hours of daylight yet were left. But the crossing could not be -attempted except in daylight and so he would have to wait until the -following day.</p> - -<p>At length, after turning the matter over and considering it from all -angles, the boys decided to go ashore and prepare some food. They had -not eaten since their early morning breakfast. Matse, accordingly, was -aroused and sent to stir up the bearers. A case of tinned foods was -opened, and the boys tossed materials for a meal to the bearers on -shore.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXV' title='XV: RESCUED'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XV</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>RESCUED</span> -</h2> - -<p>Not until shortly after dusk that night was Mr. Hampton heard from. Then -a hail from the right bank of the river near the head of the island was -heard by the boys who had taken up their position about a fire, for the -night had become chilly. Calls sounded back and forth across the water. -Finally, assured of each other’s safety, both parties retired for the -night, prepared to attempt the work of rescue as soon as dawn should -bring sufficient light.</p> - -<p>Bob as the strongest swimmer of the three boys was eager to make the -crossing. But two obvious enough reasons were adduced to make him -abandon the idea. In the first place, the boys did not possess rope. -That Mr. Hampton had, and it would have to be carried to the island by a -member of his party. In the second place, even though the current in the -right hand channel was less swift than the other side of the island, yet -a swimmer setting out for shore from the tip of the island would be hard -put to it to escape being carried down stream into the rapids. On the -other hand, a swimmer taking to the water from the river bank at a point -considerably above the island, could count upon making the crossing in -safety. Moreover, he would have the rope from shore and, if he became -endangered, his comrades could pull him to safety.</p> - -<p>So it was that one of the two Kikuyus who had crossed the river at the -old camp site the previous day again was selected. And as soon as -daylight came, he set out.</p> - -<p>The boys with Matse and their bearers watched from the island. They had -been up since before dawn. On the other shore they could see the Kikuyus -congregated in a chattering group, while Mr. Hampton directed operations -and Niellsen could be seen at his motion picture camera, prepared to -photograph any dramatic incidents as they occurred.</p> - -<p>The Kikuyu, a rangy fellow more than six feet in height, swam strongly -until well into the current. Then he let himself drift in order to -estimate its strength. Satisfied that if he headed directly for the -island, he would be borne beyond it and into the rapids below, he then -could be seen to head straight across stream.</p> - -<p>Even then, however, the swift current carried him along at such a rate -as to make it unlikely he would reach the island.</p> - -<p>Bob shook his head, voicing the thought in all their minds.</p> - -<p>“He’ll have to swim up stream or he’ll never make it.”</p> - -<p>Evidently, the swimmer was of the same opinion. For the next moment the -watchers on both the river bank and the island could see him alter his -course and assume a direction calculated to carry him across the river -on a long upstream slant except for the effect upon his progress of the -current.</p> - -<p>The boys watched his head, black and round, cleaving the sunlit water, -and noted with commendation the steady rise and fall of his arms in an -overhead stroke that gave powerful impetus to his lithe body.</p> - -<p>“I believe he’ll make it all right,” said Bob, after a moment.</p> - -<p>Closer and closer drew the swimmer. And now the boys saw a long thin -line of rope trailing through the water behind him. It was tied about -his waist and was being paid out by other Negroes who were following -down stream along the right bank. A narrow shelf of land, free of -underbrush, lay between the river and the bluffs behind, affording them -sufficient footing.</p> - -<p>The Kikuyus on the island shouted frequent encouragement to the swimmer, -who once or twice waved an arm in token of acknowledgment. He betrayed -no exhaustion, although the effort he was putting into his task was -great. Finally, he won through the strongest portion of the current and -found himself in more quiet water, after which it was only a matter of -moments until willing hands had him safe ashore.</p> - -<p>Then began the work of pulling in the line about his waist, to the other -end of which Mr. Hampton had tied three ends of cable, figuring that -nothing less than three heavy ropes would provide a ferry sufficiently -stout to ensure safety in the transport of a raft from the island.</p> - -<p>The question of whether the original raft could be towed around the end -of the island from its anchorage on the side opposite to that of the -ferry was quickly decided in the negative. Inspection of the route -convinced the boys that even if it could be poled and tugged by ropes -into position against the rush of the current, yet the rocks strewing -the river at the upstream tip of the island could not be negotiated.</p> - -<p>It was decided, therefore, that a new raft would have to be built. Mr. -Hampton was apprised of this, and went into camp on the river bank. -There was nothing he could do to help. With them on the raft the boys -had axes for everybody, and there was plenty of timber growing on the -island to build any number of rafts. It was merely a question of time -until a raft could be built, and in the meantime there was naught the -main body of the expedition could do except wait.</p> - -<p>Soon, then, axes were ringing, and there was a great ripping and tearing -of creepers and vines with which to bind the logs together. Frank had -suggested dismantling the original raft and carrying the logs across the -island to the other shore, but this plan had been vetoed, as to drag the -logs through five hundred feet of rank jungle growth would involve more -labor than to cut other logs on the farther shore where the new raft was -to be launched.</p> - -<p>It would be hard enough, when the time came, to transfer the boxes and -bales from the old raft to the new.</p> - -<p>At the end of several hours, the new raft was built. It had been made -considerably smaller than the original one, in fact, little more than a -third its size. Thus the danger of placing too great strain on the ropes -of the ferry was removed. And the boys found that, even bearing a -considerable cargo and two men, the raft rode buoyantly, with the top -well above water.</p> - -<p>“Pretty good job for amateurs, I’ll say,” remarked Bob, as he -contemplated the raft before stepping aboard. He and Matse had been -selected to make the first trip, and the equipment they were to carry -already had been stowed on the raft.</p> - -<p>The big fellow had reason to feel pride in their accomplishment. He -himself had worked like a Trojan, doing the work of two men, and -spurring on the bearers to greater exertions by his example.</p> - -<p>“All aboard, Matse,” he cried. And the young interpreter grinning -followed him.</p> - -<p>The three lengths of cable sent them by Mr. Hampton had been fastened to -a strong tree at the water’s edge. The other ends had been made fast in -similar fashion. So low had the cables been tied that the ends were only -a few feet above water, while the middle portion sagged into the stream. -From side to side of the raft, front, rear and in the middle, had been -tied stout lengths of rope, passing over the cable. Tied to the forward -end, moreover, was a strong line lighter in weight than the cables, with -which Mr. Hampton’s party could pull the raft ahead. Other means of -propulsion were long stout poles.</p> - -<p>Wielding these, Bob and Matse poled out into the stream. They found they -touched bottom for a considerable distance. And all went well until they -neared the middle of the channel, when the water deepened to the point -where poling became an impossibility. Then laying the poles aside, the -two raftsmen seized the cable in their hands and what with the tugs they -gave it combined with the steady pull from shore, they managed to -negotiate the channel without too much difficulty. Whereupon, once more -finding themselves in shallower water they again fell to poling and so -at length reached the bank in safety.</p> - -<p>While bearers were unloading the raft, Bob pointed out to Mr. Hampton an -additional safeguard. The rope with which those on shore had pulled the -raft ahead seemed to him too light in weight. No heavier rope, however, -was available to be attached in its place. But another rope of the same -weight was added. Then Jack was signalled to pull the raft back to the -island by means of another light rope attached to the rear.</p> - -<p>Trip after trip until four had been made the rude ferry was pulled back -and forth across the channel without mishap. When all the goods carried -down stream on that wild ride had been recovered, the afternoon was well -advanced. And Mr. Hampton announced they would camp where they were -until the following day.</p> - -<p>“Good enough,” said Niellsen, “that will give me a chance to photograph -the rapids and the water falls.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, you found a fall?” said Frank.</p> - -<p>Niellsen laughed. “I got cut up pretty badly scrambling through the -rocks and briers to the top of that bluff,” he said, pointing to the -promontory a half mile distant, around which swept the river. “But I was -rewarded when I got there by sight of a water falls that must be all of -seven hundred feet. The river narrows to less than a hundred yards in -width, and a tremendous volume of water pours over the lip of the falls. -I had only a pocket camera with me. Now I want to go back with a motion -picture camera, and get some good film of it. You lads probably want to -go along and take a look at what you missed seeing close at hand.”</p> - -<p>“Close at hand, is right,” commented Frank. “A little more and we would -have been part of it.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXVI' title='XVI: A CHANGE IN PLANS'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XVI</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>A CHANGE IN PLANS</span> -</h2> - -<p>The next day Mr. Hampton called the boys and Niellsen into conference -regarding their future course. They had put the country of the Kikuyus -quite definitely behind them in their passage of the marshy region and -now of this river, of which they did not know the name, although Mr. -Hampton believed it to be probably a branch of the Terywell.</p> - -<p>“We are on the fringes of big game country by all accounts,” he said, -“both from what I picked up in Nairobi and from what Wimba tells me. -West of us lies Lake Victoria; east, Mount Kenya.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the high one, isn’t it, Dad?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton nodded. “Said to be 17,010 feet,” he commented. “Next to -Mount Kilimanjaro, which is also in Kenya Colony, lying southeast of -Nairobi and more than 19,000 feet in height, it is the tallest peak in -Africa.”</p> - -<p>“I vote for striking toward Mount Kenya,” said Frank, emphatically. -“We’ll get into higher altitudes and escape from this awful heat.”</p> - -<p>“Huh,” grunted Bob. “It wasn’t so hot that night eight or ten days ago -when we couldn’t get enough blankets to keep warm.”</p> - -<p>He referred to one of the meteoric changes in temperature which makes -Africa land of extremes, when even the equatorial region a day of -blazing sunshine and suffocating oppressive heat is frequently succeeded -by terrific rains and a freezing night.</p> - -<p>Niellsen looked thoughtful. “It’s not such a bad idea to strike for -Mount Kenya,” he said, “if only there’s a chance of getting some films -of animal life. But what are game conditions like over there?”</p> - -<p>“Wimba says they’re pretty good,” said Mr. Hampton. “However, he -believes that in the Kavirondo country northeast of Lake Victoria, they -will be better. And if we strike in that direction, we can replenish our -supplies at Kisumu on the lake. It is on the railroad from the coast, -and lake steamers touch there, too.”</p> - -<p>“Lake steamers?” Bob cried in surprise.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton nodded. “The immediate region around Lake Victoria was -developing rapidly when the war halted its progress. Germans, British, -Belgians and Portuguese, all are in this country hereabouts, you know. -Their armed forces of blacks officered by whites messed life up pretty -badly. However, since the end of the war I was given to understand in -Nairobi development has been picking up again at a great rate. So at -Kisumu, which is the trade center for a big region, although only a -little town itself, we undoubtedly will be able to replenish our -supplies. And as we are beginning to run rather low, I believe it will -be wise to do so.”</p> - -<p>“Kisumu for me,” said Bob, “and the Kavirondo region. If big game is to -be found there, especially. I want to bag at least one lion on this -trip. And so far we haven’t encountered one.”</p> - -<p>“And I want an elephant,” said Jack.</p> - -<p>Niellsen laughed. “I want to shoot lions and elephants, too,” he said. -“But with the camera.”</p> - -<p>“Looks as if I were outvoted,” said Frank, mopping his sticky face, for -the heat of the day still persisted.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton regarded him sympathetically. “Don’t worry. Frank,” he said. -“We’ll get into mountainous country up there, and, in fact, we’ll be out -of these Kikuyu plains pretty quickly. That range of hills ahead form -the outposts of the mountains of which Kenya is the tallest peak, unless -I’m much mistaken. We’ll be into them by tomorrow. And then, even though -the weather will continue hot, yet it won’t be the muggy heat of these -lowlands.”</p> - -<p>The next morning, accordingly, camp was struck and the expedition set -out for Kisumu, which was reached after a week of uneventful travel. -From their first day after crossing the river, they entered a populous -region. Villages became numerous.</p> - -<p>Anxious to reach the Kavirondo country, after first stopping at Kisumu -for a renewal of supplies, Mr. Hampton did not loiter on the way. And as -Niellsen and the boys found little either of topography or animal life -to make interesting pictures, the party pushed on steadily without any -of the customary side expeditions for the purpose of obtaining pictures -of animal life.</p> - -<p>Kisumu proved to be a surprise, being far from the traditional picture -of African town, what with its business buildings of European -architecture and its comfortable bungalows where European residents -dwelt. One of the lake steamers was in the town and the boys sought and -obtained permission to board it for inspection. They were surprised to -find it a modern, though small, craft, with comfortable cabins, -well-appointed saloons, and electric lights.</p> - -<p>“Not much like the Africa we’ve been through,” said Mr. Hampton, “and -even less like the Africa into which we soon will plunge. But, then, you -fellows must remember that this is a point on the main travel artery, as -the railroad from the distant coast connects here with the boats to -carry travellers across the lake and to the northern railroad line. Not -far from here, I am told, we’ll find the country wild enough, and the -people far more primitive than the Kikuyus of the plains.”</p> - -<p>In the several days spent at Kisumu, while Mr. Hampton was busy -restocking for their further journey, the boys knocked about the little -town and at the Club to which a friend of Mr. Hampton’s living down -country in Nairobi had given them cards for use in case they came this -way, they made the acquaintance of an Englishman who told them a good -deal about the great lake sparkling beyond the town. He was in Kisumu to -convalesce from an attack of jungle fever, and quite willing to wile -away the slow hours with conversation.</p> - -<p>Many stories he told them of the furious storms which, rising with -extraordinary rapidity, lash the surface of this second largest lake in -the world. For such is Victoria Nyanza, being roughly speaking some 200 -miles in length by as many in breadth.</p> - -<p>“I was out fishing with a friend one day in a native canoe,” he said, -“when the blue sky which had been without a cloud suddenly changed to an -ominous gray. In the twinkling of an eye, the wind rose and a slashing -rain began to fall. We made with all speed for a neighboring creek to -seek shelter. But just as we were about to land we spotted a crocodile -concealed among the reeds. I tell you, lads, my heart went pit-a-pat as -I thought of what might have occurred if, in our haste, we had leaped -ashore before spotting him.”</p> - -<p>“What happened?” asked the interested Bob.</p> - -<p>“Oh, these lake natives are so used to dealing with crocodiles that they -are undaunted. We went on a bit farther before landing, and then one of -our canoe men sneaked up behind the crocodile and slashed off his tail -with a knife. After the monster was thus disabled, for his tail is his -most effective weapon, you know, the native finished him off.”</p> - -<p>“Single-handed and with only a knife?” breathed Frank, round-eyed. -“Whew.”</p> - -<p>Lake Victoria was unknown to the European world until the explorer Speke -discovered it in the middle of the last century. Even Stanley on his -memorable expedition into the heart of Equatorial Africa had skirted it -only a short time before without even suspecting its existence.</p> - -<p>While at Kisumu the boys found such relief from the lowlands heat, for -Victoria lies 4,000 feet above sea level and the climate of neighboring -regions is delightful and salubrious, that they became imbued with -renewed energy. They were here, there and everywhere, poking into -everything of interest to be seen. Thus it was that they heard of a -fleet of native canoes which would set out the morning of the second day -and arose early, along with Niellsen, for the purpose of obtaining a -film of the event.</p> - -<p>As the day was clear, what promised to be really excellent film was -obtained. The canoes were of the simplest construction, being nothing -more nor less than hollowed out tree trunks, stoppered at the ends with -wooden plugs set in clay.</p> - -<p>“Whew,” said Frank, addressing Ransome, their English friend, who had -come down with them to behold the start of the fishing fleet, “those -things may be safe enough. But I, for one, wouldn’t care to trust myself -in any such craft, especially on this lake which you say is so -treacherous.”</p> - -<p>Ransome shrugged. “They are really good boats,” he said. “Even when -tossed by a rhinoceros, they seldom capsize.”</p> - -<p>At the end of the second day, Mr. Hampton announced that not only had -their supplies been restocked but also he had obtained the services of -new bearers acquainted with the Kavirondo country who would accompany -them henceforth. The Kikuyus were to be sent back to Nairobi, where they -had been recruited, by train, in accordance with the contract agreement. -He had been fortunate in replacing Wimba as interpreter and “straw -boss,” by a six-foot Kavirondo named Mabele.</p> - -<p>The next day, therefore, the expedition put Kisumu behind and struck -into the Kavirondo country, noticing almost at once a marked change in -the character of the country, grassy plateaus and plains being replaced -by lofty hills and dense forests, while the native life appeared far -more primitive than that of the Kikuyus.</p> - -<p>It was noted, too, that the natives were none too friendly. When they -entered strange villages, tall warriors would crowd around them -scowling. And their heavy hide shields and twelve-foot spears created an -uneasy impression in the mind of at least one member of the expedition, -namely Mr. Hampton. Then, too, it was no unusual matter to look up -suddenly while following a native trail through dense forest and behold -the eyes of a half-hidden watcher peering from leafy covert, a matter -which occurred not once but many times.</p> - -<p>“They told me at Kisumu that the Kavirondos were none too friendly, and -were resentful of the encroachments of the whites,” said Mr. Hampton, in -camp one night. “Yet I was assured we would be safe enough. However, I -can’t understand this continued unfriendliness. We shall have to push -ahead without organizing any side expeditions that would split our -forces, until we reach the territory of Chief Ungaba which Mabele tells -me is only two days’ march away. He is friendly to the whites, and in -his territory we can hunt big game with both rifle and camera to our -heart’s content.”</p> - -<p>Care was taken not to give offense to the natives, and Mabele was -cautioned to warn those of his bearers who were members of Lake Victoria -tribes and not Kavirondos to refrain from becoming embroiled in disputes -with the native populace. Guard also was maintained at night to prevent -trouble. For although Mr. Hampton was of the opinion that the -unfriendliness of the natives was not such as would lead them to attack -white men so close to the Lake Victoria settlements, yet he suspected -that if the natives considered them off guard they would not hesitate to -steal whatever they could lay their hands on.</p> - -<p>However, they finally reached the village of Chief Ungaba without -unpleasant incident. And as they drew near late in the afternoon of a -clear day, the chief himself at the head of what looked like the entire -population came put to welcome them.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXVII' title='XVII: OUT FOR A RHINO'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XVII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>OUT FOR A RHINO</span> -</h2> - -<p>Here the expedition settled down to the serious business of shooting big -game with a camera, while the days insensibly rolled into weeks. For -Chief Ungaba and his people were friendly and, as the park-like country -with its lofty hills, great stretches of thorn bush and spreading -forests comparatively free of underbrush, abounded in game, Mr. Hampton -decided to use the village of Ungaba as a base of operations from which -side expeditions could be sent out.</p> - -<p>Under the tutelage of Niellsen, the boys had developed into excellent -motion picture photographers. And whether they lay concealed for days in -brush shelters, awaiting the opportunity to film animals coming to a -water hole to drink, or whether they crawled for hours along game -trails, dragging both rifle and big camera with them, they returned not -only with their enthusiasm undampened but also with many feet of film -which they felt certain would prove on development to be amply worth all -the effort expended.</p> - -<p>That these trips were not without incident goes without saying. Time and -again they had narrow escapes, as when Jack on one occasion crawled -around a rock with a view to film buffalo feeding in a grassy depression -at the base of the hillside, only to find a particularly deadly snake, -the mamba, coiled on the sunny side just at the place where he would -next have placed his hand. Drawing back with lightning quickness, he -drew his revolver and shot the snake. The sound of the shot sent the -buffalo tearing and lumbering away and spoiled his chance of getting a -picture of them, a chance which he had spent a full hour in acquiring. -But he saved his life.</p> - -<p>Many weary hours, too, were spent in stalking animals, so that the -obtaining of each separate bit of film was an adventure in itself. The -common jungle grass retarded progress and its pollen getting into their -eyes set up an irritation which half-blinded them. They were never -without at least one member of the party suffering from swollen eyes. -Anticipating this, however, they had come provided with eye wash for the -alleviation of distress. It was the dry season, and they wore only the -lightest of clothing, consisting of sleeveless shirt and knee length -pants, “like Boy Scouts,” Bob remarked. Consequently, they suffered much -from the scratches of various other varieties of grass with barbs, of -the tall plumed reeds with stiff leaves which cut like a knife and, -especially, from the “cow itch.” This latter name they gave a plant -having seed pods covered with fine hairs which pierced even through -clothing and set up an excruciating itching.</p> - -<p>On the whole, however, the hardships were less than they had expected to -encounter, and a hot bath in a collapsible tub on the return from a -picture-taking expedition went far to make life bearable. Moreover, they -had the consolation of piling up thousands of feet of film which they -felt assured would be invaluable.</p> - -<p>“I can just see the kids sitting in the motion picture house when some -of these scenes flash on the screen,” said Bob, one night, after -returning from a particularly trying expedition upon which eland, -giraffes, buffalo, hyenas and adjutant birds had been filmed. “Only we -need some more thrilling stuff.”</p> - -<p>“I should think you’d have gotten enough thrills on that runaway raft to -last you the rest of your life,” said Niellsen, smoking his pipe on the -opposite side of the camp fire. “Just the same, what you say about our -films of animal life is true. I wonder,” he added, turning toward Mr. -Hampton seated on a camp chair at his shoulder, “whether we couldn’t -persuade Chief Ungaba to organize a rhinoceros hunt. I have a hunch we’d -get a thrill out of that.”</p> - -<p>“Good idea,” approved Jack. “Let’s try it.” After some further -discussion, it was agreed that the next morning all should wait on Chief -Ungaba and prefer their request. Accordingly, they turned in and slept -soundly and at an early hour arose and entered the village which lay not -far away across an open meadow. Whenever camp was pitched at an African -village, the party was careful to locate some distance away, both -because the odors of these villages frequently become offensive and to -avoid possible friction arising between the native populace and the -hearers from alien tribes.</p> - -<p>The village was up and astir, and as the boys passed along the main -street toward the central square where Chief Ungaba’s hut was located -they found their interest excited by sights which never became stale. -Cooking fires were going outside the mud-walled, thatched-roofed huts, -and over them the Kavirondo women with their “tails” were busied -preparing breakfast for their lords and masters who still lolled on -sleeping mats within or else yawned sleepily at door openings, watching -the whites. These so-called “tails” worn by the women never failed to -amuse, and many a hearty laugh had they given the boys. Made of plaited -grass and tied to a string about the waist, they fall down behind, and -denote the status of the wearer. Little girls wear little ones, engaged -girls slightly larger ones, and married matrons the largest of all. As -loin cloths comprise practically the only clothing worn by men, women or -children, the tribesmen looked as if, said Bob, “they were all ready for -a plunge.” Some, however, considered themselves well dressed, indeed, -for their bodies were smeared with red and white clays, producing an -effect which they considered decorative in the extreme but which the -boys regarded as particularly ghastly.</p> - -<p>Chief Ungaba sitting at the door of his hut was not an especially -kinglike object as he knuckled his eyes sleepily. He failed to note -their approach at first because of the fact that he was leaning sideways -as if to hear without being seen while listening to sounds of high -shrill voices raised in altercation within the hut.</p> - -<p>“What’s going on, I wonder,” asked Bob of his companions.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton laughed heartily. “The chief’s wives are hard at it,” he -said. “They are having their regular morning squabble. Poor man, he has -six first wives, and they lead him a dog’s life. He is chief everywhere -except in his own house.”</p> - -<p>Scarcely had he finished speaking than a piercing shriek cut through the -clamor of angry voices, followed by another and another. Then a sobbing -young woman ran headlong from the hut, clutching her hair, while behind -her three older women crowded each other in the doorway. They stared -triumphantly until the younger woman disappeared amidst the adjacent -huts and then withdrew.</p> - -<p>“The old ones kicked the best looking one out,” said Niellsen, grinning -a little bit. “Well, age has to protect itself. Now that they’ve banded -together to get rid of her, however, they’ll probably fall to fighting -amongst themselves.”</p> - -<p>The noisy quarrelling subsided, however, as if by magic, and once more -peace reigned in Chief Ungaba’s household. The lord and master who had -cowered away from the door as if trying to squeeze into the wall, when -the fight was carried into the open, now, upon the withdrawal of the -women, stood up and stretched his arms wide in a yawn. The boys couldn’t -repress a laugh, but they smothered it with their hands so as not to let -the sound reach his ears.</p> - -<p>Then, as Mr. Hampton approached, the chief for the first time became -cognizant of their presence, and a smile of welcome broke over his -broad, full-lipped, humorous face.</p> - -<p>“A quarrelsome woman is worse than a hyena, and five are enough to -defend a town,” he said. “My white brother will understand.”</p> - -<p>He spoke in the Kavirondo tongue, but Mr. Hampton and the boys had been -studying the simple language with the aid of their interpreter Mabele, -and during their lengthy stay they had acquired a rough working -knowledge of it which made the chief’s words understandable.</p> - -<p>“Chief Ungaba speaks words of wisdom,” answered Mr. Hampton, gravely, -but with twinkling eye.</p> - -<p>And the chief, observing the twinkle, laughed outright.</p> - -<p>Thereupon, Mr. Hampton broached the subject of the proposed rhinoceros -hunt, to which the chief readily agreed. He was willing enough to lend -his warriors for the purpose of beating up the reeds of a nearby marsh, -as Mr. Hampton promised him in return the carcass of the slain beast. -The high-powered rifles of the Hampton party would prove far more -efficient weapons against the tough hide armor of the monster than the -bows or spears of the villagers. And the obtaining of fresh meat was -always a consideration. Indeed, there would be a great feast in the -village.</p> - -<p>Negotiations concluded, the whites returned to camp with the assurance -that on the edge of the reedy marsh some two miles west of the village -in the middle of the afternoon they would find Chief Ungaba’s men -awaiting them for the hunt.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXVIII' title='XVIII: ON THE RHINO’S PATH'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XVIII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>ON THE RHINO’S PATH</span> -</h2> - -<p>That assurance was fulfilled, for when the Hampton party arrived on the -scene tall warriors armed with spears and with clappers for producing a -particularly atrocious racket already had spread in a wide circle around -the marsh.</p> - -<p>Mabele who had preceded them came running up with the intelligence that -a huge rhinoceros, the largest seen in that district for a long time, -had been observed entering the marsh the preceding night. Although a -plains animal, yet it resembles its river-loving brother, the -hippopotamus, in its regard for cool damp spots. And this marsh was a -noted haunt of the rhinos.</p> - -<p>Many acres in extent, the marsh stretched away ahead in an expanse of -tall reeds and low trees. And although the boys knew at least two score -beaters were converging toward the plain edging the marsh where they had -taken their station, yet they could not see them. Now and then, however, -the sound of a clapper could be heard. Nor was there any sign of the -rhino.</p> - -<p>Three motion picture cameras had been brought along, so as to photograph -every phase of the hunt. And Niellsen, Jack and Frank were to operate -them. Bob, the best shot of the three boys, and Mr. Hampton constituted -the armed hunters of the party. They were not to kill the monster until -good pictures had been obtained first of the rhino emerging from the -swamp and of the beaters converging upon his lair.</p> - -<p>As the most expert of the operators, Niellsen had elected to go into the -marsh with his camera and follow up the beaters. And Mr. Hampton -accompanied him as his protector. This left the three boys alone in the -plain.</p> - -<p>It was a morning of blazing sunshine and, early though the hour, the day -already had become uncomfortably warm. Frank suffered especially, as he -lugged his big camera to a vantage point some distance from Jack so that -they would be able to take in the scene from various angles.</p> - -<p>“If the rhino charges you, what will you do?” asked Bob, carrying -Frank’s film box.</p> - -<p>“I’m going to run,” said Frank. “What d’you think?”</p> - -<p>“Doesn’t a sense of duty to your employers fill your breast?” demanded -Bob, as if in surprise. “I should think you’d stick on the burning deck -and let the rhino charge right over you in order to get a picture of him -in action.”</p> - -<p>“You’ve got another think coming,” replied Frank, coming to a halt and -adjusting the tripod. “Guess this is far enough away from Jack.”</p> - -<p>“But just think,” persisted Bob, “of what a gorgeous picture it would -make. Imagine sitting in a theatre at home and suddenly seeing a huge -rhino come lumbering toward you, as if he were going to charge right out -of the screen and into the audience.”</p> - -<p>“Talk to Jack,” said Frank coolly. “I can’t hear you. Whoo, it’s hot. -Wish the battle would begin.”</p> - -<p>Close at hand in the marsh, as if his words had been a signal, a -tremendous uproar of cries broke out interspersed with the racheting -sound of the clappers in the hands of the native beaters.</p> - -<p>“Better get ready,” advised Bob. “That sounds pretty close.”</p> - -<p>Frank leaped to his feet, all eagerness, the lassitude of the moment -before forgotten, and took his place at the camera.</p> - -<p>“See anything yet?” he called.</p> - -<p>“No,” said Bob. “And I don’t hear any shots, either. So I suppose Jack’s -father isn’t potting away. But what an infernal din those beaters are -putting up.”</p> - -<p>The noise died down, became more remote, and Frank relaxed his tense -attitude at the camera, while Bob once more laid down his rifle.</p> - -<p>“Huh. Guess the rhino headed for another direction.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose so,” said Frank. “Certainly the beaters are withdrawing.”</p> - -<p>Once more they were alone on the sunny plain with its tall buffalo -grass, alone except for Jack whose head and chest only could be seen -above the tall grass some distance away. He waved a hand and they -replied similarly, but he was too far away to make himself heard except -by shouting and so did not call to them.</p> - -<p>Perhaps five minutes had elapsed during which no immediate sounds except -the drone of huge flies and the tiny hum of insects broke the somnolent -stillness. The boys spoke now and then in low voices, but in the main -were silent. Bob’s keen glance played continually along the edge of the -marsh, but Frank had taken seat on the film box and was sunk in revery.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Bob’s hand gripped his shoulder, and Bob’s voice whispered low:</p> - -<p>“Sh. Here he comes.”</p> - -<p>Frank sprang to his feet and gazed in the direction indicated by Bob.</p> - -<p>A huge brute with dark, dun-colored hide had parted the reeds of the -marsh not fifty yards away. He stood sideways at the edge of the plain, -formidable horned head lifted as if listening to the distant sounds of -the beaters.</p> - -<p>“He eluded them in some way,” whispered Frank. “What a picture.”</p> - -<p>Swinging the lens of the camera about until he brought the rhino into -focus, he began to turn the crank.</p> - -<p>The rhino abandoned his listening attitude and, dropping his head, began -to move slowly forward on a line bringing him midway between Jack and -Frank. Although his legs were short and ponderous, so huge was his body -that it towered above the buffalo grass which parted before him like -water before a scow.</p> - -<p>Over him fluttered a perfect cloud of small birds, like a swarm of bees -hiving on a bough. They made continual darts at the huge back, picking -off ticks and performing his toilet for him. The boys had heard this -phenomenon described, but had never witnessed it, the only rhinos they -had seen heretofore being those captives in Zoos.</p> - -<p>Now and again as he moved slowly along, the huge beast would lift his -head. And at such times he gave the watching, spell-bound boys the -impression that he was sniffing the air as if in search of his -arch-enemy, man.</p> - -<p>Realizing that should the rhino become aware of Jack’s presence and -charge him, his comrade would be without protection as he had the sole -rifle of the outfit, Bob crouching low began making his way to a point -in the rear of the rhino where he could afford protection to Jack as -well as Frank.</p> - -<p>And well it was that he took this precaution. For a time the rhino -continued his slow advance on the line which would avoid both boys, -stopping occasionally to repeat his gesture of lifting his head as if to -sniff. Bob suddenly recalled that, although the day was calm, still -there was a bit of breeze blowing, and that it came from Jack’s -direction. Frank, therefore, was to leeward of the rhino and fairly safe -from detection, as the great beast is short-sighted. But Jack was to -windward and might be detected.</p> - -<p>Remembering what he had heard of rhinos to the effect that they are -short-tempered and fearless, Bob hurried the more and presently found -himself in the broad trail beaten down by the rhino and not far behind -him. Ahead, not twenty yards away, he could see the grotesque, broad -quarters of the beast.</p> - -<p>“The thinnest spot in the rhino’s armor is immediately behind the -foreleg, and that is his most vulnerable spot,” Mr. Hampton had said on -parting.</p> - -<p>Bob remembered. He remembered, too, that the high-powered rifle he -carried was guaranteed to shoot a steel-jacketted bullet that would -penetrate even rhino hide. And the range was close enough. He breathed -more freely, now that he had come to such close quarters. His momentary -panic at thought of Jack’s danger began to disappear.</p> - -<p>Anyhow, he said to himself, the rhino appeared likely to stalk clear out -of the picture, without ever spotting the presence of his photographers -to either side.</p> - -<p>But Bob was mistaken. Suddenly the monster swerved to the right without -warning and charged with amazing swiftness directly toward Jack who was -not more than thirty yards away. His great head jerked at every lurch.</p> - -<p>Bob started running through the grass at a tangent which would place him -close to the beast before the latter could arrive at Jack’s post. He -cast a glance in Jack’s direction, expecting to see the latter pick up -his camera and decamp, but was amazed and alarmed to see Jack busily -grinding away.</p> - -<p>“Great guns,” he muttered, “that rhino must be charging directly into -the camera. Why doesn’t Jack run?”</p> - -<p>But Jack continued at his post, and the truth was, as Bob dashing -forward in alarm suspected, that in making the most of his wonderful -opportunity to obtain a film of the rhino charging head-on he had -forgotten for a moment the important consideration of looking out for -his own safety.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXIX' title='XIX: SAVED FROM THE MONSTER'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XIX</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>SAVED FROM THE MONSTER</span> -</h2> - -<p>On came the rhinoceros, and Jack seeing him grow larger and larger in -the eye of the camera until his bulk seemed to fill the whole world -continued to crank the machine, exulting in the realization that he was -obtaining what undoubtedly would be the finest film of the whole -expedition to date, perhaps the finest and most thrilling of all -including whatever pictures lay in the future.</p> - -<p>He was oblivious, in his blazing excitement, of the fact that the -rhinoceros was charging directly at him. He could not hear Bob’s -frenzied cries. He was unaware of Frank running toward him from the -background.</p> - -<p>When finally, as the rhino came so close that looking into the camera -finder Jack could see little more than the huge formidable head with its -little eyes inflamed in anger, he realized with a shock that in another -minute it would be too late for him to escape.</p> - -<p>What was more, all the risk he had run would go for nought, because the -great beast would trample the tripod and camera and destroy the film.</p> - -<p>Then Jack acted with a speed of which he had not considered himself -capable. But what one can do under stress of tremendous excitement is -considerable.</p> - -<p>Sweeping the legs of the tripod together, he slung the camera over a -shoulder and leaped away, not running in the path of the charging rhino, -but at a right angle from it.</p> - -<p>Seeing his prey escaping, but unable because of his great bulk to halt -his mad career in time, the rhino crashed forward. He passed directly -over the spot where Jack had been stationed not sixty seconds after he -had departed. One foot struck the film box and sent it lurching forward, -and another pile driver descended crushing it into the ground.</p> - -<p>But that was the end of Mr. Rhino. For ere the great beast could turn to -pursue his quarry, Bob’s rifle rang out and, drilled through the heart, -the monster halted, swayed on his feet, then fell over on his side with -a crash that made the very ground tremble.</p> - -<p>Jack returning, white-faced now that he began to realize how close had -been his escape from a horrible death, could not speak as he wrung big -Bob’s hand. And the latter was still filled with nervous excitement -himself.</p> - -<p>They merely looked at each other, hands clasped, trying to grin, with -Bob clutching his rifle and Jack his camera, until a rather hysterical -cry of “Hold it,” from the rear caused them to swing about.</p> - -<p>A score of feet away stood Frank, turning the crank of his camera. He -stopped and leaving the machine in position approached his comrades.</p> - -<p>“Picture of the slain monster and of his near-victim and the latter’s -saviour exchanging pleasantries,” he said.</p> - -<p>Then his tone sobered and grabbing Jack by the shoulders, he shook him -fondly.</p> - -<p>“You good-for-nothing rascal,” he said. “I almost died of heart failure -when I saw you sticking to your post. From the rear it looked as if the -rhino were running right over you. Then I saw you dash away to one side -and, believe me, lad, that was the welcomest sight I’ve ever laid eyes -on.”</p> - -<p>Jack looked apologetic. “Sorry I caused you fellows any worry on my -account,” he said. “The next time I’ll be more careful of your -feelings.”</p> - -<p>“And, oh, yes,” added Frank, as they approached the fallen rhinoceros -and stood looking at his vast proportions, “I did what looked like a -sort of heartless thing. Seeing I couldn’t be of any use, as I was -without a rifle, I put down my camera, which I’d grabbed when running -toward you, and started cranking.”</p> - -<p>“But, say, that’s great,” cried Jack. “You got some of that charge -yourself then, too?”</p> - -<p>“I did that,” said Frank. “You obtained the picture of the rhino -charging head-on. But I got a film of his charge on you, with you -sticking to the camera until in another minute he’d have been upon you. -And I got Bob running up and firing at the crucial moment, the rhino’s -fall, and your handshake afterwards. Oh, I tell you, I got me some real -films.”</p> - -<p>Temporarily thrown off the trail of the rhino, Mr. Hampton and Niellsen -now put in an appearance followed by scores of Chief Ungaba’s warriors. -And an excited throng it was which gathered around while the boys -related their adventure for the benefit of the two white men and Mabele -in turn told the crowding blacks what had occurred.</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess we’ve done all we can for today,” said Mr. Hampton -finally, after the story had been told and Jack had been both scolded -for his foolhardiness and congratulated on his lucky escape. “Suppose we -return to camp and leave the Kavirondos to skin the rhino and bring in -hide and meat.”</p> - -<p>The three boys readily acquiesced in this decision, as all were so -shaken by their experience—Frank and Bob, in fact, suffering more by -reason of their fondness for Jack than did the latter himself—that they -were glad to depart.</p> - -<p>But Niellsen decided to stay behind in order to obtain a film of the -skinning and cutting up process. So the four others departed for camp -where, after a bath and a change of clothing, they gathered in front of -the tent to talk over the day’s events and speculate upon the character -of the feast which Chief Ungaba would give that night and to which they -had been invited. In fact, they were to be the guests of honor.</p> - -<p>Presently Jack arose and strolled away again to his tent, Bob calling to -him a lazy inquiry as to what he was doing.</p> - -<p>“Going to listen-in on the radio,” said Jack. He paused a moment before -going on. “There’s not much to listen to in this part of the world,” he -said. “But you know that night before last I heard Cape Town. And then, -too, there is always the possibility of getting the wireless signals -from some of these better class coast boats, even though they are more -than a thousand miles away.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and the lake steamers, too,” supplemented Frank, rising. “I heard -one of them carrying on a lengthy conversation about freight rates the -other day with a trader at Entebbe. Seemed the trader chap was a -wireless nut and had gone to considerable expense to put in a station.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right except for one thing,” said Mr. Hampton. “I heard of that -station when at Kisumu. Entebbe is on the northern side of Lake -Victoria. And when the trader put in his station, he didn’t find it so -very expensive, because the British government gave him a subsidy. That -might be a valuable outpost in case of trouble with the natives, which -some of the Germans who are still lurking in the hinterland might stir -up.”</p> - -<p>As Mr. Hampton ceased, the two boys who had waited for him to finish, -started once more for the tent.</p> - -<p>A long silence fell between the two left behind. Bob outstretched on a -poncho was too comfortable even to talk, and Mr. Hampton: was busy -posting his “log,” as he called the daily record of their travels and -adventures.</p> - -<p>Presently a sharp call in Jack’s voice caused his father to look up, -while big Bob who had been almost asleep rolled over and propped himself -on an elbow. Jack stood in the doorway of the tent, beckoning.</p> - -<p>“Dad, Bob, come here. The radio.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXX' title='XX: A CALL FOR HELP'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XX</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>A CALL FOR HELP</span> -</h2> - -<p>Disappearing within the tent after his excited exclamations, Jack left -two bewildered individuals staring at each other beside the camp fire.</p> - -<p>“What in the world can he mean?” wondered Bob, getting to his feet.</p> - -<p>“He has heard something over the radio,” surmised Mr. Hampton. “From the -way he dashed into the tent, in fact, I’d say he’s still listening in. -Come on, let’s investigate.”</p> - -<p>Hastening across the intervening space, they pushed aside the tent flap, -finding the interior lighted by lantern, and discovered Frank seated at -the radio with the headpiece clamped to his ears and Jack bending above -him.</p> - -<p>As they entered they heard Frank speaking into the transmitter say:</p> - -<p>“Here he is, Mr. Ransome. Just a minute.” Pulling the headpiece from his -ears, Frank proffered it to Mr. Hampton, while getting to his feet.</p> - -<p>“What’s going on? Who have you?” questioned Mr. Hampton, still -bewildered. But at the same time he accepted the proffered instrument, -while Jack thrust him into the camp chair vacated by Frank.</p> - -<p>“It’s the English trader we met at Kisumu,” responded Frank. “He’s -calling for you. Says he’s called every night for a week over the -station at Entebbe where he is now located. But he’ll explain. Talk to -him.”</p> - -<p>Pulling the transmitter toward him, Mr. Hampton obediently called -“Hello.”</p> - -<p>Then Bob, unable longer to control his impatience, seized Frank and -pulled him outside.</p> - -<p>“Now tell me what’s going on,” he commanded. “I don’t want to speak in -there for fear of disturbing Mr. Hampton. But what’s this all about?”</p> - -<p>It had grown appreciably darker in the short interval since Bob had -entered the tent, for once the sun goes down in equatorial Africa night -comes on apace. But the light of the lantern fell through the opening -upon Frank who stood holding back the flap and listening to what Mr. -Hampton was saying inside, and this light showed his eyes ablaze with -excitement.</p> - -<p>He turned to Bob as if reluctant to discontinue trying to hear what the -older man seated at the radio transmitter was saying. Then he grinned at -big Bob’s exasperation.</p> - -<p>“Listen, old thing,” he said. “We’re in luck.”</p> - -<p>“Luck?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, of the biggest kind. The man on the other end of the line is none -other than the Englishman we met at Kisumu.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what of it? Why don’t you tell me what he said?” Big Bob’s -exasperation at this teasing grew apace.</p> - -<p>“He’s been calling every night for a week from Entebbe in the hope that -we would pick him up. But as you know we haven’t been using the radio -much, and so we haven’t happened to hear him.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” said Bob, his patience thoroughly exhausted. “I heard that. -Now will you talk turkey?” And reaching out a big arm, he pulled Frank -against his chest and began to knuckle his head with his free hand in -the familiar fashion known as administering the “Dutch rub.”</p> - -<p>“Ouch. Leggo, you big bully,” gasped Frank. “Will you talk straight?”</p> - -<p>“Uh-huh.”</p> - -<p>Bob released him. “Now speak up,” he said belligerently, “or who knows -what’ll happen to you?”</p> - -<p>“He wants us to go with him to the Mountains of the Moon?”</p> - -<p>“Are you trying to—”</p> - -<p>Frank backed off, laughing, hands held up defensively in front of him.</p> - -<p>“No, I’m not trying to kid anybody,” he said. “Well, what’s this -‘Mountains of the Moon’ stuff, then?”</p> - -<p>“Not the Moon in the sky, Bob,” said Frank. “But a mountainous district -in the Belgian Conga constituting the very heart of Africa.”</p> - -<p>“Oh.” Bob was mollified, but still puzzled. “What for?”</p> - -<p>“There are active volcanoes over there, and Mr. Ransome says they are -reported by native rumors reaching Entebbe to be in eruption. He’s going -in and says he thought we might want to go along.”</p> - -<p>Bob felt his interest quickened. Volcanoes in active eruption. That -would be something like, a sight worth travelling hundreds of miles to -see. “Fine,” he cried enthusiastically. “What wonderful picture stuff.”</p> - -<p>Frank nodded. “That’s what I thought of the first thing, too.”</p> - -<p>“But what is Mr. Ransome going in for?” asked Bob.</p> - -<p>“Oh, I suppose these fellows who knock about the wilds like to take in -the sights as well as we who don’t live here all the time.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe so,” agreed Bob. Then, as a new thought occurred to him, he -asked: “How soon could we get to Entebbe? And how much farther does this -volcanic region lie?”</p> - -<p>Frank confessed ignorance regarding the answers to both questions.</p> - -<p>“Come on, let’s go back inside,” he said, “now that your curiosity is -satisfied. You know as much about it now as I do. Let’s see what Mr. -Hampton has to say.”</p> - -<p>The latter concluded his conversation with “That’s agreed then and we’ll -start tomorrow,” as the boys re-entered the tent, and from Jack who had -remained at his father’s shoulder burst a loud “Hurray.”</p> - -<p>“Are we going?” cried Frank eagerly.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton nodded, and Jack shouted, “First thing in the morning.”</p> - -<p>“Fine,” cried Bob. “I was about fed up with this district, anyway. Not -enough excitement.” Mr. Hampton looked grave.</p> - -<p>“You’ll get enough of that where we’re going,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Anything beside volcanoes?” queried Bob, struck by something in the -older man’s tone.</p> - -<p>“Ransome said there was some unrest amongst the natives,” Mr. Hampton -replied, after a pause. “He seems to believe some of the German -officials driven out of East Africa are at the bottom of it, although he -said there was no evidence of any such thing. All the native reports, he -said, laid the trouble-making at the door of a new medicine man who has -appeared in the devastated areas and is known as ‘The Prophet.’ I -couldn’t, of course, gain a very comprehensive survey of the situation -during our rather brief conversation. But I did find out that this -medicine man has gathered considerable of a following about him.”</p> - -<p>“Won’t it be dangerous?” asked a voice from the doorway, and they turned -to find Niellsen standing there. So engrossed had all inside the tent -been that they had failed to note his approach.</p> - -<p>He put down his motion picture camera and pulling a camp chair toward -him sank into it with a sigh of weariness.</p> - -<p>“I gathered enough to understand a trip to some place which might become -hot for us is under discussion,” he said. “What about it?”</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton explained, adding: “Like you, I’m afraid it may be too -dangerous to undertake. At least, that is,” he added hastily to -forestall the remonstrances which all three boys looked prepared to -make, “we can go part of the way. Certainly, into the volcanic region. -But whether we push on amongst the disturbed tribes where this medicine -man, The Prophet, is supposed to be operating will have to depend on -circumstances.”</p> - -<p>The faces of the three boys grew bright again. “Oh, of course,” agreed -Jack, quickly.</p> - -<p>“But what I can’t understand,” added Bob, harking back to the question -he had earlier propounded to Frank, “is why this chap Ransome is going -in. Does he have plenty of money and time to go running around like -this? And why did he call us and ask us to go along? Why has he been -waiting at Entebbe for a week, trying to get us, instead of setting -out?”</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton knew more than he was prepared to state. Had the boys but -known, which they did not, they would have suspected as much from the -fact that at Kisumu he had been in closest conversation for more than an -hour with Ransome, the ostensible invalid trader, in a locked room at -the Club. But of that conference they were unaware. This much, however, -he did state:</p> - -<p>“I believe him to be a secret agent of the British government, fellows. -And, although the Mountains of the Moon lie in Belgian territory, yet -Great Britain is vitally interested in anything which may tend to upset -conditions amongst the natives. As to his reasons for wishing us to -accompany him, it is possible that Mr. Ransome wants us to act as a -cloak for him.”</p> - -<p>“I see,” said Frank. “You mean that if we go in to take motion picture -records of events, he can go along as a member of the expedition without -arousing suspicion as to his real status?”</p> - -<p>“Exactly,” said Mr. Hampton, nodding his head in approval.</p> - -<p>“Time to go to the celebration of Chief Ungaba,” spoke a voice at the -tent flap as Mr. Hampton concluded.</p> - -<p>All turned about hastily. As in the case of Niellsen’s approach, they -had been unaware of anyone present.</p> - -<p>It was Mabele, the interpreter who had been employed at Kisumu. He stood -in a respectful attitude, holding up the tent flap, but not venturing to -enter the tent.</p> - -<p>“All right, Mabele,” said Mr. Hampton, shortly. “We’ll come at once.”</p> - -<p>Silently, the black dropped the flap and withdrew. After a moment, Mr. -Hampton arose and crossing the tent lifted the flap and stared into the -moonlit darkness. Then he let it fall and turned around.</p> - -<p>“He’s gone,” he said. “Now I wonder how much he heard.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I guess he just came at that minute,” said Niellsen, easily. -“Anyway, what does it matter?” Mr. Hampton shook his head. “I don’t know -as it matters at all,” he replied, thoughtfully. “But that fellow is a -man of superior parts. He’s smart. I wonder—”</p> - -<p>Then he shook himself and smiled.</p> - -<p>“No matter,” he said. “Niellsen, there’s a bit of food in the ice box -which we saved for you. Eat it, and then let’s get under way for the -village. We’ll have to stay a little while, in order not to hurt the -chief’s feelings. But we’ll leave before the party becomes too -boisterous, so that we can make an early start tomorrow. We have a good -five days of travel ahead of us before we can reach Entebbe.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXI' title='XXI: THE RADIO STOLEN'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXI</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>THE RADIO STOLEN</span> -</h2> - -<p>Chief Ungaba’s party promised to be like several other similar functions -to which the boys and Mr. Hampton had been bidden as guests by other -friendly chiefs. For when they arrived, they found the select two dozen -guests of the chief already seated in a circle around a huge iron -cauldron filled with foaming, milky, African beer, while farther off in -the village square blazed a number of fires around which the village -proletariat were gathered to eat the meat of the rhino and drink their -home brewed liquor.</p> - -<p>Places were made for Mr. Hampton and the boys in the circle about Chief -Ungaba’s select cauldron. And each was provided with a pliant length of -hollow cane. Every guest had such a “straw,” and these they dipped into -the cauldron at frequent intervals, sucking through them great mouthsful -of beer.</p> - -<p>Let it be said at once, so that there may be no misconception, that Mr. -Hampton, Niellsen and the boys did not indulge. Too well they knew that -outright refusal would wound the feelings of the chief deeply, and would -bring down upon their heads such a weight of displeasure that their stay -in the region undoubtedly would be only shortlived. Therefore, they -accepted the straws and even rested them in the cauldron, but without -drinking.</p> - -<p>This deception, however, was not discovered. For already the party had -been in progress more than an hour, and the guests were becoming -uproarious and were little likely to pay much attention to the white -visitors.</p> - -<p>At frequent intervals one or other of the guests would leap to his feet -and begin to dance around the circle, lifting his knees high and -prancing. More and more often the performer of the moment would not -confine himself to dancing, but would also burst into song.</p> - -<p>A wild scene it made, as the light of the cooking fires in the square -played ruddily on the mud walls of the huts nearby and the thatched -roofs circular and running up to a peak from which projected the long -center pole of the dwelling. And for a time the boys found this picture -of primitive men indulging in a celebration rather fascinating.</p> - -<p>But before long the dancers and singers became so wild in their bearing -that it became evident they would soon descend into a bestial orgy, and -the boys found it difficult to keep their disgust from showing on their -faces. Presently Mr. Hampton whispered to Jack, who sat nearest him, and -who in turn passed the word to the others, that he considered it time to -withdraw. Which they did without further ado, making their way out of -the circle without attracting the attention of the Kavirondos.</p> - -<p>As they passed Chief Ungaba, however, Mr. Hampton paused to converse -with him, and the chief got unsteadily to his feet. When informed that -the whites planned to leave at an early hour the next morning, he -displayed sincere regret. And after finding his pleas that they remain -with him a while longer prove of no avail, he promised to be on hand to -see them depart.</p> - -<p>As they returned to their tent, Mr. Hampton commented sorrowfully upon -the failure of civilization to penetrate the wilds and break down -bestial customs by providing the natives with better things.</p> - -<p>“Some day, of course, it will come,” he said, as they reached the boys’ -tent, “but as yet civilization has not gone very far into the African -wilds.”</p> - -<p>Saying goodnight, he and Niellsen passed on toward their own tent, -a-gleam in the moonlight a short distance beyond, while the boys lifted -the flap and went in, Jack who led first shooting the rays of his pocket -flashlight inside—a precaution which they never failed to observe when -entering a dark tent in order to discover whether snakes had taken -possession in their absence.</p> - -<p>No snakes were to be seen. But as the rays of the flashlight passed over -the various objects of the interior, Jack uttered a cry of dismay.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” demanded Frank, at his shoulder.</p> - -<p>Disappearing into the tent without replying, Jack found and lighted a -lantern. Then he turned to his two comrades who had pressed after him, -and swinging the lantern so that its rays fell into the corner where -their little radio station had been set up, he pointed.</p> - -<p>“Gone,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Gone,” echoed Bob and Frank, as with one voice, in a tone of -stupefaction.</p> - -<p>It was true. Where their radio set had stood was now nothing but bare -space.</p> - -<p>For a moment or two, all three boys were too bewildered to speak. All -they could do was to stare.</p> - -<p>Then Bob became energized, and sprang for the tent flap.</p> - -<p>“Where are you going?” demanded Frank.</p> - -<p>“To tell Mr. Hampton,” Bob replied.</p> - -<p>“Let’s see what else is missing first. Evidently there’s been a thief -here.”</p> - -<p>Bob turned back and helped in the rapid inspection of the tent. None of -their possessions was missing except the radio.</p> - -<p>“Funny a Negro should take that,” mused Jack, as they looked at each -other in growing puzzlement. “Most of them who have seen us use it look -on it as a white man’s magic and wouldn’t touch it with a ten-foot -pole.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll say it’s funny,” said Bob darkly. “Do you know what I think?”</p> - -<p>“No. What?”</p> - -<p>Bob looked around and lowering his voice drew his two comrades toward -him while he whispered: “Mabele.”</p> - -<p>Jack looked at him in stupefaction. But Frank’s alert eyes displayed -complete understanding, and he nodded emphatically.</p> - -<p>“That’s it. Remember what your father said, Jack, when he discovered -Mabele at least had been in a position to overhear us discussing Mr. -Ransome and the trouble amongst the natives in that Mountains of the -Moon region, whether he actually had heard anything or not?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” said Jack. And now his glance grew worried. “Let’s tell -father at once.”</p> - -<p>“You tell him,” said Bob. “I’ll go over to the bearers’ camp and see -whether Mabele is around.”</p> - -<p>“You aren’t afraid?”</p> - -<p>“Huh.” Bob tapped his ever-ready automatic. “Besides, we mustn’t lose -any time on this. My opinion is that the beggar’s decamped. If he has, -we’ll want to pick up his trail as soon as possible.”</p> - -<p>“But what in the world would he steal the radio for?” asked Frank.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” said Bob. “But we can puzzle over that later. The first -thing is to find out if our suspicions that it was he are correct.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right, Bob,” said Frank. “And I’ll go with you, for on a job of -this kind two are better than one. Jack in the meantime can carry word -to his father and Niellsen.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXII' title='XXII: MABELE DISAPPEARS'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>MABELE DISAPPEARS</span> -</h2> - -<p>While Jack hastened away toward the tent shared by the two others, Bob -and Frank made their way toward where a blazing camp fire marked the -encampment of the seventy-five bearers.</p> - -<p>Few of the latter could be seen, not more than a dozen. Could the others -have decamped? Had they, perhaps, departed with Mabele? The boys hurried -forward, alarm knocking within. But when one of the dozen blacks -outstretched near the fire got to his feet on being addressed in the -bush English of which all had a smattering, he informed Bob that his -comrades had gone to the village to participate in the celebration.</p> - -<p>As that was to be expected, Bob’s anxieties in a measure subsided. But -when he asked whether Mabele had accompanied the party the man shook his -head in denial.</p> - -<p>“Mabele him not go ’long,” he said. “No see Mabele long time.”</p> - -<p>Quick inspection of the recumbent figures showed Mabele not of the -number, and convinced nothing as to his whereabouts was to be learned of -their informant the boys turned away. As they passed near the boxes and -bales of supplies and of equipment of one sort or another, over which -tarpaulins were lashed to protect them from storms, Frank was seized -with an idea.</p> - -<p>Halting, he laid a hand on Bob’s arm.</p> - -<p>“Have we ever used the spare radio transmitting apparatus on this trip -out from Kisumu?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>Bob scratched his head.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. Seems to me the last time we had occasion to use it was -when our runaway raft grounded on that island in the river. And that was -before we reached Kisumu.”</p> - -<p>“That’s my recollection, too,” said Frank, in a tone of satisfaction. -“Come on, let’s find Mr. Hampton and the others.”</p> - -<p>He started forward again, and as Bob fell into pace beside him, making -for their tent before which they could observe a bobbing lantern in the -grip of an unseen hand, Bob demanded:</p> - -<p>“What made you ask that about the spare radio?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I just thought that if we hadn’t ever unpacked it, Mabele wouldn’t -know it was there.”</p> - -<p>“Right,” said Bob, comprehension dawning. “In that case, we won’t be -hamstrung.”</p> - -<p>They were close enough now to see the lantern was borne by Jack and that -Mr. Hampton and Niellsen accompanied him.</p> - -<p>“Did you find him?” asked Jack as they approached.</p> - -<p>“No,” answered Frank, “nor did we find many of the bearers. Most of them -have gone to the village to take part in the celebration.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton groaned. “I had expressly forbidden Mabele to let the men -depart,” he said. “The rascal violated my orders in order to have a -clear field for his operations.”</p> - -<p>Passing inside the tent, Mr. Hampton and Niellsen took their turn at -staring at the spot where the radio apparatus had stood, as if by the -mere fact of their glances they could conjure it back into place.</p> - -<p>“Then you, too, believe it was Mabele, Mr. Hampton?” asked Bob.</p> - -<p>The older man nodded.</p> - -<p>“I hardly knew what I suspected when he appeared at the tent today and -it seemed likely he had overheard what was being said. But this has -clarified my suspicions. He’s a shrewd one, a man as I said of superior -parts. I am of the opinion now that he’s in the pay of the -trouble-makers in this part of the world, be they German or what. -Doubtless he thought that by taking the radio apparatus he could cut us -oft from communication with Ransome.”</p> - -<p>“And at the same time, perhaps, communicate with his confederates,” -suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>“It’s a serious loss, all right enough,” said Mr. Hampton. “And, -furthermore, by allowing the bearers to attend the village celebration -he increases his opportunity for escape. The villagers will be pretty -loggy in the morning, and in no condition to help us pick up Mabele’s -trail. And now the bearers will be the same. He will be able to get a -good start.”</p> - -<p>Sinking into a camp chair, he stared contemplatively at the ground, and -the others respected his silence.</p> - -<p>“Moreover,” he resumed, “we have no means now of notifying Ransome that -Mabele stands betrayed in his true light. The rascal can get to Entebbe -ahead of us in the assurance that we have no way of informing on him. -And he may be able to cause no end of trouble.”</p> - -<p>Frank stepped forward eagerly.</p> - -<p>“But, Mr. Hampton, we have the spare radio packed away. We haven’t used -it for so long a time that it’s no wonder you have forgotten about it. -But that’s probably our salvation. For we haven’t used it at any time -during Mabele’s connection with our party, and so it’s unlikely that he -knew we had it.”</p> - -<p>“Good for you, Frank,” said Mr. Hampton, jumping up, the lines of worry -disappearing as if by magic. “Let’s have a look. Bring that lantern. -Jack, and we’ll investigate.”</p> - -<p>Forebearing to summon any of the bearers to aid them, the boys -themselves overhauled the heap of supply cases and from the midst pulled -the familiar case enclosing the spare transmitting set. Many were their -expressions of satisfaction.</p> - -<p>Carrying it back to the tent, they opened it up. All the parts were -complete. And in another and smaller case was packed the aerial. -Assembling and setting up would be a short enough matter, but Mr. -Hampton suggested that they wait until the morning. For one thing, he -felt certain they would be unable to receive any response from Entebbe -at this hour.</p> - -<p>“And, besides,” he pointed out, “there is little likelihood now that we -shall be able to start tomorrow. None of the bearers who went to the -village has returned as yet, and they will be feeling so badly in the -morning, after heavy potations of that native beer, that it would be -impossible to get any work out of them. Perhaps, by noon, we can make a -start. But even that is problematical. At any rate, you fellows will -have plenty of time in which to set up your radio and open communication -with Entebbe.”</p> - -<p>Upon this understanding, Mr. Hampton and Niellsen were once more about -to retire for the night to their own tent, when Jack becoming seized -with a new idea again halted them.</p> - -<p>He wanted to know whether his father did not consider it would be wise -to place a guard over their supplies. So friendly was Chief Ungaba that -they had felt an unwonted sense of security from thefts during the weeks -spent under his protection. For dire, indeed, had been the punishment he -had desired to visit upon the one and only thief caught during their -stay. In fact, he had wanted to put the poor fellow to death, and he -would have done it, too, had it not been for Mr. Hampton’s -representations.</p> - -<p>“You see tonight, Dad,” explained Jack, “all the villagers will be -stupid with liquor, and the bearers, too. It just occurred to me that, -perhaps, Mabele has a number of malcontents amongst the bearers who will -follow him. If that’s the case, they can make a rich haul and escape -easily enough, if they wait until we retire and then raid the supplies -while the rest of the camp is incapacitated by too much party.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Jack,” answered his father, “and I should have thought -of that myself. However, it’s not too late. Let’s see. There are five of -us. If we all go over to the supplies and sleep tonight around a -campfire, taking turn and turn about at standing watch, that would be -the best way except for one thing. It would leave our tents unguarded -again. No, that won’t do. What can anybody suggest?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I guess one man would be enough to stand guard,” said Bob. “They’d -hardly try any tricks, if they found we were on our toes about the -matter.”</p> - -<p>“A good thing we took our rifles with us,” said Frank. “If they had been -stolen, then we would have been out of luck. Why, they could just pot us -one after the other.”</p> - -<p>“On second thought,” said Mr. Hampton, “I don’t believe it will be -necessary to guard the supplies ourselves. If Mabele had any of the men -with him, they’d have stolen our things during our absence, just as he -took the radio. The fact that nothing but the radio was stolen indicates -to me that he was operating alone. No, we’ll chance his stealing from -us. He couldn’t get much, anyway. But I will put several of those older -men who stayed in camp and refused to disobey orders on guard. They’re -steady fellows, and will afford sufficient protection. Isn’t there one -of them. Bob, who you told me understands a revolver?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that fellow Samba. He used to be a British colonial soldier.”</p> - -<p>“The one we were talking to tonight?” asked Frank.</p> - -<p>“The same,” said Bob. “By the way, Mr. Hampton, he’d be a good man to -make ‘straw boss’ now that Mabele has left.”</p> - -<p>“Right you are,” said Mr. Hampton. “Suppose you step over and call him.”</p> - -<p>Bob readily complied, Frank again accompanying him. They found Samba and -his mates sunk in slumber. Nor had the bearers who had gone to the -village yet returned. Samba was awakened, and followed them back to the -tent.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton told him that Mabele was a thief and had run away after -first disobeying orders by letting all the bearers who wanted to do so -go to the village celebration. Then he promised to elevate Samba to -Mabele’s post. After that he armed him with a revolver, laying strict -injunctions on him that he was not to use it except in case of attack, -and sent him to guard the supplies the balance of the night.</p> - -<p>The stalwart black’s eyes gleamed as, after first handling the weapon in -a manner which showed he was accustomed to it, he thrust it into his -waist band holding up a long pair of cotton trousers.</p> - -<p>“Me un’erstan’, sar,” he said. And giving a smart military salute, he -clicked his bare heels, or rather brought them together with a thud. -Then he spun about and went out.</p> - -<p>“A good man,” said Mr. Hampton. “How’d you learn about him, Bob?”</p> - -<p>The big fellow grinned.</p> - -<p>“Oh, you know how,” he said. “I can’t explain it. But I expect I have a -faculty for making friends.”</p> - -<p>Such a faculty, indeed, Bob had. And it is an invaluable one. He was -sometimes described by Frank fondly as “the original democrat.”</p> - -<p>“That boy,” Frank would say on such occasions, “makes friends with every -Tom, Dick and Harry he meets. He never draws any social or color lines. -Just interested in people from the human side, I suppose.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton smiled and shook his head slightly. Then yawning mightily, -he arose.</p> - -<p>“Well, Niellsen, we may as well retire. Tomorrow will be a big day.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXIII' title='XXIII: ON TO ENTEBBE'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXIII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>ON TO ENTEBBE</span> -</h2> - -<p>Camp presented a scene of strange activity the next day when Mr. Hampton -forced his sodden bearers to the task of preparing for departure. During -their lengthy stay many articles of equipment had been unpacked, and -there was much to do beside striking the tents and packing up the -articles they contained.</p> - -<p>The task was made easier for Mr. Hampton, however, by reason of the -efforts of Samba, who took his new honors as “straw boss” seriously, and -who moreover was ably supported in spurring on the laggards by the dozen -steadier men who had refused to leave camp the night before and go to -Chief Ungaba’s beer party.</p> - -<p>Nothing untoward had occurred during the night as in little groups -supporting each other the guilty bearers had stolen back from the -village where revelry continued until dawn.</p> - -<p>“Mabele him no got any fella-boys with him,” Samba had reported in the -morning. “All fella-boys him come back.”</p> - -<p>That had been one comfort to Mr. Hampton in the situation, as without -all his bearers he would have been forced to abandon much of his -impedimenta. And as the load had not decreased through the using up of -supplies, but had been maintained at a steady level by reason of the -addition of animal skins, every bearer was needed.</p> - -<p>While all this was going on, Bob, Frank and Niellsen doing everything -possible to be of aid, Jack devoted himself to the task of opening -communication with Entebbe. The previous night in his conversations with -Mr. Hampton, Ransome speaking from Entebbe had been extremely careful to -speak only in the most guarded terms regarding the trouble amongst the -natives west of Lake Victoria. Much that he had told the boys -afterwards, concerning Ransome’s probable connection with the British -secret service, constituted Mr. Hampton’s deductions rather than -anything which had been said openly over the radio. From this, the -Hampton party drew the conclusion that Ransome suspected there might be -one or more secret radio stations maintained in the region about them, -and was taking no chances on being overheard. Therefore, when finally he -did raise Entebbe, and got Mr. Ransome summoned to the phone, Jack -exercised extreme care not to let slip anything which might be seized -upon to advantage by hostile ears, yet at the same time to make his -meaning perfectly clear.</p> - -<p>“I understand,” Ransome responded finally. “I shall keep an eye out for -your messenger Mabele.”</p> - -<p>And from the tone employed, Jack felt assured that Ransome would, -indeed, keep an eye out for Mabele. In fact, if he did not go further -and send out scouts to lay Mabele by the heels before he could reach the -conspirators employing him, Jack thought he would be very much mistaken.</p> - -<p>In this, however, he was mistaken, as later events proved. For when -after an uneventful journey of five days, during which no trace of -Mabele had been discovered, the Hampton party did reach Entebbe, on the -northern shore of Lake Victoria, they found that Ransome had not caused -Mabele’s arrest, although having obtained traces of him. On the -contrary, he had permitted him to continue at large.</p> - -<p>“And the reason was,” he explained in a conversation with Mr. Hampton, -to which the boys and Niellsen were admitted, “that I thought it better -to let him keep his freedom, in order that he might lead us, perhaps, to -his employers. I have him under constant surveillance. And the last word -I had from a spy put on his tracks and sent back to me by native runner -was that he was working his way around the shores of the lake.”</p> - -<p>He paused, smiling with satisfaction. “Perhaps,” he resumed, “we’ll be -able to cut him off at Masaka, on the western shore of the lake, to -which we’ll cross from here, in order to save time in striking for the -Mountains of the Moon. He travelled faster than you and slipped into -Entebbe two days ago. My men apprised me of his coming, and when he -departed secretly, I sent a couple of keen fellows, smart blacks and -born trackers with a considerable knowledge of the dialects of tribes -about the northern and western shores of the lake, in pursuit.”</p> - -<p>From this it can be gathered that Ransome no longer kept up in the -presence of the boys his pretense of being a trader. And such, indeed, -was the case. Informed bluntly by Mr. Hampton that the boys were too -smart to be kept in darkness but would have pierced his secret of their -own intuitions, and that consequently he had considered it wise to put -them in possession of some of the facts, Ransome had called the boys and -Niellsen to him and had laid all his cards on the table, so to speak.</p> - -<p>“I am an Englishman,” he had concluded, “working in the interests of my -government. I may be mistaken, therefore, in believing that those -interests are best for the progress of civilization in these wilds. That -is for others to decide. But, at least, I want you boys to believe that -we honestly are endeavoring to do our best for the natives. And I can’t -say as much for the former officials of German East Africa whom I -suspect of being behind this trouble in the Congo. If the trouble -becomes serious, we shall have to go to the aid of Belgium, and that is -the reason I want to go in and see how matters stand for myself. You -people will be able to protect me from detection, unless Mabele eludes -my trackers and escapes us to carry word to the conspirators that I am -not what I seem. In that case, of course, the danger to you all will -become real. Otherwise, you will be merely explorers, picturing wild -game and scenery in the real heart of Africa.”</p> - -<p>“I want to be of aid,” Mr. Hampton had said, “yet I do not want to bring -the boys into danger, nor imperil the trophies of our expedition. All -that we have taken to date, of course, both film records of primitive -and wild game life and trophies of the hunt, are either already at -Nairobi or will be despatched thither from here. So they will be safe -enough. But further records might be destroyed should we be attacked in -the Mountains of the Moon. As I say, I do not want to imperil either the -results of the expedition or the lives of the boys. If at Masaka we find -that Mabele has escaped us and has the chance to carry word to his -conspirators of your real identity, Ransome, I shall probably deem it -wise to turn back.”</p> - -<p>“If you do so, under those circumstances, I shan’t blame you,” Ransome -had said. “But,” he had added confidently, “I am quite certain Mabele -cannot escape us. I have him, so to speak, in my clutch all the time, -and am permitting him at large merely that he may lead us to his -employers, the men higher up.”</p> - -<p>“It is, of course, quite possible,” Mr. Hampton had added, after a -thoughtful pause, “that Mabele did not gain sufficient knowledge of your -identity from my remarks to the boys which I feel assured he overheard, -that night in the tent, to make him dangerous to you and us.”</p> - -<p>“Possible, but not probable,” Mr. Ransome had said. “Otherwise, why did -he steal your radio immediately afterwards, except to thwart further -communication between us? And why is he striking straight for the -disturbed area?”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXIV' title='XXIV: PLANS TO CAPTURE THE PROPHET'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXIV</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>PLANS TO CAPTURE THE PROPHET</span> -</h2> - -<p>At Masaka, a small trading center on the western shore of Lake Victoria, -they met with disappointment. For the two native trackers put on the -trail of Mabele by Mr. Ransome appeared the first night after their -arrival with the news that their quarry had managed to elude them.</p> - -<p>They had seen him enter a lake village one night, where he found shelter -in a native hut. And believing him safe for the night, they themselves -had done likewise, for they had spent several strenuous days sticking to -his trail through broken country of hill and marsh and were exhausted.</p> - -<p>Arising early the next day, however, they had discovered on -investigation that Mabele had slipped away. And cautious inquiry -developed that a native canoe also was missing. Putting two and two -together, they had come to the conclusion that Mabele had taken to the -lake. Although they believed they had kept out of his sight all the way -and had given him no suspicion of their presence, yet it was likely he -suspected he was being trailed and had taken to the lake to shake off -pursuit.</p> - -<p>Their one consolation was that an hour or two after their discovery of -Mabele’s flight one of the sudden storms for which Lake Victoria is -noted had arisen, accompanied by rolling thunder, lightning and a -swishing downpour of rain. Later in the day, after the storm had -departed and the waters of the lake had subsided, a native fisherman had -brought in the stolen canoe which had been found overturned and floating -a mile out from shore. It was their belief, therefore, that Mabele had -been drowned. And as on their journey from that point to Masaka they had -inquired of every native encountered if a man had been picked up in the -lake or had been observed coming to shore, without result, they were -confirmed in this belief.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know about that,” said Mr. Hampton thoughtfully, in talking the -matter over in a general conference later. “He may have managed to reach -shore without being observed. And in that case he is on his way to his -confederates with word of our coming to the disturbed regions with you, -Ransome, as a spy and not merely a member of our exploring and -picture-taking party. However, the boys feel so strongly that they want -to proceed that I shall chance it. We must all be very much on our -guard, however.”</p> - -<p>“Bully for you, Dad,” said Jack, enthusiastically. “We can take care of -ourselves, never fear. We’ve been in tight fixes before, you know.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I know,” sighed Mr. Hampton, half-humorously, as he regarded his -strapping son and the two other boys with a twinkle blending affection -and respect. “But every time you get there you add to my bowed shoulders -and gray hairs.”</p> - -<p>As Mr. Hampton was as straight and lithe as any of the boys, while his -thick hair showed little signs of the advance of age, everybody laughed. -A laugh in which he, too, joined.</p> - -<p>“But what I’d like to know,” said Bob, after the laughter had subsided, -“is what Mabele did with our radio set. He couldn’t have carried it far -alone, and so far as we have been able to discover he had nobody with -him.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a puzzle,” said Frank. “But he must have hidden it, intending to -return for it later, somewhere near Chief Ungaba’s village. At any rate, -the report of his trackers that he was never observed to have that -cumbersome piece of baggage with him is satisfactory in one respect. For -it means that he was unable in all likelihood to communicate by radio -with the enemy, supposing them to have a secret radio station as Mr. -Ransome suspects.”</p> - -<p>Several days the party spent at Masaka, completing the purchase of -supplies to add to their baggage which had been shipped from Entebbe, -and in recruiting a new corps of bearers, one hundred in number. A guard -of a dozen trusty fellows in the pay of Mr. Ransome, every one of whom -knew how to handle a rifle or revolver, appeared mysteriously from -somewhere. And into this number Samba was recruited to his great -delight.</p> - -<p>“A mighty satisfactory man to have around,” was Mr. Hampton’s dictum, -and accordingly Mr. Ransome took him into the force.</p> - -<p>“We’ll need the guards, perhaps,” he said. “And I have obtained a permit -from the Belgian authorities for them to carry arms. Our own permits as -hunters also have been obtained, so now everything is settled.”</p> - -<p>Then the party set out for the Mountains of the Moon, lying around Lake -Kivu to the west and south. This gem-like lake is in the real heart of -Africa, and to get there it was necessary to travel more than three -hundred miles west by south. Kivu lies about one hundred and fifty miles -west of the southern extremity of Lake Victoria, and between Lakes -Edward and Tanganyika.</p> - -<p>Day after day the miles were put behind them without any incidents of -especial note. Pictures were taken at times, when the occasion -warranted. But for several reasons both Mr. Ransome and his hosts were -eager to reach the mysterious Mountains of the Moon which stand sentinel -over the unexplored heart of the Dark Continent, and so little time was -spent in picture-taking, any secured being obtained on the march, so to -speak.</p> - -<p>For one thing, Mr. Ransome was eager to gain the region about Lake Kivu -and the Mountains of the Moon in order to learn as quickly as possible -what was afoot amongst the natives, as disquieting rumors every now and -again reached them of The Prophet’s activities. Evasive though these -rumors were, it became increasingly apparent that The Prophet was -someone of powerful personality who had obtained a great hold on the -superstitious minds of the natives and who, if given sufficient time, -might be able to unite the warlike and remote tribes under one head and -cause serious trouble for the whites by swooping down on their scattered -settlements and destroying even the railroad and steamship lines and -other slim evidences of civilization in the Lake Victoria region which -had been built up laboriously through the years.</p> - -<p>For another, Mr. Hampton was anxious to reach the volcanic region while -the craters, of which native report was more definite than regarding the -activities of The Prophet, were still in eruption. A pictorial record of -them would be something never before obtained and valuable in -proportion. Besides, the great mountain region was reputed to be the -home not only of elephants, buffalo, bush buck, cheetahs, leopards and -lions, but also of the ferocious man-apes or gorillas.</p> - -<p>To bag specimens of these animals both by gun and by camera would be the -crowning achievement of the expedition.</p> - -<p>Therefore, the party did not delay on the way but made each day’s march -as long as possible. The more so were they content to do this as, after -passing Kabale, a tiny frontier post in the mountains of Uganda, two -weeks from Masaka, they entered a desolate volcanic region which had -been laid waste by eruptions of lava in 1912 where little game was -encountered.</p> - -<p>By day, in fact, this region was plunged into a silence so uncanny as to -affect the nerves of even the boys. For they were accustomed in their -travel through central Africa to hear the jungle alive about them. Here -long distances were covered where not even the hum of an insect or the -call of a bird was to be heard. It was, in fact, as if they were passing -through a dead region where even the ground beneath them was devoid of -life.</p> - -<p>Neither man nor animals were encountered, and glad, indeed, was every -member of the party when at length they came to the edge of the mighty -African Rift Valley and beheld below them the vast Mfumbiro Plain with -craters breaking up the contour in every direction.</p> - -<p>This was the region of the volcanoes, and after glimpsing smoking peaks -in the distance all day as they approached, the boys now beheld from the -edge of a precipice, below which was spread the great plain, three -towering cones with smoke-wreathed summits. Whereas only occasional -glimpses had been obtained heretofore, they now could observe the -mountains from base to summit.</p> - -<p>Never had any of them beheld a more awe-inspiring sight. And standing on -the edge of a precipice which fell steeply away a matter of two thousand -feet to the plain below, with those three smoking cones against the red -sunset sky in the distance, they were speechless.</p> - -<p>Presently, however, the necessity for making camp for the night appealed -to Mr. Hampton, who called the boys away. Some distance back from the -precipice, amidst the hard-wood trees of a small grove, where a spring -of fresh sweet water burst from the ground to go tumbling down the -rocks, the tents were set up and the bearers were disposed below, along -the edge of the little stream.</p> - -<p>“Tomorrow,” announced Mr. Hampton, as they sat about the camp fire that -night, “we shall descend into the plain. There are numerous villages -down there, and on the very slopes of the great volcanoes, inhabited by -warlike natives, so we must go prepared to cope with trouble, should the -natives prove hostile.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Ransome,” he added, looking to the other for confirmation, -“believes we shall find some trace of The Prophet amongst those natives, -as it is in this region he is reputed to be stirring up trouble. I may -as well tell you fellows now as later that our friend intends, if -possible, to capture The Prophet and spirit him out of the country. With -his twelve trusted men that may not be impossible of accomplishment. And -as innocent takers of pictures and hunters of big game, we shall be -able, perhaps, to turn aside suspicion and cover his tracks.</p> - -<p>“Of course,” he added, “in setting out on this expedition, we had no -intention of being drawn into a political situation. But finding that we -can be of vital service, the only decent thing we can do is to proffer -our aid. And I’m glad to see from the way you fellows nod your heads -that you agree with me.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Ransome,” he continued, “already has despatched two of his most -trustworthy men, with orders to make their way down the mountainside and -into the plain and to the nearest village. Their object is to find out -if possible where The Prophet has his headquarters at present. And Mr. -Ransome tells me that from conversations between his men and the -inhabitants of the last village through which we passed earlier today, -there is reason to believe this disturber of the peace is not far away, -perhaps in the very village to which he has sent his spies. If the men -report early tomorrow that such is the case, Mr. Ransome intends to have -a try at his capture. Have I stated matters correctly?” he concluded, -glancing toward the tall, thoughtful-faced Englishman whose fortitude -and constant good spirits had endeared him to the boys.</p> - -<p>“Righto,” responded the latter, knocking out his straight-stemmed briar -pipe, from which seemingly he was inseparable, and gazing thoughtfully -into the bowl. “But you haven’t yet told the lads what part they will be -asked to play, if they will.”</p> - -<p>“I was coming to that,” said Mr. Hampton. Then turning toward the -interested trio, he resumed: “Two things will be vitally necessary to -the successful execution of our plans, once The Prophet is located. Both -involve you fellows. What they are you will gather as I go along.</p> - -<p>“In the first place The Prophet undoubtedly has secured whatever hold he -has on the superstitious natives of these regions by playing upon those -very superstitions. That he is a white man and a scientist, or at least -possessed of scientific information, is deductable from the way in which -he has set about winning the awed regard of the natives, according to -the reports obtained at our last stop today.</p> - -<p>“By that I mean that he knows the way of volcanoes and has drawn upon -that knowledge to predict events which have come to pass.</p> - -<p>“His first appearance was just prior to the beginning of the recent -volcanic eruptions, overflows of lava which have since continued at -intervals. And the way in which he appeared to the natives, as we got -the story today, was descending the slope of Mount Muhavura afoot at -dusk and surrounded by a nimbus of flame. That is easily accounted for -in our eyes. Undoubtedly, he had rubbed himself with phosphorus.</p> - -<p>“But as he came seemingly from the cloud-wreathed summit of Muhavura, -where the natives believe heaven to lie, his statement that he was an -immortal from the company of the gods won wide belief. He prophesied -that Muhavura, long silent except for occasional faint rumblings, would -overflow in three days. And, behold, it came to pass. Now we know that a -man of science, if he had managed to obtain observations of the rise and -fall of lava in the crater over a period of days, could predict -accurately when the overflow would come. Doubtless, this fellow had -taken such observations, and then had utilized his knowledge to further -his own ends. For he predicted this would come to pass as a punishment -upon the natives for permitting the whites to encroach upon their -domain.</p> - -<p>“Since that time, it seems, he has gone up and down the Mfumbiro Plain, -received everywhere amongst the natives with the profoundest of awe. -Sometimes he will ascend the slopes of one of the great cones, Sabinio, -Namlagira beneath which the natives believe hell to lie; Muhavura or -Mgahinga. Always he forbids the natives to follow him on pain of being -seized by the spirits. And when he returns, wrapped in his nimbus of -fire, he generally predicts an eruption of lava which quite generally is -fulfilled. As I say, that is easy enough for a man of science, but the -impression it makes on the native minds may easily be comprehended.</p> - -<p>“In fact,” said Mr. Hampton, “at that last village, although it is not -in the Mfumbiro Plain and no member has yet seen The Prophet, yet his -influence has made itself felt. Doubtless you boys noted the veiled -hostility of the natives and their reluctance to furnish us vegetables -and fruit even in return for ample consideration. That is because the -continued statement of The Prophet that the gods are angry with the -natives for tolerating white men in their land is taking effect. What -must those natives be who live beneath the shadow of the volcanoes and -are in contact with The Prophet?</p> - -<p>“Now here is what I am coming to. So hostile probably are the natives of -the plains that it would be impossible for us to enter and photograph -the volcanoes, the lava overflows, or wild game, unless we do something -to overcome that hostility. And Mr. Ransome and I have decided that -something can be done. If it succeeds, we shall have struck a blow for -ourselves and the success of our expedition and he will have eliminated -the menace of The Prophet.</p> - -<p>“The plan is this. Two of you boys shall put up the radio station around -camp here somewhere, and stick by it while the rest of us descend into -the plain tomorrow and hunt out The Prophet’s headquarters, providing -Mr. Ransome’s spies return with word that he has been located. With us -we shall take a portable radio and loudspeaker attachment.</p> - -<p>“When we find The Prophet, Niellsen with his motion picture camera will -probably be able to create a diversion by drawing the natives about him. -And while that is going on, whichever one of you fellows is selected to -accompany us will have to seize his opportunity to put up the radio in a -good hiding place near The Prophet’s hut.</p> - -<p>“Then we will fight The Prophet with his own tactics, only going him one -better. For we shall announce to the natives that we are emissaries from -the outside world who have heard of The Prophet’s misrepresentations. -Instead of coming from heaven on Muhavura, we shall say, he comes from -hell in Namlagira. And we shall add that we have been sent to expose him -and to warn all natives against listening to his words lest they suffer -a more dreadful calamity than any so far experienced.</p> - -<p>“That’s where the radio comes in. For after our bold declaration we -shall send up signal rockets. And from that precipice out yonder, -overlooking the vast plain and the crater region for a hundred miles or -more in three directions, a man with spyglasses will easily be able to -see them. That will be the signal to you fellows left behind to speak -over the radio in the guise of spirits denouncing The Prophet and -announcing that he was about to be whisked away.</p> - -<p>“When that message comes like a thunderclap from the concealed radio -instrument which we shall have set up, its effect undoubtedly will be -dismaying. In the ensuing confusion, Mr. Ransome’s trusties will seize -The Prophet and whisk him away.</p> - -<p>“Well,” he concluded, “what do you think of it?”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXV' title='XXV: THE MAN-APE'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXV</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>THE MAN-APE</span> -</h2> - -<p>Let us pass as quickly as possible over the subsequent discussion during -which it was decided by lot that Bob and Frank should stay behind to -operate the radio, while Jack should accompany the main party for the -purpose of concealing the receiving set and loudspeaker in an -advantageous place.</p> - -<p>Both Bob and Frank keenly regretted the necessity which would prevent -them from forming part of the expedition, for they wanted very much to -see the discomfiture of The Prophet. While as for Bob, he yearned to be -present in case of a fight.</p> - -<p>However, where necessity commanded, like good soldiers they could only -obey. Half the force of bearers was to be left with them and two of the -guards, including Samba. This latter trusted fellow, it had developed, -was a native of this region who had been carried away by slave traders -in his youth, and, therefore, knew the dialect. It was he, accordingly, -who would have to speak over the radio.</p> - -<p>Early in the morning, Mr. Ransome’s spies returned before daylight, in -fact, having set out from a village where The Prophet was located during -the night and camped until the first faint streaks of dawn at the foot -of the precipice, after which they had made their way up the height in -short order.</p> - -<p>The Prophet was located in a big village eight miles distant on the -plain. They had marked the location well, and through glasses were able -to point it out to Bob and Frank. Thus that there would be any -difficulty in observing the signal rockets, which Mr. Hampton would send -up as a sign for Samba to “speak his piece” over the radio there no -longer remained a doubt.</p> - -<p>Welcome was the word of the spies that The Prophet, whose activities -heretofore had lain in the central portion of the great plain, nearest -the active volcanoes, and who only recently had invaded the fringes, had -not yet aroused the natives to such a pitch of hostility against the -whites as to make it impossible for Mr. Hampton’s party to obtain a -hearing.</p> - -<p>“That’s all we shall need,” said Mr. Hampton, as all ready to follow the -bearers and other members of the party down the steep paths of the -precipice to the plain, he and Jack paused for a last word with Bob and -Frank. “Once we get a hearing, we can trust to the superstitions of the -natives to do the rest.”</p> - -<p>They wrung each others’ hands in farewell, and then the departing ones -set out. Jack was elated, of course, at the turn of fortune which had -made it possible for him to be “in at the death” as he phrased it. Yet -he realized, too, that a considerable weight of responsibility rested -upon him to see to it that the receiving set was properly hidden and in -good working order.</p> - -<p>As for Bob and Frank, when the others had disappeared around a turn of -the path, dipping into a canyon, they swallowed their disappointment at -being left behind and hastened away to take up their duties. Chief of -which, of course, was the drilling of Samba not only in the message he -was to utter over the radio and which he translated into high-flown -native language, but also in coaching him how loud to speak into the -transmitter, how close to approach his lips to it, and the proper tone -to employ to achieve the best effect.</p> - -<p>To descend the precipice and cross the plain to the village would take -the slow-moving party much more time than it had the spies. It was not -expected they would reach the village, in fact, until late in the -afternoon. Moreover, some time would be spent there in negotiating with -the chief and in drawing off the crowd of natives from the vicinity of -The Prophet’s hut through means of Niellsen’s motion picture camera, in -order that Jack should have his opportunity to conceal the radio -receiving set and the loudspeaker.</p> - -<p>It had been agreed, in fact, that by no means should Mr. Hampton call -for the use of the radio until 8 o’clock that night. Accordingly, Bob -and Frank, even after spending hours coaching Samba until he was letter -perfect in his speech and likewise knew just how to utter it to obtain -the best effect, still had time on their hands.</p> - -<p>They had set up their radio station not far from the edge of the -precipice, in order that the one watching for the expected signal should -when beholding it be able to pass on the word at once to the one -manipulating the station and directing Samba. In order that they would -be able to keep the village which had been pointed out to them under -their glasses after nightfall, they had planted two stakes in line with -each other and bearing directly on the village, so that even in the -thickest darkness glasses trained in the direction indicated by the -pointers would pick out the signals.</p> - -<p>But it was uncomfortably hot in the open sun about the radio station, -even at that altitude of 8,000 feet, and after work had been completed -and everything was in readiness, Bob retired to his tent for a nap. -Frank, who was not inclined to sleep, strolled around through the woods, -which he found so strange as to be exciting.</p> - -<p>It was his first experience in the untrodden woods of this mountain -region, and had he realized the danger he would not have wandered from -camp. For this mountain region is the home of the most terrible of all -African animals, the great man-ape. Horribly human and yet inhuman in -appearance, the gorilla lives in these trackless forests of beautiful -hard-wood trees where flowering plants climb over trunk and bough in a -riot of color and where the underbrush is so tangled as to be almost -impassable. With the strength of a dozen men in his tremendous -barrel-like chest and his over-long arms, is combined a ferocity -unparalleled amongst wild beasts.</p> - -<p>But Frank was not even thinking of gorillas as he forced his way through -the thickets, admiring the beauty of blossoms which for the most part he -had never seen before. Of one danger only was he fearful. That was of -snakes. And to the fact that he kept his eyes darting here and there as -he pushed tough vines aside or hacked at tangled underbrush with the -butt of his rifle in order to clear a path, he owed his salvation.</p> - -<p>For the sight that met his eyes as he parted a great mass of tangled -vines and found himself staring into a small clearing where a forest -giant, smitten and blasted by lightning, had fallen and brought down -with it a mass that now lay withered or dying the vines which had -connected it with other trees, was such as to freeze the blood in his -veins.</p> - -<p>On top of the fallen trunk not twenty yards from him crouched a -grotesque powerful gorilla with three slightly smaller brutes behind -him. It was a male and three females.</p> - -<p>Frank stood aghast, feeling the blood seem to retreat from his body, -unable for the moment to move. Then he started to back away, as with a -powerful effort of the will, he regained control of his limbs in a -measure.</p> - -<p>But the huge gorilla had seen him. And now he sent a challenge rolling -and rumbling down the forest aisles in a tone that beginning low rose -and rose in volume as he beat upon his chest with a drumming thud. A -moment before the forest had been alive with the call of birds, but as -the sound of that ferocious anger shattered the air, everything that -spoke was stricken dumb. And when the gorilla ceased his roar, the -silence which succeeded was one of stark terror.</p> - -<p>That Frank, too, was stricken with terror there is no denying. But as, -after issuing his ferocious challenge, the great brute stood upright on -its short bowed legs, and started running along the fallen tree trunk -toward him, Frank realized he must act quickly if he were to save his -life.</p> - -<p>The sight of that tremendous barrel-like chest bent forward with the -long grisly arms a-dangle to grip dead branches here and there and, with -a heave of the powerful mis-shapen shoulders, pull the brute forward, -made him a little sick. A vision of himself in the embrace of those -arms, being crushed to death against that chest, flashed across Frank’s -mind. Then it was gone, and the coolness which usually came to his -rescue in crises sprang into being now.</p> - -<p>Raising his rifle and taking careful aim, he pressed the trigger. The -gorilla was hit, but the shot was too high for the heart, passing -through a lung. For a moment the great brute paused, swaying. Then he -let out another vast bellow, which was cut short by a terrible coughing -as the blood poured into his lungs.</p> - -<p>The three females, frightened by the sound of the gun and more alarmed -now at its effect upon their lord and master, swung away into the trees. -But the gorilla with that superhuman strength which he possesses was not -to be downed.</p> - -<p>As the coughing subsided, he gave another roar of pain and then sprang -straight through the air toward Frank. White-faced and trembling, Frank -yet realized that if he turned to run the gorilla would be upon him. So -levelling his rifle again, he once more pressed the trigger. Shot in -midcareer, the gorilla collapsed and fell in a huge huddle almost at -Frank’s feet.</p> - -<p>About the fallen ape who twitched convulsively and then lay in a -grotesque heap while his eyes glazed in death, there was at once -something so monstrous and yet human that Frank felt his heart turn to -water within him. And he realized then that he could not stalk and shoot -gorillas in cold blood, and that if any of that were done some other -member of the expedition would have the privilege of shooting the -fourteen gorillas, thirteen now, which the Belgian government license -permitted him to bag.</p> - -<p>After one more look at the fallen monster, a look half-furtive, so -quickly did he turn his glance away, Frank started retracing his steps -as quickly as possible, following the trail he had blazed. And when on -reaching their tent, he found Bob sunk in sound slumber, he gazed at him -unbelievingly before his legs gave way and let him down on a camp chair.</p> - -<p>Could it be possible that while one boy slept, another should have been -so close to a frightful death nearby?</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXVI' title='XXVI: MFUM-BA APPEARS'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXVI</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>MFUM-BA APPEARS</span> -</h2> - -<p>Hours later Frank was still shaking as he stood in the darkness on the -edge of the bluff gazing through the night glasses in the direction -indicated by the pointers and waiting for the signal rockets which he -expected momentarily to see flare up from the village in the darkened -plain far below.</p> - -<p>Behind him at the radio station was Bob with Samba seated before the -transmitter. Every wire had been gone over, the motor had been tuned and -found to be in perfect working condition, and the two boys were -confident of being able to carry out their part of the program.</p> - -<p>In the grove in the background, Frank could see here and there the gleam -of one of the cooking fires about which the bearers left to him and Bob -were preparing their evening meal. With nothing to do that day, the -bearers had enjoyed life by taking a long nap. Now they were up and -about the fires, Frank knew, cooking and chattering. He could even hear -occasionally the sound of a laugh from the light-hearted fellows, louder -than usual.</p> - -<p>Well, they would need those fires, he reflected, not alone for the -preparation of food but to provide warmth. At this altitude of 8,000 -feet, the nights, as they had discovered the night previous, became very -cold. In fact, Frank was wearing heavy canvass knickers tucked into high -lace boots and the warmest sweater he could find, for the first time in -months.</p> - -<p>The presence of Bob not far away and of the bearers in the background, -together with the glow of their fires, was welcome to the boy on lonely -outpost above that pit of shadows into which night seemed to have flung -a world of soft velvet.</p> - -<p>For the forest world was awake. And now the quiet of day, broken only by -bird calls or the occasional bark of a gorilla, had given way to a -medley of terrifying sounds. The sobbing of leopards and cheetahs -thrilled and vibrated mournfully. Constantly the boom of the gorilla cut -across all other noises, aweing them into silence for a moment, after -which they would begin again. Owls hooted, insects shrilled and hummed -near at hand, about Frank’s face. And from the distant plain below rose -the shrill barking of a jackal pack pierced through now and again by the -mournful note of the hyena.</p> - -<p>It was Africa. And by night Africa awakes. Frank was both fascinated and -repelled. But with it all he was thrilled, too, thrilled at the thought -that he had been lucky enough in his youth to be able to penetrate into -the very heart of this most mysterious continent on the face of the -globe, to behold its mysteries and wonders close at hand.</p> - -<p>Suddenly out of that velvety darkness cloaking the plain a ball of fire -soared upward followed by a glowing comet’s tail of sparks, and then -another and another followed.</p> - -<p>Through the spyglass Frank could see them clearly, although he knew that -in his remoter position at the rear, where the radio had been set up, -Bob was unaware that the rockets had been touched off. He did not even -wait to pick his cautious way back over the rocks, which were so uneven -the boys had considered it best not to erect the radio station upon -them, but, instead, put his hand to his mouth and called to Bob.</p> - -<p>“All right? Have they signalled?” came Bob’s hail in response.</p> - -<p>“They’ve signalled,” shouted Frank. “Let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Then turning his pocket flashlight on the rocks in order to guard -against either missteps or stepping upon a snake, he made his way to his -comrade’s side.</p> - -<p>Samba was still speaking when Frank arrived, for he covered the -intervening ground hastily when once free of the rocks. And as Frank, at -Bob’s finger on his lips, stood in silence looking at their strange -broadcaster, he could not repress a smile. Samba was perspiring freely, -although the coolness of night already had set in. And anybody -unaccustomed to telephoning who has remained seated for any length of -time at the instrument, will appreciate the nervousness from which the -poor fellow suffered. But he was undaunted. And what was most to the -point, considered Frank, was the fact that his nervousness was not -betrayed in his voice. What it was he was saying in the dialect of the -region, Frank of course could not understand. But Samba was delivering -it with unction and solemnity, and Frank could not but reflect that in -this semi-civilized man lay the makings of a remarkable actor. The truth -is, of course, that primitive peoples naturally possess histrionic -possibilities such as more highly civilized beings must struggle and -often without result to attain.</p> - -<p>Turning toward Bob, Samba lifted his eyebrows in a funny quizzical -glance, a question evidently as to what to do now. Bob could not refrain -from laughing. Placing a big hand over the transmitter, he asked whether -Samba had said all that had been outlined to him to say.</p> - -<p>The black nodded, and when Bob said “Well, that’s all, then,” and closed -the circuit, he breathed a great sigh of relief.</p> - -<p>“Him tough job,” said Samba simply, running his big hand over his -sweating shiny face. Then a look of pride crossed his features. “Him -good job, hey?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Both boys thwacked him heartily on the back.</p> - -<p>“I couldn’t understand a word of it, Samba,” said Frank. “But it sounded -mighty solemn and strong to me.”</p> - -<p>“Me, too,” agreed Bob, slangily.</p> - -<p>Samba grinned.</p> - -<p>In the meantime, at the plains village made headquarters by The Prophet, -raw drama was being enacted.</p> - -<p>Entering in the late afternoon, the party presented a not unimpressive -array. At the head marched Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome, both lean, tall, -capable looking, dressed in semi-military costumes of khaki topped by -broad-brimmed campaign hats such as are still worn throughout the -American West. Revolvers swung at their sides, rifles over their -shoulders.</p> - -<p>Behind marched the ten men of the guard in double file, shouldering -their rifles and keeping step with military precision. And behind them -came the fifty bearers, tall strapping fellows all and handy men with -the long keen knives in sheaths at the waist. Lake natives selected at -Masaka for their strength and intelligence, they were all picked men. -And Mr. Hampton had impressed upon them the possibility of trouble and -received from each the assurance that he would stand by in case of -attack, but would give the native populace no cause for taking offense -unless attacked.</p> - -<p>At the head of the bearers marched Jack, it being agreed that it would -be best for him not to appear with Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome when they -dealt with the chief of the village in order that later, when he should -slip away to conceal the radio, his absence would go unnoticed. As for -the radio, it and the aerial and loudspeaker were all packed in two -small boxes borne by bearers in the middle of the line where they would -be least noticed.</p> - -<p>At the very rear of the procession moved Niellsen, with his motion -picture camera and tripod, two bearers carrying his film case. Rightly -it had been figured that the front and rear of the procession were the -two points of chief interest to onlookers, and that in placing Niellsen -at the rear he would become a center of attention. And that was the -thing to be desired, when Jack should set about his appointed task.</p> - -<p>Tall warriors, black as ebony, some like the Masai tribesmen who are the -giants of Africa, attaining a height of six feet seven or eight, crowded -around. With their great hide shields and twelve foot spears, they -presented a threatening appearance. But none attempted to lay hands on -the members of the column as it proceeded through the village toward the -chief’s hut. Indeed, the threatening presence of the gun-bearing guard -had a salutary effect. Well enough did the warriors know the power of -the white men’s guns. In fact, envious glances were cast at the bearers -by warriors desiring to possess a gun more than anything else.</p> - -<p>Straight to the open space or central plaza of the village moved the -party. Then Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome halted, and a tall commanding -figure of a man somewhat advanced in years but still erect came to meet -them. This was Chief Namla. Hobbling at his side, wrapped in a cotton -blanket, moved a wizened figure with a face so old and wrinkled it was -monkey-like.</p> - -<p>Chief Namla halted some ten paces from the two white men, and the aged -man-monkey beside him likewise came to a halt, staring at the strangers -with beady bright eyes. The chief’s glance was cold and hostile, but -that of the other, whom they took to be the tribal medicine man, -contained a palpable if unspoken gleam of appeal which caused Mr. -Hampton to start. What could the old medicine man have in mind?</p> - -<p>It goes without saying that they had not invaded Chief Narnia’s village -unprovided with an interpreter. But as this man stepped forward to -speak, the two white men were dumbfounded to see the medicine man hold -up a hand as if for silence. Then from beneath his enfolding dirty robe -of cotton came a strange rattle, and over the faces of Chief Namla and -the warriors drawn up in a rude semi-circle behind him and facing the -whites appeared an expression of awe.</p> - -<p>“The spirits of Chief Narnia’s father speak and they tell the Wizard -Mfum-ba to say that these white men come not as enemies but as friends. -They bid Chief Namla to hearken to them,” he cried.</p> - -<p>And once more, while the amazed interpreter hastily translated for the -benefit of the two white men these words uttered in the native tongue by -the old medicine man did the latter let that unmistakable appeal for -help appear in his eyes. Mr. Hampton felt he could not be mistaken. And -the old wizard’s words confirmed his impression. For whatever reason yet -to be explained, the Wizard Mfum-ba wanted the white men on his side.</p> - -<p>“I have it,” muttered Mr. Hampton quickly to his companion. “Look at -that old fellow. He wants us to help him out of a hole. The Prophet is -destroying his power amongst his own people, and naturally he hates The -Prophet. We must manage to gain word with him aside. He may be just the -man for our purpose.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Ransome nodded. Then addressing Chief Namla in a firm voice, he -said:</p> - -<p>“O Chief Namla, the fame of your land has drawn my companion here that -he may see its wonders and carry back with him to the land of the white -man across the mighty ocean a picture of all that he beholds. He has -with him a magic machine which when pointed at a man, an animal or a -mountain while the magician sets it in motion takes the likeness of that -man or animal or mountain so that others thousands of miles distant may -see and behold the same thing that he sees and beholds. This is a great -magic, yet it does not take away anything from the man or animal or -mountain and does not harm them in any way. He prays that you will -permit him and his magician to travel in your country and point this -machine at whatever pleases him. In return he offers such valuable -objects as are fitting for so mighty and powerful a ruler as Chief -Namla.”</p> - -<p>Then, while the interpreter put this into the native dialect, Mr. -Ransome bade the bearers to bring forward the trade goods to be offered -the chief. Bundle after bundle was opened and laid at the chief’s feet, -consisting of many yards of gaudy cotton prints, bundles of brass stair -rods, an entire box of fezzes both red and blue, a small set of dishes -of gaudiest flowered pattern and, finally, topping the heap, a trade gun -and box of cartridges.</p> - -<p>Not until the last appeared did Chief Namla who stood with folded arms, -relax his frowning expression. Then his eyes gleamed covetously, and for -the first time he spoke.</p> - -<p>“Let the white strangers rest in the guest house,” he said. “I shall let -them know presently what I decide.”</p> - -<p>The interpreter hastened to repeat this but almost before he had -concluded speaking the wrinkled old wizard interrupted with a gabble of -words, while again from beneath his robe sounded that mysterious -rattling.</p> - -<p>“Him say Chief Namla tell white men a’ right,” announced the interpreter -hastily. Then he added on his own account: “Me think Wizard no want. -Chief go talk somebody.”</p> - -<p>“The Prophet,” said Mr. Ransome emphatically, and Mr. Hampton nodded -agreement. “You’re right, Hampton. Mfum-ba fears the influence of The -Prophet over the chief.”</p> - -<p>Nevertheless, that the chief intended to adhere to his resolve was soon -apparent. For thrusting the old wizard aside impatiently, as if angered -by his importunities, he indicated to some women who came running -forward that the presents to him should be borne away, and then turned -without more words and strode in the direction of a hut somewhat larger -than the rest at one side of the square.</p> - -<p>For the moment there was nothing to do except obey. And as the warriors -melted away at a sharp command flung over Chief Narnia’s shoulder, Mr. -Hampton and Mr. Ransome followed several women who approached and told -the interpreter they were to lead the party to the guest house. This -proved to be a commodious hut, entirely of grass, both walls and roof, -standing on the right of the large hut into which the chief had -disappeared and separated from it only by a narrow passage some eight -feet in width.</p> - -<p>The bearers squatted outside the hut, and the guards leaned against the -wall, but the four white men of the party, for Jack and Niellsen had -come forward to join the leaders, retired within for a consultation. The -hut was clean and free from odors, and with a sigh they sank down on the -small mushroom-like stools standing about and relaxed.</p> - -<p>“Nothing to do except wait, I suppose,” said Mr. Ransome finally, after -the matter had been discussed from various angles. “But if Chief Namla -doesn’t soon send for us, we shall have to take the next step. And that -will be to summon him and inform him, as we planned, that we intend to -invoke the white man’s Great Spirit to rout his evil counselor, The -Prophet. We shall have to speak without mincing matters, and carry it -off with a high hand.”</p> - -<p>“Provided I can first find a way of fixing up the radio,” said Jack. -“And I believe that way already has been found. Did you notice the chief -disappear into the next hut?”</p> - -<p>The others nodded.</p> - -<p>“Well, doesn’t it strike you that if he was going to consult The -Prophet, that gentleman is located inside there?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” said Mr. Hampton.</p> - -<p>“Only a narrow eight-foot alleyway separates the two huts,” said Jack. -“Suppose we placed the radio so that when Samba speaks his piece the -voice will seem to come from The Prophet’s own hut? Wouldn’t that be -pretty effective?”</p> - -<p>“It certainly would, Jack,” said Mr. Ransome. “But how do you propose to -do it?”</p> - -<p>Before Jack could reply, there came an interruption from an unexpected -quarter. The grass wall at the rear was parted, and between the bundles -of thatch which closed again behind him entered none other than the -wrinkled old medicine man calling himself the Wizard Mfum-ba. He looked -from one to the other, then set his fingers to his lips, after which he -spread out his hands as if in deprecation.</p> - -<p>“I believe he wants the interpreter,” said Jack, quickest to grasp the -meaning of the gesture. And stepping to the doorway of the hut, he -summoned the interpreter from the group outside. The old wizard’s face -showed relief at the fellow’s appearance, and drawing him close he began -to whisper to him. Several times the interpreter started to speak, only -to be interrupted, but at length with a nod of the head and a low-voiced -assurance, he turned from the old medicine man to Mr. Ransome.</p> - -<p>“Him say much,” he declared. “Too much me tell. But him mean Prophet bad -man, take away honor from Mfum-ba so him be cast out by tribe unless him -save face. Him say he help white men kill Prophet.”</p> - -<p>“We don’t want to kill The Prophet but to capture him,” said Mr. -Hampton. “Look here, you ask him if he’ll help us capture him and carry -him away?”</p> - -<p>When this was translated, Mfum-ba shook his head in emphatic assurance. -Quite evidently he was willing to go any length to be rid of an -obnoxious rival.</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXVII' title='XXVII: JACK WORKS FAST'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXVII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>JACK WORKS FAST</span> -</h2> - -<p>Thereupon the four white men together with the medicine man and the -interpreter put their heads together, with what result will presently be -seen. And at length the Wizard Mfum-ba, after first poking an opening in -the straw wall with a finger and peering out, parted the thatch -sufficiently to permit him to slip out the way he had come.</p> - -<p>“Well, things are looking up,” said Jack. “But one thing puzzles me. -Just one little thing. Did you all notice that out there in the square, -whenever the old fellow spoke, his words were preceded by a peculiar -rattling sound, a sound which caused a look of awe to appear on the -faces of many of his hearers?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that nothing,” said the interpreter, with the superiority of a man -who has come in contact with civilizing influences and has lost his awe -of home town ways. “Him carry li’l bag, made of skin, underneath him -robe, filled with pebbles. When him want to fool somebody him rattle bag -and say spirits talk. My uncle,” he added, “him medicine man, too.”</p> - -<p>At this naive remark, his auditors laughed heartily.</p> - -<p>“Well, now, if there’s anything to that medicine man, Chief Namla is due -to appear,” said Mr. Ransome.</p> - -<p>And scarcely had the words been uttered than one of the guards putting -his head inside the doorway announced the chief wanted them in the -square.</p> - -<p>“So far so good,” said Mr. Hampton, rising with alacrity. “Mfum-ba has -made good on one promise, anyway.”</p> - -<p>Then he added: “Bring your camera, Niellsen, and come along. Jack, I’ll -send your radio stuff in by bearer. Remember, my lad, everything really -depends on you. But take no unnecessary risks.”</p> - -<p>“All right. Dad,” said Jack, in a reassuring tone. “Leave it to me.”</p> - -<p>They went out, and in a few moments a bearer entered the hut with the -two small cases containing the cabinet receiving set and aerial and the -loudspeaker. Putting them down he, too, retired. Jack was again alone. -But not for long.</p> - -<p>He could hear voices in the grassy square outside. And peering through -the doorway, he noted with satisfaction that the bearers had shifted -position as if casually, so that now they stood in two groups, one of -which effectively screened the doorway of the hut while the other -blocked the alleyway alongside, between guest house and The Prophet’s -hut beyond.</p> - -<p>Things were working out according to schedule.</p> - -<p>When he turned around, there stood the Wizard Mfum-ba, hand outstretched -to pluck him by a shirt sleeve to attract his attention. This, too, was -according to plan, and well-pleased with the way things were going, Jack -nodded. Then he picked up the two small cases, and, one under each arm, -followed Mfum-ba through the parted thatch of the rear wall.</p> - -<p>Beyond some twenty paces and stretching for a considerable distance on -either hand lay an eight-foot-high wattled wall, surrounding the yard of -Chief Narnia’s abode. Jack looked up and down the space intervening but -it was deserted. He listened. From the square came the sound of Mr. -Ransome’s voice upraised in speech. And as it ceased, the hum of many -voices filled with uncontrollable amazement succeeded.</p> - -<p>But he must make the most of his opportunity. And already Mfum-ba had -darted away from his side with surprising speed for one so aged, and -stood at the rear of the adjacent hut, which Jack knew was inhabited by -the mysterious individual known as The Prophet. Immediately at the rear -of this hut and towering above it rose a spreading tree of luxuriant -foliage, a forest giant which had wandered down into the plain.</p> - -<p>Mfum-ba beckoned impatiently, and Jack delaying no longer ran to join -him. As he crossed the open alleyway between the huts, he gazed toward -the square. But his view of it was cut off by the dense mass of bearers -at the mouth of the alley, and so he knew that anybody looking in could -not see him, either.</p> - -<p>“Working like clock work,” he thought.</p> - -<p>To scale the tree was an easy matter. And putting down his two cases, -Jack in a trice was in the lower branches. Then Mfum-ba handed up the -case containing the radio receiving set and aerial, as Jack indicated. -Mounting into the tree, which closed about him, concealing him -completely, Jack carried the insulated wire of the aerial to the top. -Pausing only in conclusion for a hasty glance through the branches -toward the square, a glance which told him nothing. Descending, he -placed the receiving cabinet in a crotch which had caught his eye as he -passed, and where it rested as securely as if in a place especially made -for it.</p> - -<p>Working at top speed, Jack yet was careful that everything should be put -in proper order. And when he had finished, he dropped lightly to the -ground. The alley between the huts and the wattled wall was still -deserted. And from the sounds reaching him from the direction of the -square, Jack surmised his father and the latter’s companions were -successfully keeping the populace engaged.</p> - -<p>Between him and Mfum-ba not a word had so far passed, for neither could -have understood the other’s tongue. But gestures were more eloquent than -words. Mfum-ba parting the grass thatch at the rear of The Prophet’s -hut, as he had parted that of the guest house, stepped within, one -skinny, claw-like black hand left behind and beckoning Jack on. Jack set -his teeth, for the most dangerous part of his task yet remained. Then -he, too, entered the hut by this novel method, pushing ahead of him the -case containing the loudspeaker.</p> - -<p>The hut was empty save for Mfum-ba and himself. But curious though he -was to discover something regarding the identity of this mysterious -individual who inhabited it, Jack after a hasty glance around which took -in the floor pallet, a writing case upon which lay a sheet of paper -filled with fine writing in German script (that much he did note), and a -small box in one corner, proceeded to his task.</p> - -<p>That was to fasten the loudspeaker in the roof of the hut, so that the -trumpet was on the outside but concealed by a light covering of straw. -When it had been arranged to his satisfaction, and he felt certain it -would stay in position and would not be discovered except by direct -search, Jack poked the coil of wire with which to connect it to the -receiving set out of the roof so that it rolled down and dropped into -the alley at the rear.</p> - -<p>Then, listening a moment to assure himself that the crowd in the square -outside was still engaged, he indicated by signs to Mfum-ba, who stood -near the doorway, alternately peering into the square and up at him, -that his task was finished. And parting the thatch of the rear wall, he -stepped out with Mfum-ba at his heels.</p> - -<p>Then came the first upset in his schedule, which so far had gone along -precisely as planned. For as Jack stepped through the thatch, he saw a -tall Negro passing through the alley at the rear pause not a yard away -from him and stare open-mouthed as if at an apparition. If the fellow -gave the alarm, all would be lost. As this reflection flashed through -his brain, Jack became desperate. Was all his effort to go for nought, -because a chance passer-by discovered him at that crucial moment? Not if -he could avoid it.</p> - -<p>With panther-like swiftness Jack leaped toward the Negro, and his right -fist shot out and caught him beneath the ear with stunning force. The -black toppled over without a sound, and Jack caught him in his arms as -he fell. Mfum-ba stood behind him, wringing his hands, at this -unexpected catastrophe. But the next second the old wizard’s face became -wreathed in fury, and whipping a knife from his cotton robe he would -have plunged it into the heart of the poor fellow had Jack not dropped -his unconscious burden and seized the wizard’s upraised arm with a -powerful grip.</p> - -<p>Jack was almost frantic. Here he had an unconscious man on his hands, -who, as soon as he returned to his senses, would give the alarm. And he -had to deal with Mfum-ba or the latter would knife the Negro without -compunction. To make matters worse, his task was not yet completed. The -loudspeaker had still to be connected with the receiving set.</p> - -<p>Turning the man over, Jack tied his hands behind his back with his own -belt, for the naked warrior had none which could be employed for that -purpose. Then he seized him beneath the armpits and dragged him to the -rear of the guest house, where, parting the thatch, he tumbled him -inside. Running to the doorway, he pulled one of the bearers standing -outside with his back turned, watching events in the square, within, and -indicated he should keep guard over the bound man.</p> - -<p>Then again he pushed through the thatched wall, saw by a hasty glance -that Mfum-ba was alone, and, picking up the wire which had fallen down -from the roof of The Prophet’s hut, he shinned back up the tree and -connected it with the receiving set. Again he dropped to the ground and -pulling Mfum-ba with him re-entered the guest house without discovery.</p> - -<p>The bearer looked at him with lively curiosity, the bound warrior who -had opened his eyes with the deepest respect mingled with fear, and -Mfum-ba with stupefaction. But Jack wasn’t caring who stared at him, or -how. He had never worked so fast nor so furiously in his life, nor ever -under such an impulse of fear. Throwing himself flat on his back he lay -with eyes closed, resting, until his father’s voice aroused him when, -opening his eyes, he sat up.</p> - -<p>“Where did this fellow come from, Jack? And did you manage it?” asked -Mr. Hampton anxiously.</p> - -<p>“I’ll say I did,” said Jack, and he explained what he had been through.</p> - -<p>“What happened to you?” he asked. “Did things work out as planned?”</p> - -<p>“Exactly as planned,” said Mr. Hampton, while Mr. Ransome and Niellsen -who stood behind Mr. Hampton nodded.</p> - -<p>Then he explained that when summoned to the square they had found Chief -Namla already there, surrounded by a big crowd of his people. In fact, -everybody in the place was on hand, made curious to hear what the -chief’s answer to the white men’s strange request would be.</p> - -<p>“The chief asked us to show him our machine, as Mfum-ba had prompted -him,” continued Mr. Hampton. “So Niellsen set it up and let him look -into the range-finder. When he saw reflected there every hut, distant -volcano or warrior close at hand, at which Niellsen directed the camera, -he was stupefied. That was what we had expected. And so we invited his -chief men to step up and have a look. The crowd became more and more -excited.</p> - -<p>“Then we told the chief we had a communication from the Great Spirit of -the white man to deliver.” He paused, glancing at Mr. Ransome. “I -thought you did that rather well, Ransome,” he said, smiling. “Of -course, I don’t know just what hash the interpreter made of your -remarks. But at any rate, they got across.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Ransome nodded.</p> - -<p>“The Prophet was brought from his hut to face us,” he said. And he -laughed heartily, as if at some humorous recollection. “You could never -imagine what he is, Jack,” he said, “so I’ll tell you. Of course, I -can’t be sure. But I believe he is one of these soured German -professors, a man who doesn’t know the Great War ended years ago. In his -warped mind there is only one thought uppermost. And that is that -Germany was martyred in the war, that all the world was against her -without reason, and that he must obtain revenge. I think he is a little -crazy.”</p> - -<p>“At any rate, he scorned us. ‘Pigs, you think to scare me,’ he said. ‘It -is you who shall pay with your lives.’ Nevertheless, I think he was -impressed at our promise to make the Great Spirit speak from the air at -8 o’clock tonight. And he’ll be outside to listen. And so will everybody -else in the place.”</p> - -</div> - -<div class='chapter'> - -<h2 class='nobreak' id='chXXVIII' title='XXVIII: CONCLUSION'> - <span style='font-size:1.2em'>CHAPTER XXVIII</span><br /><span style='font-size:1.0em'>CONCLUSION</span> -</h2> - -<p>Sharp at 8 o’clock, Mr. Hampton and Mr. Ransome set off the rockets in -the square. And as they went up with their comet’s tail of fire, the -“Ohs” and “Ahs” of the natives could be heard all over the big enclosure -ringed by its grass-thatched huts and lighted by a fire flaming in the -center.</p> - -<p>Then Mr. Hampton, who stood full in the glare, held up his hand for -silence, and the interpreter cried that now the Great Spirit of the -white men was about to speak.</p> - -<p>To one side of the fire stood Chief Namla and beside him The Prophet, -bespectacled and wrapped in a long white cotton robe. He looked both -scornful and, to the keen discerning eyes of the only other white men, -worried.</p> - -<p>As for them, they were worried, too. They had cast all on this throw of -the dice. Would they win or lose? Would everything go as planned? Or had -Jack failed to connect the radio properly? Or had Frank and Bob fallen -down on their part of the job?</p> - -<p>Silence filled the great square, a silence accentuated by the deep -breathing of the hundreds assembled, who waited for they knew not what.</p> - -<p>Then it came. And what a feeling of relieved thankfulness filled the -hearts and minds of the white men. Except The Prophet. He started in -amazement, stared all about him as if in search of that strange -voice—the voice of Samba speaking weighty words in the native tongue. As -the voice concluded, amidst a stunned silence which had fallen upon the -multitude, leaving them breathless, awe-stricken, mute. The Prophet -turned furiously toward Mr. Hampton.</p> - -<p>“Pig, dog,” he cried, in a voice made squeaky by rage. “I might have -known. It is only the radio. I shall show you up.”</p> - -<p>But he went alone. Of all those hundreds of natives who heretofore had -been his admirers, his followers, almost his slaves, none would have -dreamed of invading The Prophet’s hut whence that voice came.</p> - -<p>Mr. Hampton chuckled, and leaning close to his companion whispered:</p> - -<p>“Jack was right. A scientific man couldn’t be fooled, but would realize -we were using the radio. He is falling right into our trap.”</p> - -<p>Just what he meant could have been understood by anyone inside The -Prophet’s hut. For as the furious man, speeding to search for the radio -receiving set which he now realized must have been concealed somewhere -within, entered the pitch black darkness of the interior, strong hands -closed about his throat, throttling all possibility of outcry. And then -a gag was thrust into his mouth, and he was propelled through the parted -thatch of the rear wall, Where a half-score armed men tossed him up on a -rude litter which they raised to their shoulders, after which they -trotted off down the alley between the huts and the wattled wall of the -chief’s courtyard and were lost in the darkness.</p> - -<p>As they melted away in the night, going in the direction of the mountain -wall, eight miles away, upon which lay the expedition’s camp, Jack -looking after them heaved a tremendous sigh of relief.</p> - -<p>“Whew,” he remarked to Niellsen. “I’m glad that’s done. But it worked to -perfection, didn’t it?”</p> - -<p>Jack was correct. Men, women and children, every inhabitant of the -village was in the square. And, therefore, none saw the shadowy forms of -the guards pass between the last huts on the outskirts and disappear -with their burden.</p> - -<p>Nor were they destined ever to see The Prophet again. For, looking -ahead, it may be stated that, kept a close prisoner but well treated -during the ensuing weeks of the expedition’s stay in that region, The -Prophet, whose real name was Professor von Hertwig, was turned over on -the return of the expedition to civilization to the Belgian authorities. -Examined by alienists and pronounced insane, he was ordered sent to an -asylum in Belgium. But on his way down to the coast under guard he -contracted a tropical fever which caused his death.</p> - -<p>That the man had not been acting solely on his own initiative but had -been the tool of cunning minds still at large was the belief of Mr. -Ransome, a belief in which Mr. Hampton concurred. But for the time being -these “higher ups” remained quiet, and no trace of them could be found.</p> - -<p>No trace of Mabele could be found, either. And it seemed likely that he -had, indeed, been lost in the storm which swept Lake Victoria the day -his stolen canoe was found overturned offshore. As to the radio set of -which he had robbed the boys, it still is in all likelihood mouldering -in its hiding place near Chief Ungaba’s village. But as they never again -passed that way, they could not very well organize an expedition to hunt -for it.</p> - -<p>A month more the party spent in the Mountains of the Moon, photographing -the volcanoes and obtaining some very excellent pictures of lions, -leopards, Uganda cobb, elephants, herds of topi, reed-buck, hippopotami -and wart-hog. Their bag of animals shot by rifle instead of camera also -grew apace.</p> - -<p>As for the natives, they could not do enough to display hospitality -toward the expedition. For the story of the voice from the sky which had -condemned The Prophet to his doom passed from mouth to mouth throughout -the vast district faster than if it had been telegraphed, it seemed. At -any rate, it had preceded the party wherever they went. And it grew in -the telling, so that before long the natives were telling of how after -the voice from the sky had spoken, The Prophet was seized by red demons -and hurried away into the bowels of Tamlagira, which opened to admit -them, displaying the eternal fires of hell leaping high.</p> - -<p>Toward the end of their stay, the members of the expedition made their -way to Lake Kivu, cupped gem-like amidst the mountains of the mighty -Ruwenzori range. And here, in what is perhaps the only considerable body -of water in all equatorial Africa which is free of crocodiles, the boys -spent their days mainly in or on the water until finally the last leg of -their wonderful trip was made to a little port on the western shore of -Lake Victoria, whence they were carried by steamer to Kisumu and by rail -to Nairobi.</p> - -<p>There, after assembling their thousands of feet of film and their many -trophies of hide and horn, they went by rail to Mombasa and after -shipping by coastal steamer to Zanzibar, transshipped to a larger vessel -which carried them up through the Suez Canal to Marseilles. And so at -length, aboard a great trans-Atlantic liner, the Radio Boys returned to -New York.</p> - -<p>Historic though their trip had been, never had they been so glad to see -the Goddess of Liberty. As they moved slowly up the harbor in the tow of -puffing, busy little tugs, all three lined the rail and solemnly saluted -her.</p> - -<p>With this, we shall bid farewell to the Radio Boys for the time being, -feeling assured that, no matter what their future adventures, if they -acquit themselves as well as in Darkest Africa they will be doing well, -indeed.</p> - -<div style='text-align:center; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; '> -<div style='font-size:0.9em;margin-top:1.4em;'>THE END.</div> -</div> -</div> - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys in Darkest Africa, by -Gerald Breckenridge - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA *** - -***** This file should be named 63099-h.htm or 63099-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/0/9/63099/ - -Produced by Roger Frank -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -<!-- created with ppr.py 20.0924 on 2020-09-02 02:16:10 GMT --> -</html> diff --git a/old/63099-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/63099-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ce685cb..0000000 --- a/old/63099-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63099-h/images/ifpc.jpg b/old/63099-h/images/ifpc.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 457c1ed..0000000 --- a/old/63099-h/images/ifpc.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63099-h/images/itpg.jpg b/old/63099-h/images/itpg.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 05529e1..0000000 --- a/old/63099-h/images/itpg.jpg +++ /dev/null |
